Citizen | CD-S500S | Operator`s manual | Citizen CD-S500S Operator`s manual

S 430
S 430 4MATIC
S 500
S 500 4MATIC
S 55 AMG
S 600
Our company and staff congratulate you
on the purchase of your new
Mercedes-Benz.
Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in our company
name. Further, it exemplifies your desire to
own an automobile that will be as easy as
possible to operate and provide years of
service.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To help assure your driving pleasure,
and also the safety of you and your passengers, we ask you to make a small investment of time:
앫
Please read this manual carefully before putting it aside. Then return it to
your vehicle where it will be handy for
your reference.
앫
Please follow the recommendations
contained in this manual. They are designed to acquaint you with the operation of your Mercedes-Benz.
앫
Please pay attention to the warnings
and cautions contained in this manual.
They are designed to help improve the
safety of the vehicle operator and occupants.
We extend our best wishes for many miles
of safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company
Contents
Introduction .......................................... 9
Product information................................ 9
Operator’s Manual ............................... 10
Service and warranty information .. 10
Important notice for California
retail buyers and lessees of
Mercedes-Benz automobiles .......... 11
Maintenance .................................. 12
Roadside Assistance ...................... 12
Change of address or ownership.... 12
Operating your vehicle outside the
USA or Canada............................... 13
Where to find it.................................... 14
Symbols............................................... 15
Operating safety .................................. 16
Proper use of the vehicle ............... 16
Problems with your vehicle.................. 17
Reporting safety defects...................... 18
Reporting safety defects ................ 18
At a glance .........................................
Cockpit ................................................
Instrument cluster ...............................
Multifunction steering wheel ...............
19
20
22
24
Center console ..................................... 25
Upper part ...................................... 25
Lower part ...................................... 26
Overhead control panel ........................ 27
Door control panel................................ 28
Getting started ................................... 29
Unlocking ............................................. 30
Unlocking with the SmartKey.......... 30
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*......... 32
Adjusting .............................................. 34
Seats............................................... 34
Steering wheel ................................ 37
Mirrors ............................................ 38
Driving .................................................. 40
Fastening the seat belts.................. 40
Starting the engine ......................... 42
Switching on headlamps ................. 46
Turn signals and high beam ............ 46
Windshield wipers........................... 47
Problems while driving.................... 48
Parking and locking .............................. 50
Parking brake.................................. 50
Switching off headlamps................. 51
Turning off engine ........................... 52
Safety and Security ........................... 55
Occupant safety ................................... 56
Airbags ........................................... 57
Seat belts ....................................... 62
Preventive occupant safety
(PRE-SAFE) ..................................... 66
Children in the vehicle .................... 67
Override switch for rear passenger
compartment .................................. 74
Panic alarm .......................................... 75
Activating........................................ 75
Deactivating.................................... 75
Driving safety systems ......................... 76
ABS................................................. 76
BAS................................................. 78
ESP ................................................. 78
Four wheel electronic traction system
(4MATIC) with the ESP.................... 81
Anti-theft systems ................................ 82
Immobilizer ..................................... 82
Anti-theft alarm system .................. 82
Tow-away alarm .............................. 84
Contents
Controls in detail ............................... 85
Locking and unlocking ......................... 86
SmartKey ....................................... 86
KEYLESS-GO card*......................... 89
Opening the doors from the
inside ............................................. 94
Opening the trunk lid...................... 95
Opening the trunk from the
inside ............................................. 96
Trunk lid emergency release .......... 96
Closing the trunk lid ....................... 97
Separately locking the trunk .......... 98
Separately unlocking the trunk ...... 98
Trunk lid opening/closing
ystem* ........................................... 99
Power closing assist for doors
and trunk lid ................................. 102
Automatic central locking ............ 102
Locking and unlocking from
the inside ..................................... 103
Seats.................................................. 104
Lumbar support............................ 104
Easy-entry/exit feature ................ 104
Head restraints............................. 105
Multicontour seat* ....................... 107
Drive-dynamic seat* ....................
Seat ventilation* ..........................
Seat heating*...............................
Rear seats ....................................
Memory function ...............................
Storing positions into memory .....
Recalling positions from
memory........................................
Storing exterior rear view mirror
parking position ...........................
Lighting..............................................
Exterior lamp switch.....................
Combination switch .....................
Hazard warning flasher ................
Interior lighting.............................
Courtesy lighting ..........................
Instrument cluster .............................
Instrument cluster illumination ....
Coolant temperature gauge .........
Trip odometer ..............................
Tachometer ..................................
Outside temperature indicator .....
Control system ..................................
Multifunction display....................
Multifunction steering wheel........
Menus ..........................................
109
110
111
113
117
118
118
118
120
120
123
124
124
126
127
127
128
128
129
129
130
130
131
133
Standard display menu ................
AUDIO menu ................................
CD changer* operating mode ......
TEL menu* ...................................
NAVI menu...................................
Distronic* menu ..........................
Trip computer menu.....................
Malfunction memory menu ..........
Settings menu..............................
Automatic transmission.....................
One-touch gearshifting ................
Gear ranges .................................
Gear selector lever position .........
Program mode selector switch ....
Accelerator position.....................
Emergency operation (Limp home
mode) ..........................................
Steering wheel gearshift control
(Speedshift) and manual shift
program S 55 AMG ......................
Good visibility ....................................
Rear view mirror ..........................
Electrically folding exterior rear
view mirrors .................................
Windshield wipers ........................
Headlamp cleaning system ..........
135
135
137
139
142
142
143
145
146
160
161
162
163
164
165
165
166
168
168
170
171
171
Contents
Sun visors ....................................
Rear window sunshade* ..............
Rear door window sunshade* ......
Automatic climate control .................
Setting the temperature...............
Adjusting air distribution..............
Adjusting air volume ....................
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL .......
Defrosting ....................................
Air recirculation mode..................
Charcoal filter ..............................
Rear window defroster .................
Deactivating the climate control
system .........................................
Air conditioning............................
Storage compartment ventilation.
Residual heat and ventilation .......
Rear passenger compartment
adjustable air vents......................
Rear passenger compartment
climate control* ...........................
Power windows..................................
Opening and closing the windows
Synchronizing power windows .....
172
173
173
174
177
178
179
179
180
180
182
183
183
184
184
185
186
187
188
188
191
Sliding/pop-up roof............................ 192
Opening and closing the sliding/pop-up roof ............................ 192
Synchronizing the sliding/pop-up
roof .............................................. 195
Driving systems .................................. 196
Cruise control ............................... 196
Distronic* ..................................... 199
AIRMATIC...................................... 211
Active Body Control (ABC)* .......... 213
Parktronic system* (Parking
assist) ........................................... 218
Loading............................................... 222
Roof rack* .................................... 222
Loading instructions ..................... 222
Cargo tie-down hooks ................... 223
Useful features ................................... 224
Interior storage spaces ................. 224
Ashtrays........................................ 232
Cigarette lighters .......................... 233
Heated steering wheel* ................ 235
Telephone* ................................... 236
Tele Aid......................................... 237
Garage door opener...................... 245
Infrared reflecting windshield ....... 248
Operation.......................................... 249
The first 1000 miles (1500 km).......... 250
Driving instructions ............................ 251
Drive sensibly – save fuel ............. 251
Drinking and driving...................... 251
Pedals........................................... 251
Power assistance.......................... 251
Brakes .......................................... 252
Driving off ..................................... 253
Parking ......................................... 253
Tires.............................................. 254
Hydroplaning ................................ 255
Tire traction .................................. 255
Tire speed rating........................... 255
Winter driving instructions............ 256
Standing water ............................. 257
Passenger compartment............... 258
Driving abroad .............................. 258
Control and operation of radio
transmitters .................................. 258
Catalytic converter ....................... 259
Emission control ........................... 259
Coolant temperature .................... 260
Contents
At the gas station...............................
Check regularly and before a
long trip........................................
Engine compartment..........................
Hood ............................................
Engine oil......................................
Transmission fluid level ................
Active Body Control* (ABC*)
fluid level......................................
Coolant.........................................
Battery .........................................
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system* .........
Tires and wheels ................................
Important guidelines ....................
Life of tires ...................................
Direction of rotation .....................
Checking tire inflation pressure ...
Rotating wheels............................
Winter driving.....................................
Winter tires...................................
Block heater* ...............................
Snow chains .................................
261
262
263
263
264
268
268
268
270
271
272
272
273
273
273
277
278
278
279
279
Maintenance......................................
Clearing the service indicator.......
Service term exceeded ................
Calling up the service indicator ....
Resetting the service indicator.....
Vehicle care.......................................
Cleaning and care of vehicle ........
280
280
280
281
281
282
282
Practical hints..................................
What to do if …?.................................
Lamps in instrument cluster.........
Lamp in center console................
Messages in the display ...............
Where will I find ...? ...........................
First aid kit ...................................
Vehicle jack, vehicle tool kit,
luggage bowl, spare wheel ...........
Unlocking/locking in an emergency ..
Unlocking the vehicle...................
Locking the vehicle ......................
Changing batteries.......................
Fuel filler flap ...............................
Opening/closing in an emergency.....
Sliding/pop-up roof .....................
289
290
290
295
296
322
322
322
326
326
327
328
329
330
330
Replacing bulbs .................................
Bulbs............................................
Replacing bulbs for front lamps ...
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps ....
Replacing wiper blades......................
Removing .....................................
Installing ......................................
Flat tire ..............................................
Preparing the vehicle ...................
Mounting the spare wheel............
Battery...............................................
Disconnecting the battery............
Removing the battery...................
Charging and reinstalling
battery .........................................
Reconnecting the battery.............
Jump starting .....................................
Towing the vehicle.............................
Installing towing eye bolt .............
Fuses.................................................
Fuse boxes in passenger
compartment ...............................
Fuse boxes in engine
compartment ...............................
Emergency engine shut-down ......
331
331
333
336
337
337
338
339
339
339
344
345
345
345
345
347
349
351
353
353
354
355
Contents
Technical data .................................
Spare parts service............................
Warranty coverage.............................
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet .....................
Identification labels ...........................
Layout of poly-V-belt drive.................
S 430 / S 500..............................
S 55 AMG.....................................
S 600 ...........................................
Engine................................................
Rims and tires....................................
Same size tires.............................
Mixed size tires ............................
Spare wheel .................................
Electrical system ...............................
Main dimensions ...............................
Weights..............................................
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. ..........
Capacities ....................................
Engine oils....................................
Engine oil additives ......................
Air conditioning refrigerant ..........
Brake fluid....................................
Premium unleaded gasoline .........
357
358
359
359
360
361
361
361
361
362
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
371
373
373
373
373
374
Fuel requirements......................... 374
Gasoline additives......................... 374
Coolants ....................................... 375
Windshield and headlamp washer
system .......................................... 377
Consumer information........................ 378
Uniform tire quality grading .......... 378
Technical terms................................ 381
Index.................................................. 387
Contents
Introduction
Product information
Product information
Please observe the following in your own
best interest:
We recommend using Mercedes-Benz original parts as well as conversion parts and
accessories explicitly approved by us for
your vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine
their reliability, safety and their special
suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
We are unable to make an assessment for
other products and therefore cannot be
held responsible for them, even if in individual cases an official approval or authorization by governmental or other agencies
should exist. Use of such parts and accessories could adversely affect the safety,
performance or reliability of your vehicle.
Please do not use them.
Mercedes-Benz original parts as well as
conversion parts and accessories approved by us are available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center where you will
receive comprehensive information, also
on permissible technical modifications,
and where proper installation will be performed.
9
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Operator’s Manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great
deal of useful information. We urge you to
read it carefully and familiarize yourself
with the vehicle before driving.
For your own safety and longer service life
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the instructions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you
or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual.
Therefore, you may find explanations for
optional equipment not installed in your
vehicle. If you have any questions about
the operation of any equipment, your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to demonstrate the proper procedures.
10
We continuously strive to improve our
product, and ask for your understanding
that we reserve the right to make changes
in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in
this Operator’s Manual might differ from
your vehicle.
Optional equipment is also described in
this manual, including operating instructions wherever necessary. Since they are
special-order items, the descriptions and
illustrations herein may vary slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehicle.
If there are any equipment details that are
not shown or described in this Operator’s
Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to inform you of correct
care and operating procedures.
The Operator’s Manual and Service Booklet are important documents and should be
kept with the vehicle.
Service and warranty information
The Service and Warranty Information
Booklet contains detailed information
about the warranties covering your
Mercedes-Benz, including:
앫
New Car Limited Warranty
앫
Emission System Warranty
앫
Emission Performance Warranty
앫
California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control System
Warranty
(California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont only)
앫
State Warranty Enforcement Laws
(Lemon Laws)
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Important notice for California retail
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz
automobiles
Under California law you may be entitled to
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund
of the purchase price or lease price, if
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix
one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by
its express warranty after a reasonable
number of repair attempts. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of
the vehicle or the accumulation of
18,000 miles (approx. 29,000 km) on the
odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs
first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is
likely to cause death or serious bodily
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to
repair two or more times, and you have
directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,
LLC in writing of the need for its repair,
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair
four or more times and you have directly notified us in writing of the need for
its repair, or
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a
cumulative total of more than
30 calender days. Written notification
should be sent to us, not a dealer, at
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC, Customer
Assistance Center, One Mercedes
Drive, Montvale, NJ 07645-0350.
11
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Maintenance
Roadside Assistance
Change of address or ownership
The Service Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be
performed at regular intervals.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program provides factory trained technical
help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to
the toll-free Roadside Assistance number
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Representatives
24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
If you change your address, be sure to
send in the “Change of Address Notice”
found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in
your own interest that we can contact you
should the need arise.
For additional information refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program Brochure in your glove box.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
literature with the vehicle to make it available to the next operator.
Always have the Service Booklet with you
when you take the vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for service.
The service advisor will record each service in the booklet for you.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used
Car” found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes,
or Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
12
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Operating your vehicle outside the USA
or Canada
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that:
앫
service facilities or replacement parts
may not be readily available,
앫
unleaded gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may not be available;
the use of leaded fuels will damage the
catalysts,
앫
gasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating, and improper fuel can
cause engine damage.
Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe under our European Delivery Program. For details, consult
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
write to:
In the USA:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
849 Eglinton Avenue East
Toronto, Ontario M4G 2L5
13
Introduction
Where to find it
Where to find it
This Operator’s Manual is designed to provide comprehensive support information
for you, the vehicle operator. For you to
find information quickly each section has
its own reference color:
At a glance
Here you will find an overview of all the
controls that can be operated from the
driver’s seat.
Controls in detail
Technical data
Here you will find detailed information
about the equipment installed in your vehicle. This section expands on the “Getting
started” section and also describes technical innovations. If you are already familiar
with the basic functions of your vehicle,
this section will be of particular interest to
you.
All important technical data for your vehicle can be found in this section.
Operation
Getting started
Here you will find all the information you
need for your first drive. You should read
this section first if this is your first
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are renting or borrowing this vehicle.
Safety and Security
Here you will find descriptions of the safety
features of your vehicle.
14
Here you will find all the information you
need for the proper operation of your vehicle.
Practical hints
This section provides fast assistance for
dealing with problems you may encounter.
Indexes
The glossary provides explanations of the
most important technical terms.
The table of contents and the index are designed to help you find information quickly
and easily.
The following publications are part of your
vehicle documentation:
앫
this Operator’s Manual
앫
the Service Booklet
Separate operating instructions will be
provided as required depending on the
equipment options installed in your vehicle.
Introduction
Symbols
Symbols
The following symbols are found in this
Operator’s Manual:
*
Optional equipment is identified
with an asterisk. Since standard
equipment varies between models,
the descriptions and illustrations in
this manual may differ slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehicle.
Warning!
G
Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life,
or the health or life of others.
왘
This symbol points to instructions for
you to follow.
왘
A number of these symbols appearing
in succession indicates a multiple-step
procedure.
컄
Page
!
Highlights hazards that may result in
damage to your vehicle.
컄컄
This continuation symbol marks
an interrupted procedure which
will be continued on the next
page.
->
In the glossary of technical
terms, this symbol is used to
cross-reference term definitions.
DISPLAY
Words appearing in the multifunction display are printed in
the type shown here.
i
Helpful hints or further information you
may find useful.
This symbol tells you where to
look for further information on a
topic.
15
Introduction
Operating safety
Operating safety
Warning!
G
Work improperly carried out on electronic
components and associated software could
cause them to cease functioning. Because
the vehicle’s electronic components are interconnected, any modification made may
produce an undesired effect on other systems.
Electronic system malfunctions could seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle.
Ensure that any repairs or modifications to
electronic components are carried out by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Other improper work or modifications on the
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
the operating safety of the vehicle.
Some safety systems only function while the
engine is running. You should therefore never turn off the engine while driving.
16
Proper use of the vehicle
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
are familiar with the following information
and rules:
앫
The safety precautions in this manual
앫
The “Technical data” section in this
manual
앫
Traffic rules and regulations
앫
Motor vehicle laws and safety standards
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is
not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us
at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
849 Eglinton Avenue East
Toronto, Ontario, M4G 2L5
17
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966.”
Reporting safety defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or
write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.
18
At a glance
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Multifunction steering wheel
Center console
Overhead control panel
Door control panel
19
At a glance
Cockpit
Cockpit
20
At a glance
Cockpit
Item
Page
1 Combination switch
5 Gear range indicator, clock
앫
Turn signals
46
앫
Windshield wipers
47
앫
High beam
2 Cruise control lever
Item
123
Page
Item
22
14 Horn
6 Lever for voice control system*, see separate operating instructions
203
7 Front Parktronic* warning
indicator
앫
Cruise control
196
8 Overhead control panel
앫
Distronic*
199
9 Glove box lock
15 Steering wheel adjustment
stalk
220
27
224
3 Instrument cluster
22
10 Glove box lid release
224
4 Multifunction steering
wheel
24
11 Glove box
224
12 Center console
25
13 Starter switch
31
Heated steering wheel*
16 Parking brake pedal
17 Hood lock release
Page
38
235
44
263
18 Parking brake release
44
19 Door control panel
28
20 Exterior lamp switch
120
21 Headlamp washer button
171
22 Front Parktronic* warning
indicator
220
21
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
22
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Item
1 Coolant temperature
gauge
Page
128
2 Fuel gauge with:
Fuel reserve warning lamp
3 L Left turn signal
indicator lamp
294
46
6 Right display with:
- Antilock Brake System (ABS) malfunction indicator lamp
A High beam headlamp indicator
7 J Reset button
290
290
46
289
127
8 Display with:
v Electronic Stability
Program (ESP)
warning lamp
164
Gear range
indicator
162
l Distance* warning
lamp1
Digital clock (see
COMAND operating instructions)
129
Vehicles without Distronic*: Warning lamp without
function. It illuminates with SmartKey in starter
switch position 2. It should go out when the engine
is running.
Item
Page
Stored speed for:
Program mode
5 Tachometer
1
Page
< Seat belt nonusage
warning lamp
K Right turn signal
indicator lamp
4 Speedometer with:
Item
9 Multifunction display
with:
Cruise control
196
Distronic*
142
10 Outside temperature indicator
11 Left display with:
1 Supplemental
restraint system
indicator lamp
292
; Brake warning
lamp, except
Canada
293
3 Brake warning
lamp, Canada only
293
? Engine malfunction
indicator lamp
294
12 Knob for instrument
cluster illumination
Trip odometer
130
Main odometer
130
129
127
23
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
Multifunction steering wheel
Item
1 Multifunction display
Operating control
system
2 Selecting the submenu or
setting the volume
Page
130
130
131
ì to end a call
to reject an incoming call
24
131
ÿ for previous system
5 Moving within a menu:
Press button
æ up / to increase
í to take a call
to dial a call
4 Menu systems: Press
button
Page
è for next system
ç down / to decrease
3 Telephone*: Press button
Item
j for next display
131
k for previous display
131
At a glance
Center console
Center console
Upper part
Item
Page
Item
Page
1 Switch for rear window
sunshade
173
7 Central unlocking switch
103
221
8 ESP (Electronic Stability
Program) control switch
80
2 Parking assist (Parktronic*
system) deactivation
switch
3 Airmatic or ABC* switch
213
10 Tow-away alarm switch
4 Level control switch
216
5 Central locking switch
Anti-theft alarm system indicator lamp
103
83
11 COMAND system (see separate operating instructions)
6 Hazard warning flasher
on/off switch
124
9 Rear seat head restraints,
switch for folding down
106
84
12 Automatic climate control
187
13 Ashtray
Lighter
232
233
25
At a glance
Center console
Lower part
Item
Item
Page
1 KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button
33
5 Distance warning function* on/off switch
206
2 Selector lever for
automatic transmission
43
6 Lower storage space
225
69
7 Program mode selector for
automatic transmission
164
3 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
indicator lamp
4 Thumbwheel for setting
distance in Distronic*
26
Page
206
At a glance
Overhead control panel
Overhead control panel
Item
Page
1 Left reading lamp on/off
126
2 Rear interior lighting
on/off
126
3 Right reading lamp on/off
126
4 Interior lighting control
125
5 Sliding/pop-up roof
192
6 Hands-free microphone for
Tele Aid (emergency call
system), telephone*, and
voice control system* (see
separate operating instructions)
237
7 Rear view mirror
38
8 Garage door opener
245
9 Tele Aid (emergency call
system) button
240
27
At a glance
Door control panel
Door control panel
Item
1 Door handle
94
2 Memory function (for storing seat, mirror, and steering wheel settings)
117
3 Seat heating*
111
Seat ventilation*
110
4 Seat adjustment
35
5 Exterior mirror adjustment
39,
168
6 Switches for opening/closing front door windows
188
7 Rear window override
switch
8 Switches for opening/closing rear windows
9 Remote trunk lid release
switch
Trunk lid opening/closing
system* switch
28
Page
74
188
96
99
Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking
29
Getting started
Unlocking
Unlocking
The “Getting started” section provides an
overview of the vehicle’s most basic functions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners
should pay special attention to the information given here.
Unlocking with the SmartKey
If you are already familiar with the basic
functions described here, the “Controls in
detail” section will help you with further information. The corresponding page references are at the end of each segment.
The locking tabs for the mechanical key
portion of the two SmartKeys are a different color to help distinguish each
SmartKey unit.
Your vehicle comes equipped with two
SmartKeys with integrated remote controls and removable mechanical key.
SmartKey with remote control
1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Unlock button for trunk lid
3 ΠUnlock button
4 Â Panic button
30
왘
Press unlock button Πon the
SmartKey.
All turn signal lamps blink once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
왘
Get in the vehicle and insert the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
Getting started
Unlocking
Starter switch positions
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
KEYLESS-GO* card (if so equipped) with you
and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Starter switch
0 For removing SmartKey
1 Power supply to some electrical consumers, such as seat adjustment
2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical
consumers) and driving position
3 Starting position
i
The SmartKey can only be removed
from the starter switch with the gear
selector lever in position P.
!
If the SmartKey is left in starter switch
position 0 for an extended period of
time, it can no longer be turned in the
starter switch.
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch and reinsert.
If the SmartKey can still not be turned,
the battery may not be sufficiently
charged.
왘
Check the battery and charge it
if necessary (컄 page 344).
왘
Get a jump start (컄 page 347).
To prevent accelerated battery discharge or a completely discharged battery, always remove the SmartKey from
the starter switch.
31
Getting started
Unlocking
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: In addition to
the two SmartKeys with remote controls
and removable mechanical key, your vehicle comes equipped with two
KEYLESS-GO* cards.
If you have the KEYLESS-GO function, your
vehicle checks whether the KEYLESS-GO
card is valid when you grasp the door handle. If your KEYLESS-GO card is valid, the
doors will unlock, and you can open them.
i
To unlock the vehicle, the KEYLESS-GO
card must be outside the vehicle, no
further than approximately 3 feet
(1 meter) away from the door.
The function of the SmartKey overrules the
KEYLESS-GO function.
왘
Grasp the door handle.
All turn signal lamps blink once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
32
Pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the selector lever corresponds to
turning the key to the various starter
switch positions.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey and the KEYLESS-GO card with
you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Getting started
Unlocking
Position 1
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once.
This supplies power to some electrical
consumers, such as seat adjustment.
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 85).
For information on starting the engine using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button,
see “Starting with KEYLESS-GO*”
(컄 page 43).
i
If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button twice, the power
supply is again switched off.
1 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
Before you press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button, the vehicle’s on-board
electronics have status 0 (as with
SmartKey removed).
Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to P.
Do not depress the brake pedal.
Ignition (or position 2)
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button twice in immediate succession.
This supplies power to all electrical
consumers. All the lights in the instrument cluster light up.
i
If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button once, the power supply is again switched off.
33
Getting started
Adjusting
Adjusting
Warning!
G
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and
rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fastening of seat belts, must be done before
the vehicle is put into motion.
Seats
Warning!
Warning!
G
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
back reclined. Sitting in an excessively reclined position can be dangerous. You could
slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you
slide under it, the belt would apply force at
the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
seat belts provide the best restraint when
the wearer is in an upright position and belts
are properly positioned on the body.
Your seat must be adjusted so that you can
correctly fasten your seat belt.
Never place hands under the seat or near
any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted.
34
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
KEYLESS-GO* card (if so equipped) with
you, and lock your vehicle.
The power seats can also be operated with
the driver’s or passenger door open. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Getting started
Adjusting
Warning!
G
Children 12 years old and under must never
ride in the front seat, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM
compatible child seat, which operates with
the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the front passenger airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise
they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or
fatal injury will result.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children
must ride in back seats and be seated in an
appropriate infant or child restraint system,
which is properly secured with the vehicle's
seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via
lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Seat adjustment
The seat adjustment switches are located
on the front doors.
1 Head restraint height
2 Seat height
3 Seat cushion tilt
4 Seat cushion depth
5 Seat fore and aft adjustment
6 Seat backrest tilt
35
Getting started
Adjusting
왘
왘
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 1 or 2.
or
Press the KEYLESS GO* start/stop
button once or twice.
or
Open the respective driver’s or passenger door.
Seat height
왘
Press the switch up or down in the direction of arrow 2.
Seat cushion tilt
왘
Press the switch up or down in the direction of arrow 3 until your upper legs
are lightly supported.
36
Seat cushion depth
왘
Press the switch forward or backward
in the direction of arrow 4 until your
legs are supported comfortably.
Seat fore and aft adjustment
왘
Press the switch forward or backward
in the direction of arrow 5.
Adjust to a comfortable seating position that still allows you to reach the
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The
position should be as far to the rear as
possible, consistent with ability to
properly operate controls.
i
When moving the seat, be sure that
there are no items in the footwell or behind the seats. Otherwise you could
damage the seats.
Seat backrest tilt
왘
Press the switch forward or backward
in the direction of arrow 6 until your
arms are slightly angled when holding
the steering wheel.
Getting started
Adjusting
Head restraint height
i
Adjust head restraint to support the back of
the head approximately at ear level.
The front passenger seat head restraint
automatically lowers after a few seconds when the front passenger seat is
not occupied. This improves the driver’s outward view as well as the forward view from the rear passenger
compartment.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.
When the front passenger seat is occupied again, the front passenger seat
head restraint returns to the last set
position within a few seconds.
Warning!
G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
왘
Press the switch up or down in the direction of arrow 1.
Head restraint tilt
왘
Manually adjust the angle of the head
restraint. Push or pull on the lower
edge of the head restraint cushion.
If the front passenger seat was moved
fore or aft while not being occupied,
the front passenger seat head restraint
returns to a position that corresponds
best with the seat’s axial position when
the seat is occupied again.
Steering wheel
Warning!
G
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving could cause the driver to lose control of
the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, and take
the KEYLESS-GO* card (if so equipped) with
you.
The steering wheel adjustment feature can
also be operated with the driver’s door
open. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
For more information, see “Front seat head
restraints” (컄 page 105).
37
Getting started
Adjusting
Steering wheel adjustment
Steering column, lengthen or shorten
The stalk is located on the steering column
(lower left).
왘
Move stalk forward or backward in the
direction of arrows 1 until a comfortable steering wheel position is reached
with your arms slightly bent at the elbow.
Steering column, height
왘
1 Steering column, lengthen or shorten
2 Steering column, height
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 1 or 2.
or
왘
Press the KEYLESS GO* start/stop
button once or twice.
or
왘
Open the driver’s or passenger door.
38
Move the stalk up or down in the direction of arrows 2. Make sure that your
legs can move freely and that all of the
displays (including malfunction and indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster are clearly visible.
Mirrors
Adjust the inside and exterior rear view
mirrors before driving so that you have a
good view of the road and traffic conditions.
Warning!
G
In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte
may escape the mirror housing if the mirror
glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
Inside rear view mirror
왘
Manually adjust the inside rear view
mirror.
Getting started
Adjusting
Exterior rear view mirror
Warning!
The buttons are located on the driver’s
door.
G
Exercise care when using the passenger
side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your inside rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
!
Electrolyte drops coming into contact
with the vehicle paint finish can only be
completely removed while in their liquid state and by applying plenty of water.
!
For information on how to reposition
the exterior mirror housing when it was
forcibly pushed forward (hit from the
rear) or forcibly pushed rearward (hit
from the front), see “Folding the exterior mirrors in and out manually”
(컄 page 170).
i
1 Driver’s side mirror
2 Passenger side mirror
3 Adjustment button
왘
Make sure that the ignition is switched
on.
At low ambient temperatures, the mirrors will be heated automatically.
For information on the electrically folding
exterior rear view mirrors, see “Folding the
exterior mirrors in and out automatically”
(컄 page 170).
All the lights in the instrument cluster
light up.
왘
Press button 1 for the left mirror or
button 2 for the right mirror.
왘
Push adjustment button 3 up, down,
left, or right according to the desired
setting.
39
Getting started
Driving
Driving
Warning!
G
Do not lay any objects in the driver’s footwell. Be careful that floor mats or carpets in
the driver’s footwell have sufficient clearance for the pedals.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
the objects could get caught between the
pedals. You could then no longer brake or
accelerate.
Fastening the seat belts
Warning!
G
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure your passengers are
properly restrained, even those sitting in the
rear and pregnant women.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident. You and your passenger should always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
40
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are wearing your
seat belt. The airbags can only protect as expected if the occupants are using their seat
belts (컄 page 56).
Warning!
G
Children 12 years old and under must never
ride in the front seat, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM
compatible child seat, which operates with
the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the front passenger airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise
they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or
컄컄
fatal injury will result.
Getting started
Driving
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children
must ride in back seats and be seated in an
appropriate infant or child restraint system,
which is properly secured with the vehicle's
seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via
lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Warning!
G
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt.
Warning!
G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest reclined. Sitting in an excessively
reclined position can be dangerous. You
could slide under the seat belt in a collision.
If you slide under it, the belt would apply
force at the abdomen or neck. That could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat
backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in an upright position and the belt is properly positioned on
the body.
Warning!
G
Read and observe the additional warning notices printed in the “Safety and Security”
section (컄 page 60).
1 Release button
2 Buckle
3 Latch plate
왘
Pull the seat belt smoothly from the
seat belt presenter.
왘
Place the belt over your shoulder.
왘
Push latch plate 3 into buckle 2 until it
clicks.
왘
If necessary, tighten the lap portion to
a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion
up.
41
Getting started
Driving
Proper use of seat belts
Warning!
G
Starting the engine
앫
Do not twist the belt when fastening.
앫
Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder
portion is located as close as possible
to the middle of the shoulder (it should
not touch the neck or pass under the
arm).
Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They
could tear.
Warning!
Do not allow the belt to get caught in the
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
This could damage the belt.
Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips (over hip joint) and not
across the abdomen.
Never attempt to make modifications to
seat belts. This could impair the effectiveness of the belts.
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and lead to death.
앫
Place the seat backrest in a nearly upright position.
앫
Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time.
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another object at the same
time.
앫
Check your seat belt during travel to
ensure that it is properly positioned.
앫
Ensure that the seat belt is always fitted snugly. You should avoid wearing
bulky clothing, such as winter coats,
when traveling in the vehicle.
앫
42
G
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive with at least one window
fully open.
Getting started
Driving
Automatic transmission
Starting with the SmartKey
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 3 and hold until the engine
starts (컄 page 31).
i
Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission
P Park position with selector lever lock
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position
왘
Make sure that the gear selector lever
is set to P.
You can also use the “touch-start”
function. Turn the SmartKey to
position 3 and release it again immediately. The engine then starts automatically.
왘
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
1 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
왘
The selector lever lock is released.
For information on turning off the engine
with the SmartKey, see “Turning off engine
with the SmartKey” (컄 page 52).
Starting with KEYLESS-GO*
You can start your vehicle without a
SmartKey using the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button on the gear selector lever.
Firmly depress the brake pedal during
the starting procedure. Do not depress
accelerator.
The selector lever lock is released.
왘
Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button 1 once.
The engine starts automatically.
For information on turning off the engine
with KEYLESS-GO, see “Turning off engine
with KEYLESS-GO*” (컄 page 53).
43
Getting started
Driving
Starting difficulties
If the engine does not start as described,
carry out the following steps:
왘
If you are starting the engine with the
SmartKey, turn SmartKey in starter
switch to position 0 and repeat starting
procedure.
왘
If you are starting the engine with
KEYLESS-GO: Close any doors that
may be open to allow for better detection of the KEYLESS-GO card.
or:
Start the engine with the SmartKey as
radio signals from another source may
be interfering with the KEYLESS-GO
card.
왘
Repeat the starting procedure
(컄 page 42). Remember that extended
starting attempts can drain the battery.
왘
Get a jump start (컄 page 347).
If the engine does not start after several
starting attempts, there could be a malfunction in the engine electronics or in the
fuel supply system.
왘
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Parking brake
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
KEYLESS-GO* card (if so equipped) with you
and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. Children could release
the parking brake, which could result in an
accident and/or serious injury.
왘
Release the parking brake by pulling
handle 2.
The indicator lamp ; (USA only) or
3 (Canada only) in the instrument
cluster goes out.
1 Parking brake pedal
2 Parking brake release handle
44
Warning!
Getting started
Driving
Driving
왘
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
왘
Move selector lever to position D or R.
왘
Release the brake pedal.
왘
Carefully depress the accelerator
pedal.
Once the vehicle is in motion, the automatic central locking system engages and the
locking knobs drop down.
i
You can open a locked door from the
inside. Open door only when conditions
are safe to do so.
!
If you hear a warning signal when driving off, you have forgotten to release
the parking brake.
After a cold start the automatic transmission engages at a higher revolution. This allows the catalytic converter to reach its
operating temperature earlier.
i
Wait for the gear selection process to
complete before setting the vehicle in
motion.
Warning!
G
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out
of P or N if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
!
Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes
premature brake and drivetrain wear.
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.
Release the parking brake.
45
Getting started
Driving
Switching on headlamps
Turn signals and high beam
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
High beam
왘
Push the combination switch forward.
The high beam headlights are switched
on.
The high beam symbol A in the
tachometer lights up.
For more information, see “High beam
flasher” (컄 page 123).
Exterior lamp switch
1 Off
2 Low beam headlamps on
왘
Turn the switch to B.
For more information, see “Lighting”
(컄 page 120).
Combination switch
1 Turn signals, right
2 Turn signals, left
왘
Press the combination switch up 1 or
down 2.
i
To signal minor directional changes,
move combination switch to point of
resistance only and release. The turn
signal blinks three times.
46
Getting started
Driving
Windshield wipers
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
Switching on windshield wipers
왘
!
Do not leave windshield wipers in intermittent setting when vehicle is taken to
an automatic car wash or during windshield cleaning. Wipers will operate in
the presence of water sprayed on the
windshield, and wipers may be damaged as a result.
Turn the combination switch to the desired position depending on the intensity of the rain.
0 Windshield wipers off
I
Intermittent wiping
II Normal wiper speed
The switch should not be left in intermittent setting as the wipers will wipe
the windshield once every time the engine is started. Dust that accumulates
on the windshield might scratch the
glass when wiping occurs on a dry
windshield.
III Fast wiper speed
i
Combination switch
1 Single wipe
2 Switching on windshield wipers
왘
Make sure that the ignition is switched
on.
The intermittent wiping interval is dependent on wetness of windshield.
Wiping will not occur with a door open.
Single wipe
왘
Press switch briefly in the direction of
arrow 1.
The windshield wipers wipe one time
without washer fluid.
47
Getting started
Driving
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
왘
Push switch in the direction of arrow 1
past the resistance point.
The windshield wiper operates with
washer fluid.
Problems while driving
The coolant temperature is over 248°F
(120°C)
The engine runs erratically and misfires
The coolant is too hot and is no longer
cooling the engine.
앫
An ignition cable may be damaged.
앫
The engine electronics may not be operating properly.
앫
Unburned gasoline may have entered
the catalytic converter and damaged it.
왘
Give very little gas.
왘
Have the problem repaired by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
!
If leaves, snow, etc. block the windshield wipers, switch off the wipers.
앫
앫
For safety reasons, withdraw
SmartKey from starter switch. Remove blockage.
Turn the windshield wipers on
again.
If windshield wipers fail to function at
all in switch position I:
앫
Set the combination switch to the
next highest wiper speed.
앫
Have the windshield wipers
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
48
왘
Stop the vehicle as soon as possible
and turn off the engine. Allow engine
and coolant to cool.
왘
Check the coolant level and add coolant if necessary (컄 page 268).
Getting started
Driving
In case of accident
If the vehicle is leaking gasoline:
왘
Do not start the engine under any circumstances.
왘
Notify local fire and/or police authorities.
If the extent of the damage cannot be determined:
왘
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Start the engine in the usual manner if no
damage can be determined on the following:
앫
Major assemblies
앫
Fuel system
앫
Engine mount
49
Getting started
Parking and locking
Parking and locking
You have now completed your first drive.
You have properly stopped and parked
your vehicle. End your drive as follows.
Warning!
G
Wait until the vehicle is stationary before removing the SmartKey from the starter
switch. The vehicle cannot be steered when
the SmartKey is removed.
Warning!
G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake or steer the vehicle.
Warning!
Parking brake
Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay, or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of vehicle movement, before turning off
the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
앫
Keep right foot on brake pedal.
앫
Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
앫
Move the selector lever to position P.
앫
Slowly release brake pedal.
앫
When parked on an incline, turn front
wheel towards the road curb.
앫
Turn the SmartKey to starter switch
position 0 and remove, or press
start-/stop button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*).
앫
50
G
Take the SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO*
card (if so equipped) and lock vehicle
when leaving.
1 Parking brake
2 Release handle
왘
Step firmly on parking brake 1.
When the engine is running, the
indicator lamp ; (USA only) or
3 (Canada only) in the instrument
cluster illuminates.
Getting started
Parking and locking
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
KEYLESS-GO* card (if so equipped) with you
and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. Children could release
the parking brake and/or move the gear selector lever from position P, either of which
could result in an accident and/or serious
injury.
Warning!
G
Getting out of your vehicle with the selector
lever not fully engaged in position P is dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline,
position P alone may not prevent your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or
objects.
Switching off headlamps
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to M.
For more information, see “Lighting”
(컄 page 120).
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P (컄 page 162).
When parked on an incline, turn front wheels
towards the road curb.
51
Getting started
Parking and locking
Turning off engine
왘
!
With the SmartKey removed and the
driver’s door open, a warning sounds if
the vehicle’s exterior lamps are not
switched off.
Place the gear selector lever in
position P.
i
Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P.
On steep slopes, turn the front wheels
towards the curb.
Turning off engine with the SmartKey
왘
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
(컄 page 31) to position 0 and remove
it.
The immobilizer is activated.
Press the seat belt release button
(컄 page 41).
i
The SmartKey can only be removed
from the starter switch with the gear
selector lever in position P.
52
Warning!
G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the door
openings when closing the doors. Be especially careful when small children are
around.
Before closing doors, make sure that there
is no possibility of someone getting caught
in a door during closing.
왘
After exiting the vehicle press the lock
button ‹ on the SmartKey
(컄 page 30).
The locking knobs on the doors move
down. The turn signal indicators light
up briefly.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch and lock
the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle
equipment may cause an accident and/or
serious injury.
For more information, see “Locking and
unlocking” (컄 page 86).
Getting started
Parking and locking
Turning off engine with KEYLESS-GO*
왘
Place the gear selector lever in P.
왘
Press and hold the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button until the engine
shuts off.
With the driver's door closed, the starter switch is now in position 1. With the
driver’s door opened, the starter switch
is set to position 0, same as SmartKey
removed from starter switch
(컄 page 31).
왘
Warning!
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the door
openings when closing the doors. Be especially careful when small children are
around.
Before closing doors, make sure that there
is no possibility of someone getting caught
in a door during closing.
Press the seat belt release button
(컄 page 41).
!
If you hear a warning signal you have either:
앫
forgotten to turn off the lights, or
앫
not put the gear selector lever in P
before opening the driver’s door
Turn off the lights or place the gear selector lever in P.
G
왘
After exiting the vehicle, press lock
button 1 on the door handle or on the
trunk lid.
The locking knobs on the doors move
down. The turn signal indicators light
up briefly.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
KEYLESS-GO* card (if so equipped) with
you, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.
For more information, see “Controls in detail” (컄 page 85).
1 Lock button on the door handle
53
54
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm
Driving safety systems
Anti-theft systems
55
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most important facts about the restraint systems
of the vehicle.
The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up
앫
The restraint systems are:
앫
Seat belts
앫
Emergency tensioning device
앫
Airbags
앫
Child seats
앫
Child seat recognition
앫
Lower anchors and tethers for children
(LATCH)
As independent systems their protective
effects work in conjunction with each other.
i
For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in the vehicle”
(컄 page 67).
56
앫
for about four seconds when you turn
the key in the starter switch to
position 1 or press the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button once. It then goes
out briefly, lights up again and remains
lit until you start the engine.
for about four seconds when you start
the engine by turning the key or pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button.
i
The 1 indicator lamp lights up and
remains lit if the key is turned to position 2 and left there or the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button is
pressed twice. The indicator lamp will
go out when you start the engine.
The restraint systems are fully operational
if the 1 indicator lamp is not lit when the
engine is running.
A malfunction in the system has been detected, if the 1 indicator lamp:
앫
fails to go out after approximately four
seconds.
앫
does not come on at all.
앫
comes on after the engine was started
or while driving.
For safety reasons, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to
have the system checked.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 289).
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
In the event that the 1 indicator lamp lights
up during driving or does not come on at all,
the SRS may not be operational. For your
safety, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the system checked;
otherwise the SRS may not be activated
when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which
could also result in injury.
Improper work on the restraint systems, including incorrect installation and removal,
can lead to possible injury through an unintended activation of the SRS.
In addition, through improper work there is
a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or
causing unintended airbag deployment.
Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Airbags
Warning!
Warning!
G
Airbags are designed to reduce the potential
of injury and fatality in certain frontal impacts (front airbags), side impacts (side impact airbags and head protection window
curtain airbags) or rollovers (head protection window curtain airbags). However, no
system available today can totally eliminate
injuries and fatalities.
The activation of the SRS temporarily releases a small amount of dust from the airbags.
This dust, however, is neither injurious to
your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the
vehicle. The dust might cause some temporary breathing difficulty for people with asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this,
you may wish to get out of the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
vehicle after the airbag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.
G
To reduce the risk of injury when the front
airbags inflate, it is very important for the
driver and front passenger to always be in a
properly seated position and to wear your
seat belts.
For maximum protection in the event of a
collision always be in normal seated position
with your back against the seat backrest.
Fasten your seat belt and ensure that it is
properly positioned on your body.
Since the airbag inflates with considerable
speed and force, a proper seating and hands
on steering wheel position will help to keep
you at a safe distance from the airbag. Occupants who are unbelted, out of position or
too close to the airbag can be seriously injured by an airbag as it inflates with great
force in the blink of an eye:
앫
Sit properly belted in an upright position
with your back against the seat backrest.
57
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫
Adjust the driver seat as far as possible
rearward, still permitting proper operation of vehicle controls. The distance
from the center of the driver’s breastbone to the center of the airbag cover on
the steering wheel must be at least ten
inches (25 cm) or more. You should be
able to accomplish this by a combination of adjustments to the seat and
steering wheel. If you have any problems, please see your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
Do not lean with your head or chest
close to the steering wheel or dashboard.
앫
Keep hands on the outside of steering
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and
potential severity of hand/arm injury
when driver front airbag inflates.
앫
Adjust the front passenger seat as far as
possible rearward from the dashboard
when the seat is occupied.
58
앫
앫
Occupants, especially children, should
never lean their heads in the area of the
door where the side airbag inflates. This
could result in serious injuries or death
should the airbag be triggered. Always
sit upright, properly use the seat belts
and appropriate size infant or child restraint system.
Children 12 years old and under must
never ride in the front seat, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized
BabySmartTM compatible child seat,
which operates with the BabySmartTM
system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it
is properly installed. Otherwise they will
be struck by the airbag when it inflates
in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injuries to you or other occupants.
If you sell your vehicle you are responsible
to make the buyer aware of these points. Be
sure to give the buyer this Operator’s Manual.
Warning!
G
Accident research shows that the safest
place for children in an automobile is in the
rear seat. Should you choose to place a child
12 years old or under in the front passenger
seat of your vehicle, you must properly use
a BabySmartTM child restraint which will
turn off the passenger front airbag.
BabySmartTM will not, however, turn off any
side impact airbag.
It should be noted that with respect to both
front and rear side impact airbags there is a
possibility for a side airbag related injury if
occupants, especially children, are not properly seated or restrained when next to a side
airbag which needs to deploy rapidly in a
side impact in order to do its job.
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
follow these guidelines:
(1) Occupants, especially children, should
never place their bodies or lean their
heads in the area of the door where the
side airbag inflates. This could
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
result in serious injuries or death should
the side airbag be activated.
(2) Always sit upright, properly use the seat
belts and use an appropriately sized infant or child restraint system for all children 12 years old or under.
(3) Always wear seat belts properly.
If you believe that, even with the use of
these guidelines, it would be safer for your
rear seat occupants to have both rear door
mounted side airbags deactivated, then deactivation can be accomplished upon your
written request to do so at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center at an additional cost.
Please contact your local authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) for details.
i
Airbags are designed to activate only in
certain frontal impacts (front airbags),
side impacts (side impact and head
protection window curtain airbags)
which exceed preset thresholds, and in
certain rollovers (head protection window curtain airbags). Only during these
events will they provide their supplemental protection.
The driver and passengers should always wear their seat belts. Otherwise it
is not possible for the airbags to provide their supplemental protection.
We caution you not to rely on the presence of the airbags in order to avoid
wearing your seat belt.
Your vehicle was originally equipped
with airbags that are designed to activate in certain impacts exceeding a
preset threshold to reduce the potential and severity of injury. It is important
for your safety and that of your passenger that you replace deployed airbags
and repair any malfunctioning airbags
to ensure that the vehicle will continue
to provide supplemental crash protection for occupants.
In cases of other types of impacts and
impacts below airbag deployment
thresholds, the airbags will not be activated. The driver and passengers will
then be protected to the extent possible by a properly fastened seat belt. A
properly fastened seat belt is also
needed to provide the best possible
protection in a rollover.
59
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
emergency tensioning device and
airbag
Warning!
앫
앫
60
No modifications of any kind may be
made to any components or wiring of
the SRS. This includes changing or removing any component or part of the
SRS, the installation of additional trim
material, badges etc. over the steering
wheel hub, front passenger airbag cover, door trim panels, or door frame
trims, and installation of additional electrical/electronic equipment on or near
SRS components and wiring. Keep area
between airbags and occupants free
from objects (e.g. packages, purses,
umbrellas, etc.).
앫
An airbag system component within the
steering wheel gets hot after the airbag
has inflated. Do not touch.
앫
Improper work on the system, including
incorrect installation and removal, can
lead to possible injury through an unintended activation of the SRS.
앫
In addition, through improper work
there is a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended airbag deployment. Work on the SRS must
therefore only be performed by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
Do not pass belts over sharp edges.
They could tear.
앫
앫
Do not make any modification that could
change the effectiveness of the belts.
앫
Do not hang items such as coat hangers
from the coat hooks or handles over the
door. These items may turn into projectiles and cause head and other injuries
when curtain airbag is deployed.
For your protection and the protection
of others, when scrapping the airbag
unit or emergency tensioning device,
our safety instructions must be followed. These instructions are available
from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
앫
Given the considerable deployment
speed and the textile structure of the
airbags, there is the possibility of abrasions or other injuries resulting from airbag deployment.
앫
G
Damaged seat belts or belts that were
highly stressed in an accident must be
replaced and their anchoring points
must also be checked. Use only belts installed or supplied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Airbags and ETDs are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. An airbag
or emergency tensioning device (ETD)
that was activated must be replaced.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
When you sell your vehicle we strongly
urge you to give notice to the subsequent
owner that it is equipped with an SRS by
alerting them to the applicable section in
the Operator’s Manual.
The front passenger airbag will only be deployed if:
앫
the front passenger seat is occupied
앫
the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp in the center console is not lit
(컄 page 69)
앫
the impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold
Front airbags
Driver and passenger airbags are deployed:
!
Do not place objects heavier than 20
lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger seat.
This could cause the front or side impact airbag on the front passenger side
to deploy in a crash which exceeds the
system's deployment threshold.
앫
in the event of a frontal impact
Side impact airbags, window curtain
airbags
앫
if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
The side impact airbags and window curtain airbags are deployed:
앫
independently of the side impact airbags
The airbags will not deploy in impacts
which do not exceed the system’s deployment thresholds. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belts.
앫
on the impacted side of the vehicle
앫
in impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold
앫
independently of the front airbags
In addition, the window curtain airbags 3
are deployed:
앫
1 Driver’s airbag
2 Front passenger airbag
in certain vehicle rollovers
The side impact airbags 4 are not deployed
in impacts which do not exceed the system’s deployment threshold.
61
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The front passenger side impact airbag 2
will only deploy if the system senses that
the front passenger seat is occupied.
The window curtain airbags fill up the area
between the A and C pillars (see arrows).
Seat belts
The seat belt nonusage warning lamp <
in the instrument cluster lights up and a
warning sounds for a short time when you
turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 2 or press the KEYLESS-GO* (if so
equipped) start/stop button twice and the
driver’s seat belt is not fastened.
After starting the engine, the seat belt nonusage warning lamp blinks for a brief period to remind the driver and passengers to
fasten their seat belts.
3 Window curtain airbag
4 Side impact airbags
The use of seat belts and infant and child
restraint systems is required by law in
most states and all Canadian provinces.
Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
occupants should have their seat belts fastened whenever the vehicle is in motion.
For information on fastening seat belts,
see “Getting started” (컄 page 29).
62
i
For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in the vehicle”
(컄 page 67).
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure your passengers are
properly restrained, even those sitting in the
rear and pregnant women.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident. You and your passengers should
always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are properly wearing
your seat belt. Airbags can only protect as
they are designed if the occupants are properly wearing their seat belts.
Warning!
G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest reclined. Sitting in an excessively
reclined position can be dangerous. You
could slide under the seat belt in a collision.
If you slide under it, the belt would apply
force at the abdomen or neck. That could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat
backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in an upright position and the belt is properly positioned on
the body.
Warning!
Warning!
G
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced
and their anchoring points must also be
checked.
Only use seat belts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Do not make any modifications to the seat
belts. This can lead to unintended activation
or to failure.
Have all work carried out only by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
G
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt.
63
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
앫
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
앫
Seat belts can only work when used
properly. Never wear seat belts in any
other way than as described in this section, as that could result in serious injuries in case of an accident.
앫
Each occupant should wear their seat
belt at all times, because seat belts help
reduce the likelihood of and potential
severity of injuries in accidents, including rollovers. The integrated restraint
system includes SRS (driver airbag,
front passenger airbag, side impact airbags, head protection window curtain
airbags for side windows), ETD (seat belt
emergency tensioning device), and front
seat knee bolsters. The system is designed to enhance the protection offered to properly belted occupants in
certain frontal (front airbags) and side
(side impact and window curtain airbags) impacts which exceed preset deployment thresholds and in certain
rollovers (window curtain airbags).
64
Never wear the shoulder belt under your
arm, against your neck or off your shoulder. In a crash, your body would move
too far forward. That would increase the
chance of head and neck injuries. The
belt would also apply too much force to
the ribs or abdomen, which could severely injure internal organs such as
your liver or spleen.
앫
Never wear belts over rigid or breakable
objects in or on your clothing, such as
eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as these
might cause injuries.
앫
Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips and not across the abdomen. If the belt is positioned across your
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries
in a crash.
앫
Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat
belt around a person and another person or other objects.
앫
Belts should not be worn twisted. In a
crash, you wouldn’t have the full width
of the belt to manage impact forces. The
twisted belt against your body could
cause injuries.
앫
Pregnant women should also use a
lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
should be positioned as low as possible
on the hips to avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen.
앫
Never place your feet on the instrument
panel or on the seat. Always keep both
feet on the floor in front of the seat.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Emergency tensioning device (ETD),
seat belt force limiter
The seat belts for the front and rear outer
seats are equipped with emergency tensioning devices and belt force limiters.
The ETD is designed to activate in the following cases when the seat belts are fastened:
앫
in front-end or rear-end collisions
where the force of impact exceeds a
predetermined level
앫
in certain vehicle rollovers
앫
if the restraint systems are operational
and are functioning correctly, see 1
indicator lamp (컄 page 56)
In an impact, emergency tensioning devices remove slack from the belts in such a
way that the seat belts fit more snugly
against the body. Belt force limiters reduce
the force exerted by the seat belts on occupants during a crash.
Warning!
G
An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that
was activated must be replaced.
When scrapping the emergency tensioning
device, our safety instructions must be followed. These are available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Automatic comfort-fit feature*
seat belt
An automatic comfort-fit feature* for front
seats and for the rear outer seats (only for
vehicles with electrically adjustable rear
bench seat* or with individual seats* in the
rear) reduces the retracting force of the
seat belts when they are in normal use.
!
Do not place objects heavier than 20
lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger seat.
This could cause the front or side impact airbag on the front passenger side
to deploy in a crash which exceeds the
system's deployment threshold.
65
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Preventive occupant safety (PRE-SAFE)
Warning
G
The PRE-SAFE system is intended to reduce
the effects of an accident on properly seat
belted vehicle occupants. Despite having
the PRE-SAFE systems in your car, the possibility of injuries occurring as a result of an
accident cannot be totally eliminated.
Therefore you should always drive carefully
and adjust your driving to the prevailing
road, weather, and traffic conditions.
In such cases, the following systems are
automatically activated:
앫
The front seat belts are pre-tensioned.
앫
If the front passenger seat or rear seats
are in an unfavorable position, they are
adjusted to a better position. Rear seat
adjustment occurs only in vehicles with
individual seats* in the rear.
앫
The sliding/pop-up roof closes if the
vehicle is in a severe skid or is spinning.
i
The PRE-SAFE systems are activated at
speeds exceeding 22 mph (35 km/h).
When the driving dynamic situation has
passed without an accident occurring,
the pre-tensioning on the seat belts is
deactivated.
You can then adjust the seats and the
sliding sunroof to their previous position.
If the seat belts do not release:
왘
Your vehicle automatically takes preventive measures to better protect the occupants in the following hazardous
situations:
앫
You execute an emergency braking maneuver and the Brake Assist System
(컄 page 78) is activated.
앫
The PRE-SAFE system detects a critical
driving dynamics situation.
66
Adjust the backrest or seat slightly to
the rear until the seat belt tension is diminished.
The locking mechanism releases.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Children in the vehicle
If an infant or child is traveling with you in
the vehicle:
앫
앫
Secure the child using an infant or child
restraint appropriate for the age and
size of the child and recommended for
use by Mercedes-Benz.
Ensure that the infant or child is properly secured at all times while the vehicle is in motion.
Infant and child restraint seats and information on choosing an appropriate restraint system can be obtained from any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Infant and child restraint systems
BabySmartTM
Use only a
compatible child
restraint for the front passenger seat in
this vehicle.
We recommend all infants and children be
properly restrained at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
All lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s
seat belt have special seat belt retractors
for secure fastening of child restraints.
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and
let seat belt retract completely. The seat
belt can again be used in the usual manner.
i
Information on child seats with mounting fittings for tether anchorages
(컄 page 71).
For information on “LATCH”-type child
seat mounts (컄 page 72).
To fasten a child restraint, follow child restraint instructions for mounting. Then pull
the shoulder belt out completely and let it
retract. During seat belt retraction, a ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate that
the special seat belt retractor is activated.
The belt is now locked. Push down on child
restraint to take up any slack.
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.
67
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Never release the seat belt buckle while the
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat
belt retractor will be deactivated.
!
The use of infant or child restraints is
required by law in all 50 states, the District of Columbia, the U.S. territories,
and all Canadian provinces.
Infants and small children should be
seated in an appropriate infant or child
restraint system properly secured by a
lap-shoulder belt or, if so equipped, a
child restraint lower anchorage system
that complies with U.S. Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225
and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards 213 and 210.2.
68
A statement by the child restraint manufacturer of compliance with this standard can be found on the instruction
label on the restraint and in the instruction manual provided with the restraint.
When using any infant or child restraint
system, be sure to carefully read and
follow all manufacturer’s instructions
for installation and use.
Please read and observe warning labels
affixed to inside of vehicle and to infant
or child restraints.
Warning!
G
Children 12 years old and under must never
ride in the front seat, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM
compatible child seat, which operates with
the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise
they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or
fatal injury will result.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children
must ride in back seats and be seated in an
appropriate infant or child restraint system,
which is properly secured with the vehicle's
seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via
lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Infants and small children should never
share a seat belt with another occupant.
During an accident, they could be crushed
between the occupant and seat belt.
Children too big for child restraint systems
must ride in back seats using regular seat
belts. Position shoulder belt across chest
and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster
seat may be necessary to achieve proper
belt positioning for children from 41 lbs. until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder
belt fits properly without a booster.
Do not leave children, unattended in the vehicle, even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system. Unsupervised children in a child restraint system may use vehicle equipment and may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
system
The “PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF” indicator
lamp 1 located in the center console will
be illuminated, except with the SmartKey
removed or in starter switch position 0.
i
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
When the child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the
seat belt to prevent the child restraint from
becoming a projectile in the event of an accident.
Special BabySmartTM compatible child
seats, designed for use with the
Mercedes-Benz system and available at
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center are
required for use with the BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system. With the special
child seat properly installed, the passenger
front airbag will not deploy.
The system does not deactivate the
side impact airbag or the emergency
tensioning device.
1 Indicator lamp
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.
69
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Self-test BabySmartTM without special
child seat installed
After turning the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the
KEYLESS-GO* (if so equipped) start/stop
button once or twice, the
“PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF” indicator
lamp 1 located in the center console lights
up for approximately 6 seconds and then
goes out.
If the indicator lamp should not come on or
is continuously lit, the system is not functioning. You must see an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center before seating any
child on the passenger seat.
For more information see (컄 page 294).
70
Warning!
G
Warning!
G
The BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system will ONLY work with a special child seat
designed to operate with it. It will not work
with child seats which are not BabySmartTM
compatible.
When using a BabySmartTM compatible
child seat on the front passenger seat, the
passenger front airbag will not deploy only if
the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
remains illuminated.
Never place anything between seat cushion
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
the effectiveness of the deactivation system. The bottom of the child seat must
make full contact with the passenger seat
cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat
could cause injuries to the child in case of an
accident, instead of protecting the child.
Please be sure to check the indicator every
time you use the special system child seat.
Should the light go out while the restraint is
installed, please check installation. If the
light remains out, do not use the
BabySmartTM restraint to transport children
on the front passenger seat until the system
has been repaired.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of special child seats.
Do not place powered-on laptops, cell
phones and like electronic devices on the
front passenger seat. Signals from such devices may interfere with the BabySmartTM
system. Such signal interference may cause
the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
not to come on during self-test or be continuously lit, indicating that the system is not
functioning.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Installation of infant and child restraint
systems
This vehicle is equipped with tether anchorages for a top tether strap at each of
the rear seating positions.
Head restraints must be positioned such
that the top tether strap can pass freely
between the head restraint and top of seat
back.
왘
Securely fasten hook 2, which is part of
the tether strap, to anchorage ring 3.
i
For safety reasons, please make sure
that the hook has attached to the ring
beyond the safety catch, as illustrated.
Make sure that the tether strap is not
twisted.
왘
Reinstall cover after removing the
tether strap.
Warning!
1 Cover of top anchorage ring
왘
Remove cover 1 from anchorage ring.
왘
Store cover 1 in a convenient place
(e.g. glove box).
왘
Guide tether strap between head restraint and top of seat back.
2 Hook
3 Anchorage ring
G
Vehicles with adjustable rear seats/bench*:
Never adjust the rear seat position after installing the child restraint. Adjusting the rear
seat position after installing the child restraint could damage the child restraint
and/or introduce undesirable slack into the
webbing and loosen or misposition the child
restraint, lessening the effectiveness of the
child restraint and thus increasing the
chance or severity of injury in an accident.
71
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Child seat anchors – “LATCH” type
This vehicle is equipped with two “LATCH”
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
type anchors (at each of the outer rear
seats) for the installation of a “LATCH”
child seat with the matching anchor fittings.
If you have not installed a child seat, the
“LATCH” anchor fittings are covered with
an upholstery blend.
72
왘
Turn installation device 4 to a vertical
position so that upholstery blend 3
does not fold down.
왘
Install child seat according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
A solid connection is established between the child seat and the body of
the vehicle.
1 Indicates the position of the anchors
2 Anchors
3 Upholstery blend
4 Installation device
왘
Move rear power seats*/bench* to the
rearmost position (컄 page 113).
왘
Fold upholstery blend 3 upward.
Do not adjust rear power seat*/bench*
position after installing child restraint.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Vehicles with adjustable rear seats/bench*:
Never adjust the rear seat position after installing the child restraint. Adjusting the rear
seat position after installing the child restraint could damage the child restraint
and/or introduce undesirable slack into the
webbing and loosen or misposition the child
restraint, lessening the effectiveness of the
child restraint and thus increasing the
chance or severity of injury in an accident.
i
The child seat must be firmly attached
in the right and left side anchor fittings.
Make sure that the seat belt for the
center seat can operate freely with a
child seat installed.
Non-“LATCH” type child seats may also
be used and can be installed using the
vehicle’s seat belt system. Install child
seat according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
Warning!
G
Children too big for child restraint systems
must ride in back seats using regular seat
belts. Position shoulder belt across chest
and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster
seat may be necessary to achieve proper
belt positioning for children from 41 lbs. until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder
belt fits properly without a booster.
Install child seat according to manufacturer’s instructions.
The child seat must be firmly attached in
right and left side anchor fittings 2.
An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
loose during an accident which could result
in serious injury or death to your child.
Damaged or impact damaged child seats or
child seat mounting fittings must be replaced.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system.
73
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Override switch for rear passenger
compartment
!
The rear door windows can still be operated with the switches located in the
driver’s door.
You can disable select functions in the rear
passenger compartment for added safety
(for instance when you have children riding
in the rear passenger compartment).
Warning!
You can disable the following functions in
the rear passenger compartment:
앫
rear door window operation
(컄 page 188)
앫
adjustment of front passenger seat
from the rear* (컄 page 115)
앫
cigarette lighter in rear (컄 page 234)
1 Override switch
Activating override switch
왘
Slide override switch 1 to the right.
The functions in the rear are disabled.
The switch is located on the driver’s door.
Deactivating override switch
왘
Slide override switch 1 to the left.
The functions in the rear are enabled
again.
74
G
Activate the override switch when children
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle.
The children may otherwise injure themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the window opening.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
KEYLESS-GO* card (if so equipped) with
you, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Safety and Security
Panic alarm
Panic alarm
An audible alarm and blinking exterior
lamps will operate for approximately
21/2 minutes.
Activating
왘
Press and hold button 1 for at least one
second.
Deactivating
왘
Press button 1 again.
or
왘
1 Â button
Insert SmartKey in starter switch.
i
For operation in the USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
75
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Driving safety systems
In this section you will find information on
the following driving safety systems:
Warning!
G
앫
ABS (Antilock Brake System)
앫
BAS (Brake Assist System)
The following factors increase the risk of accidents:
앫
ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
앫
Excessive speed, especially in turns
앫
4MATIC (Four Wheel Electronic Traction System)
앫
Wet and slippery road surfaces
앫
Following another vehicle too closely
i
In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the ABS, ESP and the
4MATIC is only achieved with winter
tires (M+S tires) or snow chains as required.
The ABS, BAS, ESP, and 4MATIC cannot reduce this risk.
Always adjust your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
ABS
Warning!
G
Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
the ABS and significantly reduces braking
effectiveness.
The ABS regulates the brake pressure so
that the wheels do not lock during braking.
This allows you to maintain the ability to
steer your vehicle.
The ABS is functional above a speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
of road surface conditions.
At the instant one of the wheels is about to
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the
brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in
the regulating mode. Keep firm and steady
pressure on the brake pedal while experiencing the pulsation.
76
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
namely braking power and the ability to
steer the vehicle.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will respond even with light brake pressure. The
pulsating brake pedal can be an indication
of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra care while
driving.
i
To alert following vehicles to slippery
road conditions you discover, operate
your hazard warning flashers as appropriate.
Warning!
G
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction. The
ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, following another vehicle too closely,
or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
The - indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when you turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 2 or press the KEYLESS-GO* (if so
equipped) start/stop button twice. It goes
out when the engine is running.
For more information, see “Practical hints”
(컄 page 289).
77
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
BAS
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
emergency situations. If you apply the
brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically
provides full brake boost, thereby potentially reducing the braking distance. Apply
continuous full braking pressure until the
emergency braking situation is over. The
ABS will prevent the wheels from locking.
When you release the brake pedal, the
brakes function again as normal. The BAS
is then deactivated.
For more information see “Practical hints”
(컄 page 289).
Warning!
G
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes
and tires or the traction. The BAS cannot
prevent accidents, including those resulting
from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
ESP
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
monitors the vehicle's traction (force of
adhesive friction between the tires and the
road surface) and handling.
The ESP recognizes when a wheel is spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By applying brakes to the appropriate wheel and
by limiting engine output, the ESP works to
stabilize the vehicle. The ESP is especially
useful while driving off and on wet or slippery road surfaces.
The ESP warning lamp v in the instrument cluster flashes when the ESP is engaged.
The ESP warning lamp v in the instrument cluster lights up when you turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 2 or press the KEYLESS-GO* (if so
equipped) start/stop button twice. It goes
out when the engine is running.
78
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Warning!
G
Never switch off the ESP when you see the
ESP warning lamp v flashing in the instrument cluster. In this case proceed as follows:
앫
While driving off, apply as little throttle
as possible.
앫
While driving, ease up on the accelerator.
앫
Adapt your speed and driving style to
the prevailing road conditions.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting
from excessive speed.
Warning!
G
The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase the traction afforded. The ESP
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
i
Distronic* is switched off when ESP is
activated.
!
Because of the ESP’s automatic operation, the engine must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0
or 1) when:
앫
the parking brake is being tested on
a brake test dynamometer
앫
the vehicle is being towed with the
front/rear axle raised
Active braking action through the ESP
may otherwise seriously damage the
brake system.
The ESP will only function properly if
you use wheels of the recommended
tire size.
For more information see “Practical hints”
(컄 page 289).
79
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
The switch is located on the center console.
Switching off the ESP
Warning!
To improve the vehicle's traction, turn off
the ESP in driving situations where it would
be advantageous to have the drive wheels
spin and thus cut into surfaces for better
grip such as:
앫
starting out on slippery surfaces and in
deep snow in conjunction with snow
chains
sand or gravel
i
Distronic* cannot be activated when
ESP has been deactivated.
80
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period with the ESP switched
off. This may cause serious damage to
the drivetrain which is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
G
The ESP should not be switched off during
normal driving other than in the circumstances described below. Disabling of the
system will reduce vehicle stability in standard driving maneuvers.
앫
!
Warning!
1 ESP off/on
왘
Press ESP switch 1 until the ESP warning lamp v in the speedometer
lights up.
ESP is deactivated.
If one or more wheels are spinning, the
ESP warning lamp v in the speedometer flashes, regardless of the speed.
Traction control brakes a spinning wheel
even when ESP is deactivated.
ESP always operates when you are braking, even when it has been deactivated.
G
When the ESP warning lamp v is
illuminated continuously, the ESP is
switched off.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP.
Switching on ESP
왘
Press switch 1.
The ESP warning lamp v in the instrument cluster goes out. You are now
again in normal driving mode.
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Four wheel electronic traction system
(4MATIC) with the ESP
Models with all-wheel drive only:
The 4MATIC improves the vehicle’s ability
to use available traction, e.g. during winter
operation in mountains under snowy conditions, by applying power to all four
wheels.
Warning!
G
If you see the ESP warning lamp v flashing in the speedometer dial, proceed as follows:
앫
While driving off, apply as little throttle
as possible
앫
While driving, ease up on the accelerator
앫
Adapt your speed and driving style to
the prevailing road conditions
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting
from excessive speed.
!
Do not tow with one axle raised.
!
Performance testing must only be conducted on a 2-axle dynamometer.
Otherwise the transfer case can be
damaged, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
!
Because of the ESP’s automatic operation, the engine must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0
or 1) when the parking brake is being
tested on a brake test dynamometer.
Active braking action through the ESP
may otherwise seriously damage the
front or rear axle brake system.
Operational tests with the engine running can only be conducted on a 2-axle
dynamometer.
Otherwise the transfer case can be
damaged, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
81
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized
persons from starting your vehicle.
Activating
앫
앫
With the SmartKey: Removing the
SmartKey from the starter switch activates the immobilizer.
With KEYLESS-GO*: Turning off the engine by means of the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button on the gear selector
lever activates the immobilizer.
82
Deactivating
앫
With the SmartKey: Inserting the
SmartKey in the starter switch deactivates the immobilizer.
앫
With KEYLESS-GO*: Starting the engine by means of the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button on the gear selector
lever deactivates the immobilizer.
i
In case the engine cannot be started
(yet the vehicle’s battery is charged),
the system is not operational. Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
Anti-theft alarm system
Once the alarm system has been armed, a
visual and audible alarm is triggered when
someone opens
앫
a door
앫
the trunk
앫
the hood
The alarm will stay on even if the activating
element (a door, for example) is immediately closed.
The alarm system will also be triggered
when
앫
someone attempts to raise the vehicle
앫
the vehicle is opened with the mechanical key
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
i
i
Canceling the alarm
If the alarm stays on for more than
20 seconds, an emergency call is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system provided that Tele Aid service was
subscribed to and properly activated,
and that necessary cellular service and
GPS coverage are available.
If the turn signal lamps do not blink
three times, a door or the hood may not
be closed properly.
To cancel the alarm:
Close the respective element and lock
the vehicle again.
왘
Arming the alarm system
The alarm system is armed after locking
the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*. The turn signal lamps blink
three times to indicate that the alarm system is activated. The indicator lamp in the
central locking switch (컄 page 25) will
blink after approximately 10 seconds
when the alarm system is completely
armed.
Disarming the alarm system
The alarm system is disarmed when you
unlock your vehicle with the SmartKey or
KEYLESS-GO*. The turn signal lamps blink
once to indicate that the alarm system is
deactivated
With the SmartKey
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
or
왘
Press the Œ or ‹ button.
With KEYLESS-GO*
왘
Grasp the outside door handle.
or
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button.
83
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Tow-away alarm
Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual
and audible alarm will be triggered when
someone attempts to raise the vehicle.
i
The tow-away protection alarm is triggered, for example, if the vehicle is lifted on one side.
Disarming tow-away alarm
i
To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm
feature, switch off the tow-away alarm before towing the vehicle, or when parking on
a surface subject to movement, such as a
ferry or auto train.
You cannot disarm the tow-away alarm
if the ignition is turned on.
The switch is located on the center console.
If the alarm stays on for more than
20 seconds, an emergency call is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system, provided Tele Aid service was
subscribed to and properly activated
and that necessary cellular service and
GPS coverage are available.
Arming tow-away alarm
When you lock your vehicle, the tow-away
alarm is automatically armed after about
30 seconds.
When you unlock your vehicle, the
tow-away protection disarms automatically.
84
왘
Press switch 1.
Indicator lamp 2 in the switch lights up
briefly.
왘
Exit vehicle and lock your vehicle with
the SmartKey or (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO*) the lock button at each
door handle.
The tow-away alarm remains disarmed until you lock your vehicle again.
1 Tow-away alarm off switch
2 Indicator lamp
왘
Turn off the ignition and remove the
SmartKey.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Seats
Memory function
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Control system
Automatic transmission
Good visibility
Automatic climate control
Power windows
Sliding/pop-up roof
Driving systems
Loading
Useful features
85
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Locking and unlocking
In the “Controls in detail” section you will
find detailed information on how to operate the equipment installed on your vehicle. If you are already familiar with the
basic functions of your vehicle, this section
will be of particular interest to you.
To quickly familiarize yourself with the basic functions of the vehicle, see “Getting
started” (컄 page 29). The corresponding
page numbers are given at the beginning of
each segment.
For information on locking and unlocking,
refer to the Getting started section on
(컄 page 30) and (컄 page 50).
SmartKey
Your vehicle comes supplied with two
SmartKeys with remote controls and a removable mechanical key. The locking tabs
for the mechanical key portion of the two
SmartKeys are a different color to help distinguish each SmartKey unit.
The SmartKey provides an extended operating range. To prevent theft, however, it is
advisable to only unlock the vehicle when
you are in close proximity to it.
!
To prevent possible malfunction, avoid
exposing the SmartKey to high levels of
electromagnetic radiation.
The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:
86
앫
the doors
앫
the trunk
앫
the fuel filler flap
SmartKey with remote controls
1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Unlock button for trunk lid
3 Mechanical key locking tab
4 ΠUnlock button
5 Battery check lamp
6 Â Panic button (컄 page 75)
i
You can also open and close the power
windows (컄 page 190) and sliding/pop-up roof (컄 page 194) using
the SmartKey.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Factory setting
Global unlocking
왘
Press button Œ.
All turn signal lamps blink once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
The anti-theft alarm system is switched
off. If it is dark, the locator lighting
switches on.
The vehicle will lock again automatically
within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if:
Global locking
왘
Press button ‹.
All turn signal lamps blink three times.
The locking knobs in the doors move
down.
The anti-theft alarm system is activated.
Selective setting
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogram the SmartKey so that
pressing Œ only unlocks the driver’s
door and the fuel filler flap.
왘
Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about five seconds
until battery check lamp 5 blinks twice.
The SmartKey will then function as follows:
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap
앫
neither door nor trunk is opened
왘
앫
the SmartKey is not inserted in the
starter switch
Global unlocking
앫
the central locking switch is not activated
왘
Press button Πonce.
Press button Πtwice.
Global locking
왘
Press button ‹.
87
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Restoring to factory setting
왘
Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about six seconds
until battery check lamp 5 blinks twice.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
KEYLESS-GO* card (if so equipped) with you
and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. It is possible for children to open a locked door from the inside,
which could result in an accident and/or serious injury.
!
Checking the batteries
If you can no longer lock or unlock the
vehicle with the SmartKey, then either
the batteries in the SmartKey are discharged or the SmartKey is malfunctioning.
왘
앫
Check the batteries in the
SmartKey and replace them if necessary (컄 page 328).
or
앫
Use the mechanical key to unlock
the doors (컄 page 326) and trunk
(컄 page 327) as required. Lock the
vehicle using the mechanical key
(컄 page 327).
If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
88
Press button ‹ or Œ.
Battery check lamp 5 lights up briefly
to indicate that the SmartKey batteries
are in order.
!
If battery check lamp 5 does not light
up briefly during check, the SmartKey
batteries are discharged.
Replace the batteries (컄 page 328).
You can obtain the required batteries
at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Unlocking the trunk lid
Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key
You can unlock the trunk separately.
If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key,
you should do the following:
왘
Press and hold button Š until trunk
unlocks.
!
The trunk lid swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure that
there is sufficient overhead clearance.
A minimum height clearance of 6 ft.
(1.85 m) is required to open the trunk
lid.
i
왘
Have the SmartKey deactivated by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Report the loss of the SmartKey or the
mechanical key immediately to your
car insurance company.
왘
If necessary, have the mechanical lock
replaced.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
will be glad to supply you with a replacement.
KEYLESS-GO card*
Specially equipped vehicles come with two
KEYLESS-GO cards. On these vehicles, the
validity of the KEYLESS-GO card is
checked every time you grasp a door
handle.
If the card is valid, your vehicle unlocks:
앫
the doors
앫
the trunk lid
앫
the fuel filler flap
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked with the SmartKey, the trunk lid
will lock automatically after closing it.
The turn signals will flash three times to
confirm locking.
If the trunk lid was previously locked
separately (컄 page 98), it will remain
locked.
89
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
KEYLESS-GO card (if so equipped) with you
and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO
앫
앫
To prevent possible malfunction, avoid
exposing the KEYLESS-GO card to high
levels of electromagnetic radiation.
90
Always carry the KEYLESS-GO card
with you.
Never store the KEYLESS-GO card together with:
앫
Electronic items such as a cellular
phone or another KEYLESS-GO card
앫
Metallic objects such as coins or
metal foil
Doing so could impair the function of
the KEYLESS-GO system.
!
앫
앫
Always take a SmartKey with you in
case of a malfunction in the
KEYLESS-GO system.
앫
To lock or unlock the vehicle, the card
must be located outside the vehicle
within approximately 3 ft. (1 m) of a
door or the trunk lid.
In order to start the engine with the
KEYLESS-GO card:
앫
The KEYLESS-GO card must be located in the vehicle.
앫
All doors must be closed.
앫
If you have started the engine with the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, you
can only turn it off again with this button, even if you have put the SmartKey
in the starter switch in the meantime.
앫
This does not apply if, after starting, the
selector lever is still in position P. The
SmartKey will then have priority over
the card and the vehicle’s electrical
system will operate according to the
position of the SmartKey in the starter
switch, even stopping the engine.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
앫
앫
If the KEYLESS-GO card is positioned
farther away from the vehicle (e.g. inside clothing or briefcase) and can no
longer be recognized by the system,
the vehicle cannot be locked or the engine started via the KEYLESS-GO system.
If the KEYLESS-GO card is removed
from the vehicle while the ignition is
switched on (e.g. if passenger exits the
vehicle with the card), the message
CHIP CARD NOT RECOGNIZED! will appear in the multifunction display.
Factory setting
Global unlocking
왘
The vehicle will lock again automatically
within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if neither door nor trunk is opened.
Remember that the engine can be
started by anyone with a KEYLESS-GO
card that is left inside the vehicle. If you
leave the card behind when exiting and
locking the vehicle, the message CHIP
CARD DETECTED IN VEHICLE! will appear in the multifunction display.
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogram the KEYLESS-GO card so that
grasping a door handle only unlocks the
driver’s door, interior lockable storage
compartments and the fuel filler flap.
i
The vehicle could inadvertently be unlocked if the KEYLESS-GO card is within 3 ft. (1 m) of the vehicle and:
Find the card or change its present location immediately (e.g. place it on the
front passenger seat or insert it in shirt
pocket).
앫
Grasp the door handle.
Individual setting
앫
the door handle is splashed with
water, or
앫
you attempt to clean the door
handle
Global locking
왘
1 Programming button
2 “Driver’s door” symbol
3 “Global unlock” symbol
Press lock button at door handle
(컄 page 53) or trunk (컄 page 93).
91
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
왘
Press and hold programming button 1
until “Driver’s door” symbol 2 lights up.
Restoring to factory setting
The KEYLESS-GO card will then function as follows:
Press and hold programming button 1
until “Central unlock” symbol 3 lights
up.
Unlocking the driver’s door
!
왘
Grasp the driver’s door handle.
Global unlocking
왘
Grasp the door handle on the passenger side.
Global locking
왘
왘
If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle
with the KEYLESS-GO card, then either
the batteries of the KEYLESS-GO card
are discharged or the KEYLESS-GO
card is malfunctioning.
앫
Press lock button at door handle or
trunk lid.
Check the batteries of the
KEYLESS-GO card (컄 page 89) and
replace them if necessary
(컄 page 328).
or
앫
Use the SmartKey to unlock the
doors (컄 page 30) and trunk
(컄 page 98) as required. Lock the
vehicle using the SmartKey
(컄 page 93).
If your KEYLESS-GO card is malfunctioning, contact your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
92
Checking the batteries
왘
Briefly press programming button 1.
The KEYLESS-GO card batteries are in
order if the indicator lamp for either
“Driver’s door” 2 or “Central unlock” 3
comes on red or green.
!
If symbols 2 or 3 do not light up during
the check, then the batteries of the
KEYLESS-GO card are discharged.
앫
Change the batteries (컄 page 328).
You can obtain the batteries at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Checking vehicle lock status
Locking the vehicle
If you cannot remember whether you have
locked the vehicle, you can check the lock
status using the KEYLESS-GO card.
왘
Closing the side windows and
sliding/pop-up roof
왘
Briefly press programming button 1.
The indicator lamp for “Driver’s door” 2
or “Central unlock” 3 lights up in red or
green.
Warning!
Vehicle lock status:
Red:
Vehicle is locked
Green: Vehicle is unlocked
i
When the vehicle is unlocked and the
anti-theft alarm system is switched off,
the turn signals illuminate briefly. If it is
dark, the locator lighting also switches
on (컄 page 122).
When the vehicle is locked and the anti-theft alarm system is activated, the
turn signals flash three times.
Press and hold lock button at the door
(컄 page 53) until the side windows and
the sliding/pop-up roof are closed.
1 Trunk lock button
왘
Press the lock button at door
(컄 page 53) or trunk 1.
G
When closing the windows and the sliding/pop-up roof, be sure that there is no
danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure.
If potential danger exists, proceed as follows:
앫
Release the lock button.
앫
Pull on the door handle and hold firmly.
The side windows and the sliding/pop-up roof will open for as long as
the door handle is held but the door is
not opened.
93
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Unlocking the trunk lid
Loss of the KEYLESS-GO card
You can unlock the trunk separately.
If you lose your KEYLESS-GO card, you
should do the following:
왘
Press trunk lid button 1 (컄 page 95)
until trunk unlocks.
왘
Have the KEYLESS-GO card deactivated by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
왘
Report the loss immediately to your car
insurance company.
왘
Have the mechanical lock replaced if
necessary.
!
The trunk lid swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure that
there is sufficient overhead clearance.
A minimum height clearance of 6 ft.
(1.85 m) is required to open the trunk
lid.
i
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked with the SmartKey, the trunk lid
will lock automatically after closing it.
The turn signals will flash three times to
confirm locking.
If the trunk lid was previously locked
separately (컄 page 98), it will remain
locked.
94
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
will be glad to supply you with a replacement.
Opening the doors from the inside
You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
1 Locking knob
2 Inside door handle
왘
Pull on door handle 2.
If door was locked, locking knob 1 will
move up.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
i
If the vehicle has previously been
locked from the outside with the
SmartKey, opening a door from the inside will trigger the alarm.
Opening the trunk lid
The trunk lid lock is located in the rear license plate recess.
Press button ‹ or Œ on the
SmartKey.
왘
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
A minimum height clearance of 6 ft.
(1.85 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
i
To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
왘
The trunk lid swings open upwards. Always
make sure that there is sufficient overhead
clearance.
The vehicle must be unlocked.
The trunk can also be opened from the inside in an emergency, see “Trunk lid emergency release” (컄 page 96).
왘
Press the outer left-hand side of trunk
lid button 1.
95
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Opening the trunk from the inside
When the vehicle is stationary, you can
open the trunk from the inside using the
trunk lid release switch located on the driver’s door control panel.
A minimum height clearance of 6 ft.
(1.85 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
왘
Pull remote trunk lid switch 2.
Trunk lid emergency release
The trunk opens. Indicator lamp 1
comes on. It remains lit until you close
the trunk again.
The emergency release button is located in
the trunk lid.
!
The trunk lid swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure that
there is sufficient overhead clearance.
If the trunk lid does not open, it is still
locked separately (컄 page 98).
1 Handle
Illumination of the emergency release button:
1 Indicator lamp
2 Remote trunk lid switch
96
앫
The button will blink for 30 minutes after opening the trunk.
앫
The button will blink for 60 minutes after closing the trunk.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
왘
Briefly press the emergency release
button.
The trunk unlocks and the trunk lid
opens.
Closing the trunk lid
왘
Lower trunk lid by pulling firmly on
handle 1 (컄 page 96).
!
The emergency release button does
not open the trunk lid if the vehicle battery is discharged or disconnected.
To cancel the alarm, insert the
SmartKey in the starter switch or press
button Œ or ‹ on the SmartKey.
The extending handle 2 is retracted after a
few seconds.
Warning!
G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the trunk
lid opening when closing the trunk. Be especially careful when small children are
around.
i
If the emergency release button is
pressed and the vehicle was centrally
locked, the exterior lamps will flash and
the alarm will sound as the trunk lid
opens.
The power closing assist automatically ensures that the lid is pulled closed completely (컄 page 102).
2 Extending handle
왘
Push the trunk lid down gently at the
extending handle 2 until it engages into
the lock.
Warning!
G
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as visibility blockage,
exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior.
97
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
i
Separately locking the trunk
To prevent an inadvertent lockout, do
not place the SmartKey in the trunk.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the
trunk lid will open automatically if a
KEYLESS-GO card is recognized in the
area of the rear shelf or inside the
trunk.
왘
Insert the mechanical key into the
trunk lid lock.
왘
Turn the mechanical key completely to
the right to position 1.
The trunk remains locked even when the
vehicle is centrally unlocked.
i
1 Locked
2 Unlocked
왘
Close the trunk lid (컄 page 97)
왘
Pull the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey (컄 page 326).
You can only cancel the separate trunk
locking mode by means of the mechanical key.
Separately unlocking the trunk
왘
Turn the mechanical key completely to
the left to position 2.
You can now open the trunk.
A minimum height of 6 ft. (1.85 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
98
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Trunk lid opening/closing system*
왘
You can open or close the trunk lid from
the inside if the vehicle is stationary.
Pull remote trunk lid switch 2.
Closing from the inside
The trunk opens. Indicator lamp 1
comes on. It remains lit until you close
the trunk again.
왘
A minimum height clearance of 6 ft.
(1.85 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
!
Opening from the inside
The trunk lid swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure that
there is sufficient overhead clearance.
You can open the trunk using the trunk lid
release switch.
i
A minimum height of 6 ft. (1.85 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
The vehicle must be unlocked.
If the trunk lid does not open, it is still
locked separately (컄 page 98).
The trunk can also be opened from the inside in an emergency, see “Trunk lid emergency release” (컄 page 96).
You can stop the opening process of the
trunk lid.
왘
1 Indicator lamp
2 Remote trunk lid switch
Press the remote trunk lid switch 2.
The trunk lid remains in the current position.
Press remote trunk lid switch 2
(컄 page 96) until the trunk lid is closed
and indicator lamp 1 goes out.
To interrupt the closing procedure:
왘
Release remote trunk lid switch 2. The
trunk lid stops moving.
Warning!
G
Maintain sight of trunk area while operating
door mounted switch. Monitor the closing
procedure carefully to ensure that no one is
in danger of being injured. To interrupt the
closing procedure, release the door mounted remote trunk lid switch.
If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
been piled too high) in the upper motion
sequence, the closing procedure is
stopped and the trunk re-opens slightly.
99
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Trunk lid closing switch in trunk
1 Trunk lid closing switch
왘
Press closing switch 1.
Warning!
G
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
ensure that no one is in danger of being injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from
the trunk opening when closing the trunk.
Be especially careful when small children
are around. To stop the closing procedure,
press the remote trunk lid switch (on driver’s door control panel), the trunk lid closing
switch 1, or the Š button on the
SmartKey.
Closing and locking the trunk with
KEYLESS-GO*
On vehicles with trunk lid opening/closing
system and KEYLESS-GO, you can close
the trunk lid and lock the vehicle simultaneously.
The trunk lid closes automatically.
If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
been piled too high) in the upper motion
sequence, the closing procedure is
stopped and the trunk re-opens slightly.
100
i
Do not place the SmartKey in the open
trunk. You may lock yourself out.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the
trunk lid will open automatically if a
KEYLESS-GO card is recognized in the
area of the rear shelf or inside the
trunk.
1 Trunk lid closing switch
2 KEYLESS-GO switch
왘
Make sure that you have the SmartKey
and the KEYLESS-GO card with you.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
왘
Press switch 2 in the trunk lid.
Limiting opening height of trunk
i
The trunk lid closes automatically and
the vehicle is locked. The turn signals
flash three times to confirm locking.
You can limit the opening angle of the
trunk lid. The trunk lid then opens only to
approximately the height of the roof edge.
This can be useful when there is not
enough overhead clearance space, for example. The trunk lid opening height can be
limited when transporting goods on a roof
rack (e.g. presence of an MB sport luggage
container). When activated, the trunk lid
opens to approximately the height of the
roof edge.
If the trunk lid comes into contact with
an object while closing (e.g. luggage
that has been piled too high), the closing procedure is stopped and the trunk
re-opens slightly.
i
To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the trunk lid will open automatically if a KEYLESS-GO card is recognized
in the area of the rear shelf or inside
the trunk.
Warning!
G
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
ensure that no one is in danger of being injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from
the trunk opening when closing the trunk.
Be especially careful when small children
are around. To stop the closing procedure,
press the trunk lid closing switch 1 in the
trunk lid, the Š button on the SmartKey,
or the remote trunk lid switch (on driver’s
door control panel).
왘
The closing procedure can be stopped
at anytime by once again pressing the
closing switch in the trunk lid, the remote control switch in the driver’s
door, or the Š button on the SmartKey.
With the trunk lid closed, press the remote control switch (컄 page 99) and
hold for at least five seconds.
Depending on its previous status, the
opening height restriction is then
switched either on or off.
101
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Power closing assist for doors and
trunk lid
Power closing assist for doors
왘
Press the doors gently past the initial
engage position into the lock.
The doors close automatically.
Power closing assist for trunk lid
왘
Press the trunk lid gently into its lock.
The trunk closes automatically.
i
It is not necessary to slam the door or
trunk lid closed. A pneumatic power-assisted mechanism draws doors
and trunk lid closed quietly and automatically once door and trunk lid has
been latched. When the pneumatic
power-assisted mechanism has
stopped, doors and/or trunk can be
re-opened.
102
Warning!
G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the door
or trunk opening when closing a door or the
trunk lid. Be especially careful when small
children are around.
The pneumatic power closing assist mechanism cannot be interrupted once it has been
engaged.
To prevent personal injury, never actuate
the closing assist mechanism by tampering
with the door or trunk lid latch.
Automatic central locking
The doors and the trunk automatically lock
when the ignition is switched on and the
wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
i
The doors unlock automatically after an
accident if the force of the impact exceeds a preset threshold.
The vehicle automatically locks when
the ignition is switched on and the
wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or
more. You could therefore lock yourself
out when the vehicle
앫
is pushed
앫
is on a test stand
You can deactivate the automatic locking
using the control system (컄 page 155).
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Locking and unlocking from the inside
You can lock or unlock the doors and the
trunk from inside using the central locking
switch. This can be useful, for example, if
you want to lock the vehicle before starting
to drive.
The switches are located in the center console.
Press central unlocking switch 2.
i
You can open a locked door from the
inside. Open door only when conditions
are safe to do so.
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
KEYLESS-GO* card (if so equipped) with you
and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
왘
The vehicle unlocks.
The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or unlocked with the central locking switch.
Warning!
Unlocking
Central locking/unlocking switches
1 Locking
2 Unlocking
Locking
왘
Press central locking switch 1.
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked with the SmartKey or the
KEYLESS-GO* card (if so equipped) it
will not unlock using the central locking
switch.
If the vehicle was previously locked
with the central locking switch:
앫
While in the global remote control
mode, the vehicle is unlocked completely when a door is opened from
the inside.
앫
While in the selective remote control mode, only the door opened
from inside is unlocked.
If both doors are closed, the vehicle
locks.
103
Controls in detail
Seats
Seats
Information on seat adjustment can be
found in the “Getting started” section,
(컄 page 34).
Lumbar support
Easy-entry/exit feature
You can adjust the contour of the seat’s
lumbar support to best support your spine.
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
the steering wheel tilts upwards and the
driver’s seat moves to the rear.
The thumbwheel is located on the lower
side of the seat.
This allows easier entry into and exit from
the vehicle when the driver’s door is
opened. However, the engine must be
turned off.
When the SmartKey is inserted in the starter switch or you have pressed the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once and
the driver’s door is closed, the steering
wheel and the driver’s seat return to their
last set positions.
1 Thumbwheel
왘
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
should light up.
왘
104
Set the lumbar support between 0
and 5.
Controls in detail
Seats
Warning!
G
You must ensure that no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering
wheel and driver’s seat when the
easy-entry/exit feature is activated, the
driver’s door is being opened, and the engine is turned off or the SmartKey removed
from the starter switch. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause an
accident and/or serious personal injury.
You can activate the following functions:
앫
Steering column
Only the steering column is adjusted.
앫
Steering column and seat
Both the steering column and the seat
are adjusted.
Head restraints
Front seat head restraints
Information on head restraint adjustment
can be found in the “Getting started” section (컄 page 37).
Warning!
G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint to support the back of
the head approximately at ear level.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.
Removing front head restraints
왘
Press switch 1 upwards and hold until
the head restraint is fully extended.
왘
Pull out head restraint.
i
Tilt the seat backrest to the rear for
easier removal and installation of the
head restraints.
The easy-entry/exit feature can be
switched on or off in the Settings menu of
the Control System (컄 page 156).
105
Controls in detail
Seats
Folding rear head restraints back
Installing front head restraints:
왘
Press switch 1 upwards and hold for
about five seconds.
왘
Push the head restraint down until it
engages.
왘
Adjust head restraint to desired position (컄 page 35).
Placing rear head restraints upright
왘
Pull the rear head restraint forward until it locks into position.
!
Make sure that the head restraints engage when adjusting them manually.
Otherwise, their protective function
cannot be ensured.
Rear seat head restraints
Warning!
G
For safety reasons, always drive with the
rear head restraints in the upright position
when the rear seats are occupied.
Keep the area around head restraints clear
of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the
folding operation of the head restraints.
i
You can adjust the angle manually by
pulling or pushing the head restraints
by hand.
106
왘
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
should light up.
왘
Press switch 1.
The rear head restraints will fold backward.
Rear head restraint tilt
The read head restraint angle can be adjusted manually.
Controls in detail
Seats
Power head restraints, rear*
You can fold the rear head restraints backward or forward using head restraint folding switch. The switches are located
앫
앫
on the rear section of the door for adjusting the respective head restraint:
on the front center console
(컄 page 106):
왘
Make sure the ignition is switched
on.
All the lamps in the instrument cluster should light up
왘
Press switch 1 briefly.
왘
The rear head restraints will fold
backward.
왘
The multicontour seat has a movable seat
cushion and inflatable air cushions built
into the seat backrest to provide additional
lumbar and side support.
The seat cushion movement and the seat
backrest cushion height and curvature can
be continuously varied with regulators on
the right side of the seat after turning the
SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 2 or pressing the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button twice.
All the lamps in the instrument cluster should light up
Press switch 1 and hold.
The rear head restraints will fold upright.
Make sure the ignition is switched
on.
Multicontour seat*
왘
Press switch 1 up.
The rear head restraints will fold upright.
왘
Press switch 1 down.
The rear head restraints will fold
backward.
107
Controls in detail
Seats
Shoulder region support
왘
Press æ or ç on switch 1.
The air cushion inflates or deflates.
Lumbar region support
왘
1 Shoulder region support
2 Side bolster adjustment
3 Massage function (PULSE)
4 Lumbar region support
Adjusting the multicontour seat in the order listed above is recommended.
왘
Make sure that the ignition is switched
on.
All lamps in the instrument cluster light
up.
108
Press k or j on rocker
switch 4.
This selects the air cushion you wish to
adjust.
왘
Press æ or ç on rocker
switch 4.
The air cushion inflates or deflates.
Side bolsters adjustment
왘
Adjust the side bolsters so that they
provide good lateral support using
switch 2.
i
When the engine is turned off, the last
cushion setting is retained in memory
and the cushion is automatically adjusted to this setting when the engine
is restarted.
Controls in detail
Seats
Massage function (PULSE)
You can reduce muscle tension during long
trips by periodically using the massage
function.
왘
Drive-dynamic seat*
The drive-dynamic seat automatically adjusts the lateral support provided by the
seat backrest to your driving style.
Activating
왘
The indicator lamp in the button lights
up.
Press button 3.
i
The indicator lamp on button 3 lights
up. The air cushions in the lumbar region inflate and deflate (pulse).
You can adjust the characteristics of
the drive-dynamic seat using the control system (컄 page 159).
i
The massage function switches off automatically after approximately eight
minutes. The indicator lamp extinguishes.
Press button 1.
Deactivating
왘
1 Activate drive-dynamic function
Press button 1 again.
The indicator lamp in the button goes
out.
The drive-dynamic seat electronically controls the air pressure in the air chambers of
the seat backrest side bolsters. This function improves driving comfort and pleasure.
109
Controls in detail
Seats
Switching off seat ventilation
Seat ventilation*
왘
The switch is located on the door. Seat
ventilation can be activated manually with
the SmartKey in starter switch position 1
or 2 (컄 page 31) or by the summer opening feature (컄 page 190).
i
The seat ventilation is automatically set
to the highest level if activated via summer opening feature (컄 page 190).
The blue indicator lamps on the switch
show the ventilation level selected:
1 Seat ventilation switch
Level
3
Three indicator lamps lit
2
Two indicator lamps lit
1
One indicator lamp lit
off
No indicator lamp lit
왘
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
All lamps in the instrument cluster light
up.
Switching on seat ventilation
왘
Press switch 1.
Three blue indicator lamps above the
switch light up.
Continue pressing switch until the desired seat ventilation level is reached.
110
Press switch 1 repeatedly until all indicator lamps go out.
!
If one or all of the lamps blink on the
seat ventilation switch, there is insufficient voltage since too many electrical
consumers are switched on. The seat
ventilation switches off automatically.
The seat ventilation will switch back on
again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available.
Controls in detail
Seats
Seat heating*
Switching on seat heating
왘
Vehicles without seat ventilation*
Press switch 1.
A red indicator lamp above the switch
lights up.
The switch is located on the door.
Switching off seat heating
왘
Press switch 1 again.
i
The seat heating will be automatically
switched off after approximately
30 minutes.
Rapid seat heating mode
왘
Press switch 2.
Both red indicator lamps above the
switch light up.
i
The system switches over to normal
heating mode after approximately five
minutes. Only the right-hand indicator
lamp remains lit.
1 Normal heating
2 Rapid heating
왘
Make sure that the ignition is switched
on.
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
light up.
111
Controls in detail
Seats
Switching off rapid seat heating mode
왘
Press switch 2 again.
!
If one or both of the lamps on the seat
heating switch are blinking, there is insufficient voltage available since too
many electrical consumers are turned
on. The seat heating switches off automatically.
Vehicles with seat ventilation*
왘
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
light up.
The switch is located on the door. The red
indicator lamps on the switch show the
heating level selected:
Switching on seat heating
Level
2
Two indicator lamps lit
1
One indicator lamp lit
off
No indicator lamp lit
The seat heating will switch back on
again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available.
왘
Press switch 1 twice.
A red indicator lamp above the switch
lights up.
Switching off seat heating
왘
Press switch 1 again.
i
The seat heating will be automatically
switched off after approximately
30 minutes.
1 Seat heating switch
112
Controls in detail
Seats
Rapid seat heating
왘
Press switch 1 once.
Both indicator lamps above the switch
light up.
i
The system switches over to normal
heating mode after approximately five
minutes. Only the right-hand indicator
lamp remains lit.
Switching off rapid seat heating mode
왘
Rear seats
Press switch 1 twice.
!
If one or both of the lamps on the seat
heating switch are blinking, there is insufficient voltage available since too
many electrical consumers are turned
on. The seat heating switches off automatically.
Power seat bench*
The switches for adjusting the seat bench
are located at the respective rear doors.
The seat heating will switch back on
again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available.
1 Seat bench fore and aft adjustment
2 Head restraint fold/place upright
113
Controls in detail
Seats
Seat bench fore and aft adjustment
왘
Press the switch forward or backward
in direction of arrow 1.
Individual power seats*
Seat height
The switches for adjusting the seats are located at the respective rear doors.
왘
Head restraint folding
왘
Head restraint folding
Press the switch up or down in direction of arrow 2.
왘
The head restraint is folded or placed
upright.
Information on switching on seat heating*
and seat ventilation* can be found on
(컄 page 110) and (컄 page 111).
Press the switch up or down in direction of arrow 3.
The head restraint is folded or placed
upright.
1 Seat fore and aft adjustment
2 Seat height
3 Head restraint fold/place upright
Seat fore and aft adjustment
왘
114
Press the switch up or down in the direction of arrow 2.
Press the switch forward or backward
in direction of arrow 1.
Information on switching on seat heating*
and seat ventilation* can be found on
(컄 page 110) and (컄 page 111).
Controls in detail
Seats
Power seat, setting passenger seat position from rear*
The switch is located on the right rear passenger door.
This function lets you adjust the position of
the passenger seat from the rear.
Warning!
G
Make sure that no one is caught or injured
while the seat is being adjusted.
The power seats can also be operated with
the driver's or passenger door open. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
or
왘
Open the right rear passenger door.
왘
Press button 1 to adjust the front
passenger seat.
i
When adjusting the passenger seat, make
sure that the seat, if occupied, is as far from
the front passenger airbag as possible.
Otherwise, the passenger could be seriously
or even fatally injured in the event of an accident or braking maneuver.
왘
1 Front passenger seat adjustment
2 Rear seat adjustment
3 Seat height
4 Head restraint height
5 Backrest tilt
6 Seat fore and aft adjustment
Adjusting the passenger seat position
from the rear is not possible if you deactivate the operation of the rear door
windows (컄 page 74).
!
Do not move the front passenger seat
completely forward if objects are
stored in the parcel net in the front passenger-side footwell. Items in the net
may be damaged
115
Controls in detail
Seats
Passenger seat fore and aft adjustment
왘
Press the switch forward or backward
in direction of arrow 6.
Passenger seat backrest tilt
왘
Press the switch forward or backward
in direction of arrow 5.
Passenger seat height
왘
Press the switch up or down in the
direction of arrow 3.
Passenger seat head restraint height
왘
Press the switch up or down in
direction of arrow 4.
Press button 2 to adjust the rear seat
(컄 page 114).
116
Controls in detail
Memory function
Memory function
!
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver should check and adjust the seat
height, seat position fore and aft, and
seat backrest angle if necessary, to ensure adequate control, reach, and comfort. The head restraint should also be
adjusted for proper height. Also see
“Airbags” (컄 page 57) section for proper seat positioning.
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to
ensure adequate control, reach, operation and comfort. Both the inside and
outside rear view mirrors should be adjusted for adequate rear vision.
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small
children should be seated in a properly
secured restraint system that complies
with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213
and 210.2.
The memory button and stored position
switch are located on the door.
You can store up to three different settings
per SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO* card.
The following settings are saved for each
stored position:
앫
Seat and backrest position
앫
Settings for the multi-contour seat*
앫
Steering wheel position
앫
Inside rear view mirror position
앫
Exterior rear view mirror position
앫
Automatic climate control
Warning!
G
Do not activate the memory function while
driving. Activating the memory function
while driving could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
These key dependent memory settings can
be deactivated if desired (컄 page 156).
1 Stored position buttons
2 Memory button
왘
Make sure that the ignition is switched
on or the relevant door is open and the
SmartKey is inserted in the starter
switch.
117
Controls in detail
Memory function
Storing positions into memory
왘
Adjust the seats, steering wheel and
rear view mirrors to the desired position (컄 page 34).
왘
Press memory button 2.
왘
Release memory button and push one
of the position buttons 1 within three
seconds.
All the settings are stored with the selected position.
Recalling positions from memory
왘
Press and hold one of the position
buttons 1 until the seat, steering wheel
and rear view mirrors have fully moved
to the stored positions.
i
Releasing the button immediately
stops movement to the stored positions.
For easier parking you can adjust the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror so
that you can see the right rear wheel as
soon as you engage reverse gear R.
For information on activating the parking
position, see “Setting parking position for
exterior rear view mirror” (컄 page 158).
i
Warning!
G
Do not operate the power seats using the
memory button if the seat backrest is in an
excessively reclined position. Doing so
could cause damage to front or rear seats.
First move seat backrest to an upright position.
118
Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position
You can store a parking position for the
passenger-side exterior rear view mirror for each SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*
card.
Controls in detail
Memory function
왘
Adjust the exterior rear view mirror
with button 2 so that you see the rear
wheel and the road curb.
왘
Press memory button M.
왘
Within three seconds, press bottom of
adjustment button 2.
The parking position is stored if the
mirror does not move.
1 Exterior rear view mirror
2 Adjustment button
M Memory button
왘
Stop the vehicle.
왘
Switch on ignition (if not already on).
왘
Press button 1.
i
If the mirror does move, repeat the
above steps. After the setting is stored
you can move the mirror again.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror is selected.
119
Controls in detail
Lighting
Lighting
For notes on how to switch on the headlamps and use the turn signals, see the
“Getting started” section (컄 page 46).
Exterior lamp switch
The exterior lamp switch is located on the
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.
M Off
U Automatic headlamp mode
C Parking lamps (also side marker
lamps, tail lamps, license plate
lamps, instrument panel lamps)
Canada only: When engine is running, the low beam is also switched
on.
If you remove the SmartKey and open
the driver’s door while the parking
lamps or low beam headlamps are
switched on, then:
앫
A warning sounds.
앫
$ appears in the multifunction
display.
B Parking lamps plus low beam or
앫
The message TURN OFF LIGHTS! appears in the multifunction display.
ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left one
i
high beam headlamps (combination
switch pushed forward).
stop)
‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two
stops)
120
i
With the daytime running lamp mode
activated and the engine running, the
low beam headlamps cannot be
switched off manually.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Manual headlamp mode
i
i
The low beam headlamps and parking
lamps can be switched on and off with the
exterior lamp switch. For exterior lamp
switch, see (컄 page 120).
Front fog lamps and rear fog lamp can
not be switched on manually with exterior lamp switch in position U. To
activate the fog lamps, turn exterior
lamp switch to position B and pull
the exterior lamp switch to first or
second stop (컄 page 122).
If you drive in countries where vehicles
drive on the other side of the road than
the country where the vehicle is registered, you must have the headlamps
modified for symmetrical low beams.
Relevant information can be obtained
at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Automatic headlamp mode
The parking lamps, low beam headlamps
and license plate lamps switch on and off
automatically depending on the brightness
of the ambient light.
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to U.
i
With the daytime running lamp mode
activated, the low beam headlamps will
not switch off automatically.
Warning!
G
In automatic headlamp mode, the headlamps will not be automatically switched on
under foggy conditions. To minimize risk to
you and to others, activate headlamps by
turning exterior lamp switch to B.
The driver is responsible for the operation of
the vehicle’s lights at all times. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid to the driver. Switch on the vehicle lights manually
when driving or when traffic conditions require you to do so.
121
Controls in detail
Lighting
Daytime running lamp mode
왘
Turn exterior lamp switch to
position M or U.
When the engine is running, the low beam
headlamps are automatically switched on.
In low ambient light conditions the parking
lamps will also switch on.
Canada only
When you shift from a driving position to
position N or P, the low beam switches off
(with a three-minute delay).
For nighttime driving you should turn the
exterior lamp switch to position B to
permit activation of the high beam headlamps.
122
USA only
The high beam headlamps can also be activated when driving with the daytime running lamp mode activated and exterior
lamp switch in position M.
To activate the daytime running lamp
mode, see “Setting daytime running lamp
mode (USA only)” (컄 page 151).
i
See notes on the exterior lamp switch
(컄 page 120).
Locator lighting and night security illumination
For information on locator lighting and
night security illumination, see
(컄 page 151) and (컄 page 152).
Switching on front fog lamps
왘
Make sure that the low beam headlamps are switched on.
왘
Pull out exterior lamp switch to first
stop.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
lamp switch lights up.
i
Fog lamps will operate with the parking
lamps and/or the low beam headlamps
on. Fog lamps should only be used in
conjunction with low beam headlamps.
Consult your State or Province Motor
Vehicle Regulations regarding allowable lamp operation.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching on rear fog lamp
왘
Make sure that the low beam headlamps are switched on.
왘
Pull out exterior lamp switch to second
stop.
Combination switch
The combination switch is located on the
left side of the steering column.
Switching on high beams
왘
Turn exterior lamp switch to
position B (컄 page 120).
왘
Push the combination switch in
direction 1.
The yellow indicator lamp † in the
lamp switch lights up.
The high beam symbol is illuminated on
the instrument cluster (컄 page 22).
High beam flasher
왘
Pull the combination switch briefly in
direction 2.
1 High beam
2 High beam flasher
123
Controls in detail
Lighting
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher can be activated with the starter switched on or off. It is
activated automatically when an airbag is
deployed.
Switching on the hazard warning
flasher
왘
Press the hazard warning flasher
switch.
i
With the hazard warning flasher activated and the combination switch set
for either left or right turn, only the respective left or right turn signals will
operate when the SmartKey in the
starter switch is in position 1 or 2.
Switching off the hazard warning
flasher
왘
Press hazard warning flasher switch
again.
i
If the hazard warning flasher was activated automatically, press switch 1
twice.
124
The controls are located in the overhead
control panel.
All turn signals will blink.
The switch is located on the center console.
1 Hazard warning flasher switch
Interior lighting
1 Left front reading lamp
2 Rear interior lights
3 Right front reading lamp
4 Rocker switch for automatic control
system
Controls in detail
Lighting
Automatic control
Activating
왘
Press rocker switch 4 to the center position.
Interior lamps are switched on in darkness, when:
앫
the vehicle is unlocked
앫
a door is opened
앫
the SmartKey is removed from the
starter switch
The interior lamps are switched off after a
set time (컄 page 153).
Deactivating
왘
Press the ñ symbol on rocker
switch 4.
The interior lighting remains switched
off in darkness even when you
Manual control
Switching lamps on
왘
Press the ð symbol on rocker
switch 4.
The front interior lighting switches on.
앫
unlock the vehicle
앫
open a door
Switching lamps off
앫
remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
왘
Press the ñ symbol on rocker
switch 4.
The interior lighting switches off. The
automatic control function is switched
on.
i
If the door remains open, the interior
lamps switch off automatically after approximately five minutes.
125
Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching rear interior lights on
왘
Press switch 2.
The rear compartment lighting is
switched on.
Switching rear interior lights off
왘
Press switch 2.
The rear compartment lighting is
switched off.
Front reading lamps
Switching on
왘
Press switch 1 or 3.
The corresponding reading lamp is
switched on.
Switching off
왘
Press switch 1 or 3.
The corresponding reading lamp is
switched off.
126
Courtesy lighting
For better orientation in the dark, courtesy
lamps will illuminate the interior of your vehicle as follows:
With parking lamps switched on:
앫
the door entry lamps
앫
the driver and passenger footwells
With SmartKey in starter switch position 1:
앫
the door entry lamps
앫
the center console
i
If you turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 and switch off the
headlamps, the door entry lamps will
remain lit for approximately five minutes.
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
A full view illustration of the instrument
cluster can be found in the “At a glance”
section of this manual (컄 page 22).
Instrument cluster illumination
왘
Press knob1. The knob will pop out.
To brighten illumination
The instrument cluster is activated when
you
왘
Turn knob 1 in the instrument cluster
clockwise.
The instrument cluster illumination will
brighten.
앫
open a door
앫
turn on the ignition
앫
press the reset button J(컄 page 22)
To dim illumination
앫
switch on the exterior lamps
왘
You can change the instrument cluster settings in the Instrument cluster submenu of
the control system (컄 page 149).
1 Knob for adjusting instrument cluster
illumination
Use knob1 to adjust the illumination
brightness for the instrument cluster.
Turn knob 1 in the instrument cluster
counterclockwise.
The instrument cluster illumination will
dim.
i
The instrument cluster illumination is
dimmed or brightened automatically to
suit ambient light conditions.
The instrument cluster illumination will
also be adjusted automatically when
you switch on the vehicle’s exterior
lamps.
127
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Coolant temperature gauge
Warning!
G
앫
Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which
may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
앫
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns and can occur just
by opening the engine hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until it
cools down.
128
During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248° F (120°C),
i.e. close to the red zone of the temperature gauge.
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature above 248° F
(120°C), i.e. in the red zone of the temperature gauge. Doing so may cause serious
engine damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
i
Excessive coolant temperatures trigger
a warning in the multifunction display.
Trip odometer
Make sure you are viewing the trip odometer display.
왘
Press the è or ÿ button on the
multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the trip odometer appears if it is
not displayed (컄 page 130).
왘
Press and hold reset button J on the
instrument cluster (컄 page 22) until
the trip odometer is reset.
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Tachometer
The red marking on the tachometer denotes excessive engine speed.
!
Avoid driving at excessive engine
speeds, as it may result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply
is interrupted if the engine is operated
within the red marking.
S 55 AMG
The tachometer of the S 55 AMG does not
have a red marking denoting excessive engine speed.
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply
is interrupted if the engine is operated at
an excessive engine speed.
Outside temperature indicator
Warning!
G
The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
When moving the vehicle into colder ambient temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
garage), you will notice a delay before the
lower temperature is displayed.
A delay also occurs when ambient temperatures rise. This prevents inaccurate temperature indications caused by heat
radiated from the engine during idling or
slow driving.
The temperature sensor is located in the
front bumper area. Due to its location, the
sensor can be affected by road or engine
heat during idling or slow driving. Therefore, the accuracy of the displayed temperature can only be verified by comparison to
a thermometer placed next to the sensor,
not by comparison to external displays
(e.g. bank signs etc.).
129
Controls in detail
Control system
Control system
The control system is activated as soon as
the SmartKey in the starter switch is
turned to position 1. The control system
enables you to:
앫
call up information about your vehicle
앫
change vehicle settings
For example, you can use the control system to find out when your vehicle is next
due for service, to set the language for
messages in the instrument cluster display, and much more.
i
The displays for the audio systems (radio, CD player) will appear in English,
regardless of the language selected.
130
Warning!
G
Multifunction display
A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
conditions must always be his/her primary
focus when driving.
For your safety and the safety of others, selecting features through the multifunction
steering wheel should only be done by the
driver when traffic and road conditions permit it to be done safely.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every second.
The control system relays information to
the multifunction display.
1 Trip odometer
2 Main odometer
Controls in detail
Control system
Multifunction steering wheel
The displays in the multifunction display
and the settings in the control system are
controlled using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel (컄 page 24).
1 Multifunction display in the speedometer
Operating the control system
2 Selecting the submenu or setting
the volume
ç down / to decrease
æ up / to increase
3 Telephone*
í to take a call
ì to end a call
4 Menu systems
Pressing any of the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel will alter what is
shown in the multifunction display.
The information available in the multifunction display is arranged in menus, each
containing a number of functions or submenus.
The individual functions are then found
within the relevant menu (radio or CD operations under AUDIO, for example). These
functions serve to call up relevant information or to customize the settings for your
vehicle.
è for next menu
ÿ for previous menu
5 Moving within a menu
j for next display
k for previous display
131
Controls in detail
Control system
It is helpful to think of the menus, and the
functions within each menu, as being arranged in a circular pattern.
앫
앫
If you press button è or ÿ
repeatedly, you will pass through each
menu one after the other.
If you press button k or j
repeatedly, you will pass through each
function display, one after the other, in
the current menu.
132
In the SETTINGS menu, instead of functions
you will find a number of submenus for
calling up and changing settings. For instructions on using these submenus, see
“Settings menu” (컄 page 146).
The number of menus available in the system depends on which optional equipment
is installed in your vehicle.
The menus are described on the following
pages.
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus
This is what you will see when you scroll
through the menus.
The table on the next page provides an
overview of the individual menus.
133
Controls in detail
Control system
Commands/submenus
Menus, submenus and functions
Menu 1
Menu 2
Menu 3
Menu 4
Standard display
AUDIO
Telephone* NAVI
Call up FSS
Select radio Load phone Activate
station
book
route guidance
Menu 5
Menu 6
Menu 7
Menu 8
Distronic*
Trip computer
Malfunction
memory
Settings
Call up settings
Fuel consumption Call up malfunc- Reset to factory
statistics after
tion messages
settings
start
Check tire pres- Operate CD Search for
sure*
player
name in
phone book
Fuel consumption
statistics since
the last reset
Instrument cluster submenu
Check engine oil
level
Call up range
Lighting submenu
Digital speedometer
Vehicle submenu
Convenience
submenu
134
Controls in detail
Control system
i
The headings used in the menus table
are designed to facilitate navigation
within the system and are not necessarily identical to those shown in the
control system displays.
The first function displayed in each
menu will automatically show you
which part of the system you are in.
Standard display menu
AUDIO menu
You can select the functions in the standard display menu with button k
or j .
The functions in the AUDIO menu operate
the audio equipment which you currently
have turned on.
The following functions are available:
If no audio equipment is currently turned
on, the message AUDIO OFF is shown in the
display.
Function
Page
Call up FSS
281
Check tire pressure*
274
Check engine oil level
264
Call up digital speedometer
see below
The following functions are available:
Function
Page
Select radio station
136
Operate CD player
136
Display digital speedometer
왘
Press the j or k button repeatedly until you see the digital speedometer appear in the display.
The current vehicle speed is shown in
the multifunction display.
135
Controls in detail
Control system
Select radio station
왘
왘
Turn on the radio. Refer to separate
COMAND operating instructions.
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the currently tuned station in the display.
왘
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired station is found.
The type of search depends on the
setting for the station tuning
(컄 page 154):
앫
Frequency
앫
Memory
Operate the CD player
왘
Turn on the radio and select the CD
player. Refer to separate COMAND operating instructions.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the settings for the CD currently
being played appear in the display.
i
1 Waveband
2 Setting for station selection using
memory
3 Station frequency
You can only store new stations using
the designated feature on the radio.
Refer to separate COMAND operating
instructions.
You can also operate the radio in the
usual manner.
1 Current CD
(for CD changer* (컄 page 137))
2 Current track
왘
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired track is selected.
i
CD changer*: To select a CD from the
magazine, press a number on the
COMAND system key pad located in
the center dashboard.
136
Controls in detail
Control system
CD changer* operating mode
Use only original CDs. Using copied CDs
may create problems during playback.
General notes
Clean CDs from time to time with a commercially available cleaning cloth. No solvents, anti-static sprays, etc. should be
used for cleaning. Replace the CD in its
case after use. Protect CDs from heat and
direct sunlight.
Should excessively high temperatures occur while in CD mode, CD TEMP HIGH will
appear on the display and muting will take
place. The unit will then switch back to the
last operating mode used until the temperature has decreased to a safe operating
level.
Should excessively low temperatures occur while in CD mode, CD TEMP LOW will appear on the display, but the CD will
continue to play.
Handle CDs carefully to prevent interference during playback. Avoid fingerprints
and dust on CDs. Do not write on CDs or
apply any label or other material to them.
Use of CDs which do not meet this standard may cause damage to the CD changer. Do not play single-CDs (80 mm) with an
adapter.
For information operating the CD changer
refer to the separate COMAND operating
instructions.
Warning!
Only use CDs, which bear the label shown
and that conform to the compact disc digital audio standard (IEC 60908).
G
The CD changer is a Class 1 laser product.
There is a danger of invisible laser radiation
if the cover is opened or damaged.
Do not remove the cover. The CD changer
does not contain any parts which can be serviced by the user. For safety reasons, have
any service work which may be necessary
performed only by qualified personnel.
137
Controls in detail
Control system
Operational readiness of CD changer
Loading/unloading the CD magazine
왘
If a CD changer has been installed in the
system, it can be operated from the COMAND system key pad located in the center dashboard. A loaded magazine must be
installed for CD playing.
The CD changer is located behind the cover on the left hand side in the trunk.
Remove the magazine and completely
pull out the CD tray.
왘
Place the CD in the recess of the tray,
label side up.
왘
Push the tray into the magazine in the
direction shown by the arrow.
왘
Remove the CD changer cover.
왘
Slide the CD changer door to the right
and press the eject button 3.
왘
The magazine is ejected.
i
CDs which have been inserted improperly or are unreadable will not be
played.
왘
1 CD
2 CD changer
3 CD tray
4 CD magazine
138
Push the magazine into the CD changer
in the direction shown by the arrow and
close the CD changer door.
Controls in detail
Control system
TEL menu*
Warning!
G
A driver’s attention to the road must always
be his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a telephone call. If you choose to use the telephone while driving, please use the
hands-free device and only use the telephone when weather, road and traffic conditions permit.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of approximately
44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every second.
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury.
You can use the functions in the TEL menu
to operate your telephone, provided it is
connected to a hands-free system and
switched on.
왘
Switch on the telephone and Audio or
COMAND.
왘
Press button ÿ or è on the
steering wheel repeatedly until you see
the TEL menu in the display.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
139
Controls in detail
Control system
Which messages will appear in the display
field depends on whether your telephone is
switched on or off:
앫
If the telephone is off, the message in
the multifunction display is: TEL OFF.
앫
If the telephone is on:
Answering a call
Ending a call
When your telephone is ready to receive
calls, you can answer a call at any time. In
the display you will then see the message:
왘
왘
Press button í .
You have answered the call. In the display you see the duration of the call positioned above the number.
i
If you do not wish to accept a call,
press button ì.
The standby message indicates that your
telephone is ready for use and you can operate it using the control system.
140
You have ended the call. In the display
you will again see the standby message.
Dialing a number from the phone book
The telephone will then search for a
network. During this time the display
reads NO SERVICE.
As soon as the telephone has found a
network, READY is indicated in the display.
Press button ì.
If your telephone is ready to receive calls,
you may select and dial a number from the
phone book at any time.
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the TEL menu in the display.
왘
Press button j or k .
The control system reads the phone
book which is stored in the telephone.
This may take up to 30 seconds. In the
display you will see the message
PLEASE WAIT!.
When the message PLEASE WAIT! disappears, the phone book has been
loaded.
Controls in detail
Control system
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the desired name appears in the
display.
The stored names are displayed in increasing or decreasing alphabetical order.
왘
Press button í .
Redialing
The system dials the selected phone
number.
The control system stores the most recently dialed phone numbers. This eliminates
the need to search through your entire
phone book.
If connection is successful, the name of
the party you called and the duration of
the call will appear in the display.
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the TEL menu in the display.
왘
Press button í .
i
If you press and hold j or k for
longer than one second, the system
scrolls rapidly through the list of names
until you release the button again.
Cancel the quick search mode by
pressing ì.
In the display you see the first number
in the redial memory.
If no connection is made, the control
system stores the dialed number in the
redial memory.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the desired name appears in the
display.
i
If you do not want to use the telephone,
press button ì.
왘
Press button í .
The control system dials the selected
phone number.
141
Controls in detail
Control system
NAVI menu
Distronic* menu
The NAVI menu contains the functions
needed to operate your navigation system.
Use the Distronic menu to display the current settings for your Distronic system.
What information is shown in the display
depends on whether the Distronic system
is active or inactive.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the message NAVI in the
display.
앫
If the navigation system is switched off,
the message NAVI OFF is shown in the
display.
앫
If the navigation system is on, the message NAVI ACTIVE is shown in the display.
Please refer to the COMAND manual for instructions on how to activate the route
guidance system.
142
Please refer to the “Driving systems” section of this manual (컄 page 199) for instructions on how to activate Distronic.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see one of the following two
pictures in the display.
Distronic deactivated
When Distronic is deactivated you will see
the standard display in the display.
1 Vehicle ahead, if detected
2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead
3 Should-be distance to vehicle ahead
4 Symbol for activated distance warning
function
5 Your vehicle
Controls in detail
Control system
Distronic activated
When Distronic is activated, DISTRONIC
and the set speed are seen in the display.
Trip computer menu
Fuel consumption statistics after start
Use the trip computer menu to call up statistical data on your vehicle. The following
information is available:
Function
Page
Fuel consumption statistics after see
start
below
1 Distronic activated
Fuel consumption statistics
since last reset
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
Trip computer menu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the left
display: AFTER START.
144
Call up range (distance to empty) 145
1 Distance driven since start
2 Time elapsed since start
3 Average fuel consumption since start
4 Average speed since start
143
Controls in detail
Control system
Resetting fuel consumption statistics
i
Fuel consumption since last reset
The AFTER START display will flash until
a distance of approximately 1 mile (1.6
km) has been covered or two minutes
have elapsed since the engine was restarted. During this period, you can incorporate the values for the previous
journey by pressing J in the instrument cluster.
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
trip computer menu.
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
Trip computer menu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: AFTER RESET.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see the reading that you want
to reset in the display.
왘
Press and hold the reset button J in
the instrument cluster (컄 page 22) until the value is reset to 0.
If button J is not pressed, the AFTER
START values are set to 0.
1 Distance driven since last reset
2 Time elapsed since last reset
3 Average fuel consumption since last reset
4 Average speed since last reset
144
Controls in detail
Control system
Call up range (distance to empty)
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
Trip computer menu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: RANGE.
In the display you will see the calculated range based on the current fuel tank
level.
Malfunction memory menu
왘
Use the malfunction memory menu to scan
malfunction and warning messages that
may be stored in the system. What information is shown in the display depends on
whether malfunctions have actually occurred.
Warning!
G
Malfunction and warning messages are only
indicated for certain systems and are intentionally not very detailed. The malfunction
and warning messages are simply a reminder with respect to the operation of certain
systems and do not replace the owner’s
and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain
the vehicle’s operating safety by having all
required maintenance and safety checks
performed on the vehicle and by bringing
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center to address the malfunction and
warning messages (컄 page 296).
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the malfunction message
memory in the display.
No malfunction messages
If no malfunctions have occurred, the message in the display is:
NO MALFUNCTION
Malfunctions have occurred
If malfunctions have occurred, you will see
the number of malfunctions in the display:
1 Number of malfunctions
145
Controls in detail
Control system
왘
Press button k or j .
The stored messages will now be displayed in the order in which the malfunctions have occurred. See the
“Practical hints” section for malfunction and warning messages
(컄 page 296).
Should any malfunctions occur while driving, the number of malfunctions will reappear in the display when the SmartKey in
the starter switch is turned to position 0 or
removed from the starter switch.
i
The message memory will be cleared
when you turn the SmartKey in the
starter switch to position 1 or 2. You
will then only see high priority messages in the malfunction display
(컄 page 296).
146
Settings menu
In the SETTINGS menu there are two functions:
앫
The function TO RESET: R BUTTON FOR
3 SEC., with which you can reset all
settings to the original factory settings.
앫
A collection of submenus with which
you can make individual settings for
your vehicle.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the SETTINGS menu appears in the
display.
Resetting all settings
You can reset all the functions of all submenus to the factory settings.
왘
Press the reset button J in the instrument cluster for approximately three
seconds.
In the display you will see the request
to press the reset button J again to
confirm.
왘
Press the reset button J again.
The functions of all the submenus will
reset to factory settings.
i
The settings you have changed will not
be reset unless you confirm the action
by pressing the reset button J a second time.
Due to safety reasons, resetting all of
the settings while driving will not reset
all of the values in the LIGHTING or the
VEHICLE menu.
Controls in detail
Control system
Submenus in the Settings menu
Resetting the functions of a submenu
Press button k or j .
For each submenu you can reset all the
functions to the factory settings.
왘
In the display you see the collection of
the submenus.
왘
Press button ç or æ.
The selection marker moves to the next
submenu.
The submenus are arranged by hierarchy.
Scroll down with the ç button, scroll up
with the æ button.
왘
Move to a function in the submenu.
왘
Press the reset button J (컄 page 22)
in the instrument cluster for approximately three seconds.
In the display you will see the request
to press the reset button J again to
confirm.
왘
Press the reset button J again.
All functions of the submenu will reset
to factory settings.
Move within the submenus with the k
or j button to the individual functions.
The settings themselves are made with
button æ or ç.
147
Controls in detail
Control system
The table below shows what settings can
be changed within the various menus. Detailed instructions on making individual
settings can be found on the following pages.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
LIGHTING
Select temperature display
mode
Set daytime running lamp mode Set station selection mode (ra- Set key dependency
(USA only)
dio)
Select multifunction display
mode
Set locator lighting
Select language
Exterior lamps delayed shut-off
Set parking position for exterior
rear view mirror
Interior lighting delayed shut-off
Set fold-in function for exterior
rear view mirrors
148
VEHICLE
Set automatic locking
CONVENIENCE
Activate easy-entry/exit feature
Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting multifunction display mode
Instrument cluster submenu
Selecting temperature display mode
Access the INST. CLUSTER submenu via
the SETTINGS menu. Use the INST. CLUSTER submenu to change the instrument
cluster display settings. The following
functions are available:
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the INST.
CLUSTER submenu.
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the INST.
CLUSTER submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: TEMP. INDICATOR.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: DISPLAY VALUES IN.
Function
Page
Select temperature display
mode
150
Select multifunction display
mode
149
Select language
150
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press æ or ç to set the temperature unit to degrees Celsius (°C) or
degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press æ or ç to set speedometer unit to MILES or KM.
149
Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting language
왘
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the INST.
CLUSTER submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: TEXT.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press æ or ç to select the language to be used for the multifunction
display messages.
Available languages:
Lighting submenu
Access the LIGHTING submenu via the SETTINGS menu. Use the LIGHTING submenu
to change the lamp and lighting settings on
your vehicle. The following functions are
available:
앫
German
앫
English
앫
Italian
앫
French
Set daytime running lamp mode see
(USA only)
below
앫
Spanish
Set locator lighting
151
Exterior lamps delayed shut-off
152
Function
Page
Interior lighting delayed shut-off 153
150
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting daytime running lamp mode
(USA only)
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the LIGHTING submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: LAMP CIRCUIT HEADLAMP MODE .
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
With daytime running lamp mode selected and the exterior lamp switch at
position 0, the following lamps will
come on automatically when the engine is turned on:
앫
Parking lamps and low beam headlamps
앫
License plate lamps (in low ambient
light conditions)
i
If you turn the exterior lamp switch to
another position, the corresponding
lamp(s) will switch on.
왘
Press æ or ç to select manual
or daytime running lamp (constant)
mode. This function is not available in
countries where daytime running
lamps are mandatory.
For safety reasons, resetting the
LIGHTING submenu to factory settings
(컄 page 147) while driving will not reset the daytime running lamp mode.
In the display you will then see the message: LIGHTING – CANNOT BE TOTALLY
Setting locator lighting
During darkness, the following lamps will
come on when the exterior lamp switch is
in position U, the locator lighting feature is activated, and the vehicle is unlocked by remote control:
앫
Parking lamps
앫
Tail lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Front fog lamps
The locator lighting switches off when the
driver’s door is opened. It switches off automatically after a period of approximately
40 seconds.
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the LIGHT컄컄
ING submenu.
RESET TO FACTORY SETTINGS WHILE
DRIVING.
151
Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄 왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: LOCATOR LIGHTING.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press æ or ç to select the desired setting.
The locator lighting will be switched on
or off.
152
Setting night security illumination (Exterior lamps delayed shut-off)
Use the HEADLIGHTS DELAYED SHUT-OFF
function to set whether and for how long
you would like the exterior lamps to illuminate during darkness after all doors are
closed. When the delayed shut-off feature
is activated and the exterior lamp switch is
in position U, the following lamps will
remain lit after you remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch:
앫
Parking lamps
앫
Tail lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Front fog lamps
i
You can reactivate this function within
ten minutes by opening a door.
If you do not open a door after removing the SmartKey, the lamps will automatically switch off after 60 seconds.
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the LIGHTING submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: HEADLIGHTS DELAYED SHUT-OFF.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Controls in detail
Control system
You can temporarily deactivate the delayed shut-off feature:
왘
Press æ or ç to select the desired lamp-on period.
왘
Before leaving the vehicle, turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0.
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 2 and back to 0.
The delayed shut-off feature is deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as you
reinsert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
You can select:
앫
0 S, the delayed shut-off feature is
deactivated
앫
15 S, 30 S, 45 S, or 60 S, the delayed shut-off feature is activated
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button on the gear selector lever
(컄 page 33).
Interior lighting delayed shut-off
Use this function to set whether and for
how long you would like the interior lighting to remain lit during darkness after the
SmartKey is removed from the starter
switch.
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the LIGHTING submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: INT. LIGHTING DELAYED
SHUT-OFF.
The selection marker is on the current
컄컄
setting.
153
Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄 왘
Press æ or ç to select the desired lamp-on time period. You can select:
앫
0 S, the delayed shut-off feature is
deactivated.
앫
5 S, 10 S, 15 S, or 20 S, the delayed
shut-off feature is activated.
Vehicle submenu
왘
Access the VEHICLE submenu via the SETINGS menu. Use the VEHICLE submenu to
make general vehicle settings. The following functions are available:
Function
Page
Set station selection mode
(radio)
see
below
Setting automatic locking
155
Setting station selection mode
Use the STATION SEARCH USING function to
select the manual or memory station selection mode for the radio (컄 page 136).
왘
154
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the VEHICLE submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: STATION SEARCH USING.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press æ or ç to select the desired station selection mode. You can
select:
앫
FREQUENCY
앫
MEMORY selects next stored station
Controls in detail
Control system
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Setting automatic locking
Use this function to activate or deactivate
the automatic central locking. With the automatic central locking system activated,
the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle
speeds of approximately 9 mph
(15 km/h).
왘
Press button æ or ç to move
the selection marker to the Vehicle
submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK.
Convenience submenu
Access the CONVENIENCE submenu via the
SETTINGS menu. Use the CONVENIENCE submenu to change the settings for a number
of convenience features. The following
functions are available:
왘
Press æ or ç to switch
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK ON or OFF.
Function
Page
Setting key dependency
see
below
Activating easy-entry/exit feature
156
Setting parking position for exte- 158
rior rear view mirror
Adjusting the drive-dynamic seat 159
(drivers’s side)
Adjusting the drive-dynamic seat 159
(passenger side)
Setting fold-in function for exteri- 158
or rear view mirrors
Setting automatic locking
155
155
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting key dependency
Activating easy-entry/exit feature
Use this function to set whether the memory settings for the seats, the steering
wheel, the mirrors, and the automatic climate control should be stored separately
for each SmartKey (컄 page 117).
Use this function to activate and deactivate the easy-entry/exit feature. When the
feature is activated, the steering wheel and
driver’s seat will move back to facilitate exiting when you:
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to
the CONVENIENCE submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: SETTINGS KEY-DEPENDENT.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press æ or ç to set key dependency to ON or OFF.
156
앫
remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch
앫
open the driver’s door
However, the engine must be turned off.
Warning!
G
You must make sure that no one can become trapped or injured by the moving
steering wheel and the driver’s seat when
the easy-entry/exit feature is in operation
and the driver’s door is being opened or the
SmartKey is removed from the starter
switch.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver’s door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Controls in detail
Control system
After entering the vehicle, the steering
wheel and seat will move into the position
stored in memory when:
앫
the driver’s door is closed
앫
you put the SmartKey in the starter
switch
앫
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to
the CONVENIENCE submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: EASY-ENTRY FEATURE ACTIVATE.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
press the appropriate stored position
button on the memory switch
(컄 page 117)
i
The following settings are available for the
easy-entry/exit feature:
OFF
The easy-entry/exit feature is deactivated.
STEER. COL.
Only the steering
column is moved.
ST. COL + SEAT
Both the steering
column and the
seat are moved.
To cancel seat/steering wheel movement, do one of the following:
앫
Press seat adjustment switch
(컄 page 35)
앫
Move the steering column stalk
(컄 page 38)
앫
Press the memory switch
(컄 page 117)
왘
Press æ or ç to change the
easy-entry/exit setting.
157
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting parking position for exterior rear
view mirror
Use the MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING
function to select whether the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror should be
turned downward during parking maneuvers when reverse gear R is engaged. For
additional information see “Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position”
(컄 page 169).
왘
Move the selection marker to the
CONVENIENCE submenu using the æ
or ç button.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: MIRROR SETTIMG WHEN PARKING.
158
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Setting fold-in function for exterior rear
view mirrors
Using this function, you can set the exterior rear view mirrors to be automatically
folded in when you lock your vehicle
(컄 page 170).
왘
Press æ or ç to switch function
ON or OFF.
왘
Move the selection marker to the CONVENIENCE submenu with the æ or
ç button.
왘
Press the j or k button repeatedly until the message FOLD MIRRORS
WHEN LOCKING appears in the display.
Controls in detail
Control system
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
To adjust the driver’s drive-dynamic
seat press button j or k repeatedly until you see this message in
the display: DRIVING DYNAM. SEAT ADJUST., FR. DRIV.
The following settings are available:
Setting 1
(Sporty) Strong lateral support and
fast air pressure
build-up in the air
chambers of the
backrest side bolsters
Setting 2
(Comfort) Less lateral support and
slow air pressure
build-up in the air
chambers of the
backrest side bolsters
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press the æ or ç button to
switch the automatic fold-in setting for
the mirrors ON or OFF when the vehicle
is locked.
왘
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Adjusting drive-dynamic seats
Use this function to adjust the settings for
the drive-dynamic seats (컄 page 159).
왘
To adjust the passenger’s
drive-dynamic seat press button j
or k repeatedly until you see this
message in the display: DRIVING DYNAM. SEAT ADJUST., FR. PASS.
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to
the CONVENIENCE submenu.
왘
Press æ or ç to select the desired setting.
159
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission
Information for driving with an automatic
transmission is found in the “Getting started” section (컄 page 43).
Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its gear
shifting process to your individual driving
style by continually adjusting the shift
points up or down. These shift point adjustments are performed based on current operating and driving conditions.
If the operating conditions change, the automatic transmission reacts by adjusting
its gear shift program.
i
During the brief warm-up, the transmission upshifting is delayed. This allows
the catalytic converter to heat up more
quickly to operating temperature.
160
The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, depending on:
앫
the selector lever position D with gear
ranges 4, 3, 2, 1 (컄 page 162)
앫
the selected shift program (C/S)
(컄 page 164)
앫
the position of the accelerator pedal
(컄 page 165)
앫
the vehicle speed
The current selector lever position and
shift program (C/S) appear in the tachometer display (컄 page 22).
Warning!
G
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out
of P or N if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
When the selector lever is in position D,
you can influence transmission shifting by:
앫
limiting the gear range
앫
changing gears manually
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
One-touch gearshifting
Even with an automatic transmission you
can change the gears manually when the
selector lever is in position D.
Downshifting
왘
Briefly press the selector lever to the
left in the D– direction.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear to the next lower gear. This action simultaneously limits the gear range of the
transmission (컄 page 162).
Warning!
G
i
Canceling gear range limit
To avoid overrevving the engine when
the selector lever is moved to the
D– direction, the transmission will not
shift to a lower gear if the engine's
max. speed would be exceeded.
왘
Upshifting
왘
Briefly press the selector lever to the
right in the D+ direction.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear to the next higher gear as permitted
by the shift program. This action simultaneously extends the gear range of the
transmission.
Press and hold the selector lever in the
D+ direction until D reappears in the tachometer display field.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear range directly to gear range D.
Shifting into optimal gear range
왘
Press and hold the gear selector lever
in the D– direction.
The transmission will automatically select
the gear range suited for optimal acceleration and deceleration. This will involve
shifting down one or more gears.
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.
161
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Gear ranges
With the selector lever in position D, you
can limit the transmission’s gear range by
pressing the lever to the left (D-), and reverse the gear range limit by pressing the
lever to the right (D+).
The selected gear range will appear in the
tachometer display field. If you press on
the accelerator when the engine has
reached its rpm limit, the transmission will
upshift beyond any gear range limit
selected.
Gear
range
Effect
Gear
range
Effect
é
The transmission shifts
through fourth gear only.
ç
The transmission shifts
through second gear only.
è
The transmission shifts
through third gear only.
Allows the use of engine’s
braking power when driving:
With this selection you can
use the braking effect of the
engine.
앫
on steep downgrades
앫
in mountainous regions
앫
under extreme operating
conditions
æ
The transmission operates
only in first gear.
For maximum use of engine’s
braking effect on very steep
or lengthy downgrades.
162
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Gear selector lever position
R
Park position
N
Selector position when the vehicle
is parked. Only place selector lever
in position P when vehicle is
stopped. The park position is not intended to serve as a brake when
the vehicle is parked. Rather, the
driver should always set the parking brake in addition to placing the
selector lever in position P to secure the vehicle.
The SmartKey can only be removed
from the starter switch with the selector lever in position P. With the
SmartKey removed, the selector lever is locked in position P.
!
Reverse gear
Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any
other reason with selector lever in N
can result in transmission damage that
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Place selector lever in position R only
when vehicle is stopped.
Effect
P
Effect
Neutral
No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle. When the
brakes are released, the vehicle can
be moved freely (pushed or towed).
To avoid damage to the transmission,
never engage N while driving.
If the ESP is deactivated or malfunctioning:
Only move selector lever to N if the
vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g.
on icy roads).
D
Drive
The transmission shifts automatically. All five forward gears are available.
Warning!
G
Getting out of your vehicle with the selector
lever not fully engaged in position P is dangerous. Also, position P alone is not intended to or capable of preventing your vehicle
from moving, possibly hitting people or objects.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P (컄 page 44).
When parked on an incline, turn the front
wheels towards the road curb.
163
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
KEYLESS-GO* card (if so equipped) with you
and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. Children could move
the selector lever from position P, which
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Program mode selector switch
왘
Press the program mode selector
switch repeatedly until the letter of the
desired shift program appears in the tachometer display field (컄 page 130).
Select C for comfort driving:
1 Program mode selector switch
S Sport
For standard driving
C Comfort
For comfort driving
앫
The vehicle starts out in second
gear (both forward and reverse) for
gentler starts. This does not apply if
full throttle is applied or gear
range 1 is selected.
앫
Traction and driving stability are improved on icy roads.
앫
Upshifts occur earlier even when
you give more gas. The engine then
operates at lower rpms and the
wheels are less likely to spin.
앫
The power transmission ratio for selector lever position R changes depending on the program mode
selected (C or S).
!
Never change the program mode when
the selector lever is out of position P.
This could result in a change of driving
characteristics for which you may not
be prepared.
164
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Accelerator position
Your driving style influences the transmission’s shifting behavior:
Less throttle
Earlier upshifting
More throttle
Later upshifting
Kickdown
Use kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
왘
왘
Emergency operation (Limp home
mode)
If vehicle acceleration worsens or the
transmission no longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in limp
home (emergency operation) mode. In this
mode, only 2nd gear and reverse gear can
be activated.
왘
Stop the vehicle.
왘
Move selector lever to P.
왘
Turn off the engine.
The transmission shifts into a lower
gear.
왘
Wait at least ten seconds before restarting.
Ease on the accelerator when you have
reached the desired speed.
왘
Restart the engine.
왘
Move selector lever to position D (for
2nd gear) or R.
왘
Have the transmission checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Press the accelerator past the point of
resistance.
The transmission shifts up again.
165
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Steering wheel gearshift control
(Speedshift) and manual shift program
S 55 AMG
!
Never change the program mode when
the selector lever is out of position P. It
could result in a change of driving characteristics for which you may not be
prepared.
The S 55 AMG can be driven in both, automatic and manual shift program mode. In
manual shift program mode you can
change the gears yourself on the steering
wheel or by using the selector lever.
Activating steering wheel gearshift
control
S Sport
For standard driving
C Comfort
For comfort driving
Press the program mode selector
switch repeatedly until the M for manual
shift program appears in the tachometer display field.
M MANUAL
For manual gear shifting
Manual gear shifting is activated.
3 Program mode selector switch
The current selector lever position and
shift program (C/S/M) appear in the tachometer display (컄 page 22).
왘
Upshifting
왘
1 Right button: upshift
2 Left button: downshift
To do so, you must first select the manual
shift program M on the program mode selector switch.
166
Press the button located on the right
side of the steering wheel.
or
왘
Briefly press the selector lever to the
right in the D+ direction.
The transmission shifts to the next
higher gear.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not
place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached. Shift
into reverse gear only when the vehicle is
stopped.
!
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period when driving off on
slippery surface. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Downshifting
왘
Press the button located on the left
side of the steering wheel.
or
왘
Briefly press the selector lever to the
right in the D- direction.
The transmission shifts to the next lower gear.
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not
place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached. Shift
into reverse gear only when the vehicle is
stopped.
Warning!
Deactivating steering wheel gearshift
control
왘
Press the program mode selector
switch repeatedly until S or C for
automatic shift program appears in the
tachometer display field.
Manual gear shifting is deactivated.
i
At each engine start, the transmission
will go into the last shift program mode
selected (S or C). Program mode M is
not stored and will not be recalled
when engine is restarted.
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.
167
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Good visibility
Information on the windshield wipers
(컄 page 47) and for setting the rear view
mirrors (컄 page 38) is found in the “Getting started” section.
Rear view mirror
Automatic antiglare rear view mirror
The reflection brightness of the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side and
the inside rear view mirror will respond automatically to glare when
앫
the ignition is switched on, and
앫
incoming light from headlamps falls on
the sensor in the inside rear view
mirror.
The rear view mirror will not react if
앫
reverse gear is engaged
앫
the interior lighting is turned on
168
Warning!
G
The automatic antiglare function does not
react if incoming light is not aimed directly
at sensors in the inside rear view mirror.
The inside rear view mirror and the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not
react, for example, if the rear window sun
shade* is in raised position.
Glare can endanger you and others.
Warning!
Warning!
G
Exercise care when using the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your inside rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
!
G
In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte
may escape from the mirror housing if the
mirror glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
Electrolyte drops coming into contact
with the vehicle paint finish can be
completely removed only while in the
liquid state by applying plenty of water.
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Activating exterior rear view mirror
parking position
왘
Press button 2 for the passenger-side
exterior rear view mirror.
The exterior rear view mirror returns to its
previously stored driving position:
Follow these steps to activate the mirror
parking position so that the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror will be
turned downward to the stored position.
왘
Place the gear selector lever in reverse
gear R.
앫
10 seconds after you put the gear selector lever out of position R
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror will be turned downward to the
stored position.
앫
immediately once your vehicle exceeds
a speed of approximately 6 mph (10
km/h)
앫
immediately when you press button 1
for driver’s side mirror.
왘
Make sure you have stored a parking
position for the passenger-side exterior
rear view mirror (컄 page 118).
왘
Make sure that the MIRROR SETTING
WHEN PARKING function in the
CONVENIENCE submenu of the control
system is switched to ON (컄 page 158).
왘
Switch on ignition (if not already on).
1 Driver’s side exterior mirror switch
2 Passenger-side exterior mirror switch
169
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Electrically folding exterior rear view
mirrors
If you are driving at more than 9 mph
(15 km/h) you will not be able to fold
the exterior mirrors in.
Folding the exterior mirrors in and out
automatically
When the corresponding function in the
control system is activated (컄 page 158):
앫
앫
The exterior rear view mirrors automatically fold in as soon as the vehicle is
locked from the outside.
Folding the exterior mirrors in and out
manually
The exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate if
they are not completely folded out.
The buttons are located on the door.
Press button 2 briefly.
Both mirrors fold in.
Folding out
왘
Press button 1 briefly.
Both mirrors fold out.
!
If an exterior rear view mirror housing
is forcibly pushed forward (hit from the
rear), reposition it manually by applying
firm pressure until it snaps back into
place.
!
1 Folds the exterior mirrors out
2 Folds the exterior mirrors in
왘
170
Folding in
왘
The exterior rear view mirrors automatically fold out as soon as the vehicle is
unlocked and the driver’s or front passenger door are subsequently opened.
Before you drive the vehicle through an
automatic car wash, fold the exterior
mirrors in, otherwise they may get
damaged.
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
light up.
i
Make sure that the ignition is switched
on.
If an exterior rear view mirror housing
is forcibly pushed rearward (hit from
the front), press button 2 to fold mirrors in, then press button 1 to fold mirrors out. Do not force mirrors by hand
as this may damage the adjustment
mechanism.
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Windshield wipers
!
Information on the windshield wipers is
found in the “Getting started” section
(컄 page 47).
To prevent the windshield wipers from
being damaged, do not leave the wiper
switch in intermittent setting when taking the vehicle to an automatic car
wash or when cleaning the windshield.
i
Intermittent wiping is interrupted when
the vehicle is at a standstill and a front
door is opened.
A rain sensor automatically controls the
windshield wipers depending on how wet
the windshield is.
왘
Switch on ignition.
왘
Set wiper switch to position I
(컄 page 47).
After the initial wipe, pauses between
wipes are automatically controlled by the
rain sensor which monitors the wetness of
the windshield.
Headlamp cleaning system
The switch is located on the left side of the
dashboard.
The switch should not be left in intermittent setting as the wipers will wipe
the windshield once every time the engine is started. Dust that accumulates
on the windshield might scratch the
glass when wiping occurs on a dry
windshield.
1 Headlamp washer switch
i
If intermittent wiping is on and you turn
the SmartKey in the steering lock from
position 1 to position 2 (컄 page 31)
and keep the SmartKey in that position
longer than 2 seconds, the wipe interval will be set to approximately 5 seconds.
왘
Switch on ignition.
왘
Press switch 1.
171
Controls in detail
Good visibility
If sunlight enters through a side window:
Sun visors
The sun visors protect you from sun glare
while driving.
Warning!
Swing sun visors down when you experience glare.
왘
Pivot sun visor to the side.
왘
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
왘
Disengage sun visor from mounting 1.
Adjusting the vanity mirror:
G
Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed
while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare
can endanger you and others.
왘
1 Mounting
2 Mirror cover
3 Mirror lamp
4 Document holder
왘
To use mirror, open cover 2.
Slide mirror to the right or left.
Images in the mirror appear in normal
size or larger, depending on the position of the mirror.
i
If you disengage the sun visor from
mounting 1, mirror lamp 3 will switch
off.
Document holder
You can use the plastic tab of the document holder to hold admission tickets,
parking passes, or similar items in place.
172
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Rear window sunshade*
Warning!
The switch is located in the center console.
G
Rear door window sunshade*
When operating the rear window sunshade,
be sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the raising or lowering procedure.
The raising or lowering procedure can be immediately reversed by pressing switch 1.
Warning!
왘
Turn the SmartKey to starter switch position 1 or 2.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: press the
start/stop button once or twice.
왘
Press the switch briefly at 1 to raise the
sunshade.
왘
Press the switch briefly at 1 to lower
the sunshade.
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from starter switch, and lock your
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
왘
To raise sunshade pull on the tab and
engage in holder.
왘
To lower sunshade disengage tab and
guide retraction.
!
Always guide the sunshade. Do not let
it snap back abruptly, as the retractor
could be damaged.
Always raise the sunshade fully for its support against the window frame.
173
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Automatic climate control
174
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Item
1 Swiveling left center air vent
2 Fixed air vent, left
i
For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders for the center air vents to the middle position.
Item
1 Windshield defroster
2 Rear window defroster
3 Air volume control for left center air
vent
3 Display
4 Air temperature control for center
air vents
5 Automatic climate control on/off
5 Air volume control for right center
air vent
7 Economy mode (ACOFF)
4 Residual engine heat utilization
6 Air distribution, right
6 Fixed air vent, right
8 Temperature control, right
7 Swiveling right center air vent
9 Air volume (automatic, manual)
8 Side defroster vent, left and right,
fixed
9 Swiveling side air vent, left and right
10 Air volume control for side air vents
10 Temperature control, left
Automatic climate control panel
11 Air recirculation
12 Air distribution, left
13 Activated charcoal filter
11 Door air vent, left and right
12 Automatic climate control panel
175
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
The automatic climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. You can
operate the climate control system in either the automatic or manual mode. The
system cools or heats the interior depending on the selected interior temperature
and the current outside temperature.
Warning!
G
When operating the automatic climate control, the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents in the
footwell can be very hot or very cold (depending on the set temperature). This may
cause burn or frostbite to unprotected skin
in the immediate area of the air vents. Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the footwell
air vents. If necessary change the air flow
using the air distribution controls to direct
the air away from the footwell air vents
(컄 page 178).
176
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and
odors are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through
the air distribution system.
The air conditioning will not engage (no
cooling) if the economy mode ACOFF is selected (컄 page 184).
Warning!
G
Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.
i
The current climate control settings
(ON/OFF, temperature, air volume, activated charcoal filter, etc.) are stored
for each SmartKey before it is removed
from the starter switch or when the vehicle is locked using the KEYLESS-GO*
card (if so equipped) (컄 page 100).
If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate
the interior before driving off.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow and debris.
Do not obstruct air volume by placing
objects on the air volume-through exhaust slots below the rear window.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Setting the temperature
Use temperature controls (컄 page 175)
10 for the left side or 8 for the right side to
separately adjust the air temperature on
each side of the passenger compartment.
You should raise or lower the temperature
setting in small increments, preferably
starting at 72°F (22°C).
i
When operating the climate control
system in automatic mode, you will
only rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume and air distribution.
Adjusting the temperature for center
air vents
When outside temperatures are low, you
can manually raise the air temperature for
the center and side air vents.
Thumbwheel 4 is located between the center air vents (컄 page 174).
Automatic temperature control
왘
Turn thumbwheel 4 to A.
The indicator lamp above the thumbwheel lights up. The temperature is automatically adjusted to the set value.
Turning on warm air
왘
Turn thumbwheel 4 in the direction of
the white marking.
Warm air will enter from the center air
vent.
Turning on cooler air
왘
Turn thumbwheel 4 in the direction of
the blue marking.
Cooler air will enter from the center air
vent.
Increasing/decreasing
왘
Press button 10 or 8 repeatedly until
the display shows the desired temperature.
The automatic climate control system
will correspondingly adjust the interior
air temperature.
177
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Adjusting air distribution
Use air distribution controls 12 and 6
(컄 page 175) to separately adjust the air
distribution on each side of the passenger
compartment. The following symbols are
found on the controls:
Adjusting manually
왘
Press button U.
왘
Turn the marking on the regulator to
the desired symbol.
Function
h
Directs air through the center air vents
j
Directs air to the windows
Adjusting automatically
V
Directs air into the entire
vehicle interior
왘
178
Directs air to the footwells
왘
The button emerges and the h,
V, j and ksymbols become
visible.
Symbol
k
Windows fogged on the inside
The indicator lamp in the button goes
out.
왘
The air will be directed to the vents corresponding to this symbol.
Press button U until it clicks in.
The h, V, j and ksymbols are no longer visible. The air distribution is adjusted automatically.
Press button ACOFF to switch on the air
conditioning (컄 page 175).
Press button O to switch off the air
recirculation (컄 page 175).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
왘
Adjust left and right air vents 1 and 6
upwards (컄 page 174).
왘
Set blower to the maximum blower
speed.
왘
Increase temperature setting.
왘
Open side air vents 9 and direct them
onto the side windows (컄 page 174).
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Windshield fogged on the outside
Adjusting air volume
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL
If the left and right air distribution controls
as well as the air volume control are set
to U and there is a high need for cooling, the display “MAXCOOL” appears.
왘
Switch the windshield wipers on.
왘
Press on both U buttons until they
click in.
Use air volume control 9 (컄 page 175) for
both automatic and manual air volume adjustment.
The h, V, j and ksymbols are no longer visible.
Adjusting automatically
왘
Press button O to switch off the air
recirculation (컄 page 175).
왘
Set blower to the maximum blower
speed.
This provides the fastest possible cooling
of the vehicle interior (when windows and
sliding/pop-up roof are closed).
The display shows “AUTO.” The air volume is adjusted automatically.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
왘
Press the A on air volume switch 9
(컄 page 175).
Adjusting manually
Reducing air volume
왘
Press switch 9 down until the desired
air volume is reached. The display
shows the current level.
Increasing air volume
왘
Press switch 9 up until the desired air
volume is reached. The display shows
the current level.
179
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Defrosting
i
These settings should only be selected
for a short time.
Activating
왘
Press button P (컄 page 175).
The indicator lamp on the button lights
up.
왘
Switch off air recirculation, if selected.
왘
Press button O (컄 page 175).
Air recirculation mode
Warning!
Activating
왘
Close center air vents.
왘
왘
Adjust side air vents upwards.
왘
Press button P (컄 page 175).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. Defrosting is turned off.
180
G
When the outside temperature is below
41°F (5°C), only switch to air recirculation
mode for short periods to prevent window
fogging.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
Deactivating
Warning!
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside. This setting cuts off the
intake of outside air and recirculates the
air in the passenger compartment.
Press button O (컄 page 175).
The indicator lamp on the button lights
up.
i
If you keep button O pressed, the
side windows and the sliding/pop-up
roof will be closed.
G
Never operate the side windows and the
sliding pop/pop-up roof if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the closing
procedure.
In the event that the procedure causes potential danger, the closing of the side windows can be immediately halted by pressing
the respective window switch. The closing of
the sliding/pop-up roof can be immediately
halted by moving the sliding/pop-up roof
switch in the overhead control panel in any
direction.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
i
Deactivating
The air recirculation mode is activated
automatically:
왘
앫
at high outside temperatures
앫
if the concentration of carbon monoxide and nitrogen oxide in the outside air increases, for example in a
tunnel.
Please note that the charcoal filter
must be activated (컄 page 182) for
the air recirculation mode to be activated automatically.
If you have turned off the air conditioning (컄 page 184) or the outside temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the air
recirculation mode will not switch on
automatically.
Press button O (컄 page 175).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
i
If you keep button O pressed, the
side windows and the sliding/pop-up
roof return to their previous position.
The air recirculation mode is deactivated
automatically:
앫
after five minutes if the outside temperature is below approximately 41°F
(5°C)
앫
after five minutes if the air conditioning
is turned off
앫
after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately 41°F
(5°C)
At outside temperatures above 79°F
(26°C) the system will not automatically
switch back to outside air. A quantity of
outside air is added after approximately
30 minutes.
181
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Charcoal filter
An activated charcoal filter markedly reduces bad odors and removes pollutants
from air entering the passenger compartment.
Activating
왘
Press button e (컄 page 175).
The indicator lamp on the button lights
up.
i
If you keep button e pressed, the
side windows and the sliding/pop-up
roof will be closed.
Warning!
G
Never operate the side windows and the
sliding pop/pop-up roof if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the closing
procedure.
In the event that the procedure causes potential danger, the closing of the side windows can be immediately halted by pressing
the respective window switch. The closing of
the sliding/pop-up roof can be immediately
halted by moving the sliding/pop-up roof
switch in the overhead control panel in any
direction.
Deactivating
왘
Press button e (컄 page 175).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
182
i
If you keep button e pressed, the
side windows and the sliding/pop-up
roof will be returned to their previous
position.
The system automatically switches to the
air recirculation mode if the carbon
monoxide (CO) or nitrogen oxide (NOX)
concentration of the outside air increases
beyond a predetermined level.
The automatic air recirculation mode does
not function if economy mode ACOFF is selected or if the outside temperature has
fallen below 41°F (5°C).
The activated charcoal filter should be
switched off when windows fog up on the
inside, or if the passenger compartment
needs to be quickly heated or cooled
down.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Rear window defroster
The rear window defroster uses a large
amount of power. To keep battery drain to
a minimum, switch off the defroster as
soon as the rear window is clear. The defroster is automatically deactivated after
approximately 6 to 17 minutes of operation depending on the outside temperature.
Activating
왘
Press button F (컄 page 175).
The indicator lamp on the button lights
up.
Deactivating
왘
Press button F (컄 page 175) again.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
Warning!
G
Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
removed from the rear window before driving. Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
endangering you and others.
!
If the rear window defroster switches
off too soon and the indicator lamp
starts blinking, this means that too
many electrical consumers are operating simultaneously and there is insufficient voltage in the battery. The system
responds automatically by deactivating
the rear window defroster.
As soon as the battery has sufficient
voltage, the rear window defroster automatically switches on again.
Deactivating the climate control system
Deactivating
It is possible to completely deactivate the
automatic climate control system.
왘
Press button M (컄 page 175).
The display shows “0”.
Reactivating
There are several ways to reactivate the
automatic climate control system:
왘
Press one of the following buttons,
M, P, U, a temperature control switch (컄 page 175) or air volume
switch 9 on the automatic climate control panel.
183
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Air conditioning
The air conditioning is operational while
the engine is running and cools the interior
air to the temperature you have set.
i
Condensation may drip out from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and
not an indication of a malfunction.
Deactivating
It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the automatic
climate control system. The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.
왘
Press button ACOFF (컄 page 175).
The indicator lamp on the
button ACOFF lights up.
184
Activating
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the air with the air conditioning.
왘
Press ACOFF again (컄 page 175).
The indicator lamp on the ACOFF button goes out.
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs
which are harmful to the ozone layer.
!
If the ACOFF button on the automatic
climate control panel starts to blink,
the air conditioning may be losing refrigerant. The compressor was turned
off. The air conditioning cannot be
turned on again.
Have the air conditioning checked at
the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Storage compartment ventilation
The storage compartment below the front
armrest (컄 page 225) has its own air vent.
Ventilation of the storage compartment
below the front armrest is possible only
when the climate control system is on. The
air volume depends on the setting of the
air distribution control, the air volume control, and the air vents in the dashboard.
The switch is located inside the storage
compartment in the front armrest
(컄 page 225).
Opening air vent
왘
Push upper portion of switch.
Closing air vent
왘
Push lower portion of switch.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
!
Do not obstruct the air vent in the storage compartment.
i
The storage compartment can be heated or cooled.
The compartment can get very warm
due to its confined space. When storing
heat sensitive objects in the compartment, close the air vent (컄 page 184)
while heating the passenger compartment.
Residual heat and ventilation
With the engine switched off, it is possible
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior
for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes
use of the residual heat produced by the
engine.
Activating
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 1 or remove it from the
starter switch.
왘
Press button T (컄 page 175).
The residual heat is automatically turned
off:
앫
when the ignition is switched on
앫
after about 30 minutes
앫
if the battery voltage drops
i
How long the system will provide heating depends on the coolant temperature and the temperature set by the
operator. The blower will run at speed
setting 1 regardless of the air distribution control setting.
The indicator lamp on button T
comes on.
Deactivating
왘
Press button T (컄 page 175).
The indicator lamp on button T
goes off.
185
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Rear passenger compartment adjustable air vents
Rear center console air vents
i
Rear side air vents
The booster blower allows air volume
speed to the rear passenger compartment to be increased at four different
levels.
The temperature at the air vents for
rear passenger compartment 1 and 2
is the same as at the dashboard center
air vents.
4 Rear side air vent, right and left
5 Air volume control for rear side air vent
To open rear side air vents:
1 Left center air vent
2 Right center air vent
3 Thumbwheel for center air vents with
adjustable booster blower
To open center air vents and to adjust the
booster blower:
왘
Turn thumbwheel 3.
186
왘
Turn thumbwheel 5 towards the window.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Rear passenger compartment climate
control*
The automatic climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. You can
operate the climate control system in either the automatic or manual mode. The
system cools or heats the interior depending on the selected interior temperature
and the current outside temperature.
i
When the rear seats are not occupied
(rear seat belts unbuckled) the rear climate control system adopts the settings of the front climate control
system.
1 Left center air vent
2 Display
3 Right center air vent
4 Air distribution
5 Temperature control, right
6 Air volume (automatic, manual)
7 Temperature control, left
The automatic climate control system is
adjustable individually for the rear passenger compartment.
8 Rear climate control system
ON/OFF
Residual engine heat utilization
The control panel is located in the rear center console.
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and
odors are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through
the air distribution system.
Item
Warning!
Rear automatic climate control panel
G
Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.
187
Controls in detail
Power windows
Power windows
Opening and closing the windows
The side windows can be opened and
closed electrically. The switches for all the
side windows are on the driver’s door.
There are individual switches in the front
and rear doors for the respective windows.
1 Right front window
2 Right rear window
3 Left rear window
4 Left front window
188
Warning!
G
When closing the windows, make sure that
there is no danger of anyone being harmed
by the closing procedure.
The closing of the windows can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or, if the
switch was pressed past the resistance
point and released, by pressing the respective switch.
If the window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
you pressed the switch past the resistance
point and released it to close the window,
the automatic reversal function will stop the
window and open it slightly.
If the window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
you are closing the window by pressing and
holding the switch, by pressing and holding
the ‹ button on the SmartKey, or by
pressing and
holding the lock button (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO*) on the door handle, the automatic reversal function will not operate.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from starter switch, take the
KEYLESS-GO* card (if so equipped) with
you, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause an
accident and/or serious personal injury.
왘
Turn SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2.
Opening the windows
왘
Lightly press the symbol k on one
of the switches 1 to 4, until the corresponding window reaches the desired
position.
Controls in detail
Power windows
Closing the windows
왘
Lightly press the j symbol on one
of the switches 1 to 4 until the corresponding window reaches the desired
position.
When pulling and holding the switch to
close the window, and upward movement
of the window is blocked during the last
few inches before closure, the window will
stop but not open slightly.
Fully opening windows
왘
Press the k symbol on one of the
switches 1 to 4 beyond the point of resistance and then release the switch.
The window opens completely.
Stopping windows
Fully closing windows
왘
Press the j symbol on one of the
switches 1 to 4 beyond the point of resistance and then release the switch.
The window closes completely.
If the upward movement of the window is
blocked during the closing procedure, the
window will stop and open slightly.
Warning!
G
Driver’s door only:
If within five seconds you again press the
switch past the resistance point and release, the automatic reversal function will
not function.
왘
Press respective switch again.
i
You can also open or close the windows using the:
앫
SmartKey (컄 page 190)
앫
O button in the control panel of
the automatic climate control
(컄 page 175)
앫
e button in the control panel of
the automatic climate control
(컄 page 175).
189
Controls in detail
Power windows
Opening and closing the windows with
the SmartKey
The sliding/pop-up roof will also be
opened or closed when you operate the
power windows with the SmartKey.
Warning!
In case the procedure causes potential danger, the procedure can be immediately halted by releasing the remote control button.
To reverse direction of movement press
Œ for opening or ‹ for closing.
Opening (Summer opening feature)
Press and hold button Πafter unlocking the vehicle.
The windows and sliding/pop-up roof
begin to open after approximately one
second.
190
Release the Πbutton to interrupt
the procedure.
Closing (Convenience feature)
왘
G
Never operate the windows or sliding/pop-up roof if there is the possibility of
anyone being harmed by the opening or
closing procedure.
왘
왘
Press and hold button ‹ after locking the vehicle.
The windows and sliding/pop-up roof
begin to close after approximately one
second.
왘
Release the ‹ button to interrupt
the procedure.
Ensure that all side windows and the sliding/pop-up roof are properly closed before
leaving the vehicle.
Closing the side windows and
sliding/pop-up roof with KEYLESS-GO*
왘
Press and hold lock button at door
(컄 page 53) until the side windows and
the sliding/pop-up roof are closed.
Warning!
G
When closing the windows and the sliding/pop-up roof, make sure that there is no
danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure.
The windows will not automatically reopen if
blocked during convenience closing.
If potential danger exists, proceed as follows:
SmartKey:
앫
Release the ‹ button.
앫
Press and hold the Πbutton until
the windows and the sliding/pop-up
roof opens again.
KEYLESS-GO*
앫
Release the lock button.
앫
Pull on the door handle and hold firmly.
The side windows and the sliding/pop-up roof will open for as long as
the door handle is held but the door is
not opened.
Controls in detail
Power windows
Synchronizing power windows
The power windows must be resynchronized each time after the battery has been
disconnected:
왘
Press the power window switches until
the side windows are closed and hold
the switches for approximately one
second.
191
Controls in detail
Sliding/pop-up roof
Sliding/pop-up roof
Opening and closing the sliding/pop-up
roof
Warning!
G
When closing the sliding/pop-up roof, make
sure that there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the closing procedure.
1 Push up to raise roof at rear
2 Pull down to lower roof at rear
3 Push forward to slide roof closed
4 Push back to slide roof open
192
With the roof closed or tilted open, a
screen can be slid into the roof opening to
guard against sun rays. When sliding the
roof open, the screen will also retract.
The closing procedure of the sliding/pop-up
roof can be immediately halted by releasing
the switch or, if the switch was moved past
the resistance point and released, by moving the switch in any direction.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from starter switch, take the
KEYLESS-GO* card (if so equipped) with
you, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Controls in detail
Sliding/pop-up roof
Opening and closing the sliding/pop-up
roof
왘
왘
Closing the sliding/pop-up roof automatically
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 1 or 2 or press the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button.
왘
To open, close, raise or lower the sliding/pop-up roof, move the switch to resistance point in the required direction.
The sliding/pop-up roof closes completely.
Release the switch when the roof has
reached the required position.
왘
Opening the sliding/pop-up roof automatically
To select a sliding/pop-up roof opening
position, press the switch to the resistance
point and release it when the sliding/pop-up roof has reached the required
position.
The sliding/pop up roof now opens to the
position set when the switch is pressed
past the resistance point in the "open" direction.
Press the switch past the resistance
point in the “close” direction and release.
Stopping the sliding/pop-up roof
Move the switch in any direction.
If the movement of the sliding/pop-up
roof is blocked during the closing procedure, the roof will stop and reopen
slightly.
i
You can also open or close the sliding/pop-up roof using the:
앫
SmartKey (컄 page 190)
앫
O button in the control panel of
the automatic climate control
(컄 page 175)
앫
e button in the control panel of
the automatic climate control
(컄 page 175)
!
To avoid damaging the seals, do not
transport any objects with sharp edges
which can stick out of the sliding/pop-up roof.
The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened
or closed manually should an electrical
malfunction occur (컄 page 330).
193
Controls in detail
Sliding/pop-up roof
Opening and closing the sliding/pop-up
roof with the SmartKey
Opening (Summer opening feature)
왘
The power windows will also be opened or
closed when you operate the sliding/pop-up roof with the SmartKey.
Warning!
G
Never operate the windows or sliding/pop-up roof if there is the possibility of
anyone being harmed by the opening or
closing procedure.
In case the procedure causes potential danger, the procedure can be immediately halted by releasing the remote control button.
To reverse direction of movement press
Œ for opening or ‹ for closing.
왘
Aim transmitter eye at the front door
handle.
194
Press and hold button Πafter unlocking the vehicle.
The windows and sliding/pop-up roof
begin to open after approximately one
second.
왘
Release the Πbutton to interrupt
the procedure.
Closing (Convenience feature)
왘
왘
Press and hold button ‹ after locking the vehicle.
Closing the side windows and
sliding/pop-up roof with KEYLESS-GO*
(Convenience feature)
왘
Press and hold lock button at door
(컄 page 53) until the side windows and
the sliding/pop-up roof are closed.
Warning!
G
When closing the windows and the sliding/pop-up roof, be sure that there is no
danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure.
The windows and sliding/pop-up roof
begin to close after approximately one
second.
If potential danger exists, proceed as follows:
앫
Release the lock button.
Release the ‹ button to interrupt
the procedure.
앫
Pull on the door handle and hold firmly.
The side windows and the sliding/pop-up roof will open for as long as
the door handle is held but the door is
not opened.
Ensure that all side windows and the sliding/pop-up roof are properly closed before
leaving the vehicle.
Controls in detail
Sliding/pop-up roof
Synchronizing the sliding/pop-up roof
The power sliding/pop-up roof must be resynchronized each time after:
앫
the battery has been disconnected
앫
the sliding/pop-up roof has been
closed manually
앫
the sliding/pop-up roof does not open
smoothly
앫
a malfunction
왘
Press the switch in direction 1.
왘
Wait until the sliding/pop-up roof is
raised and hold the switch down for
approximately one second.
195
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Driving systems
The driving systems of your vehicle are described on the following pages:
앫
앫
앫
앫
Cruise control and Distronic*, with
which the vehicle can maintain a preset
speed
AIRMATIC adjusts the vehicle suspension characteristics automatically and
controls the vehicle level.
ABC* with vehicle level control systems, with which you can change vehicle suspension characteristics
Parktronic*, which serves as a parking
assistant
For information on the BAS, ABS, and ESP
driving systems, see “Driving safety systems” (컄 page 76).
Cruise control
Cruise control automatically maintains the
speed you set for your vehicle.
Use of cruise control is recommended for
driving at a constant speed for extended
periods of time. You can set any speed
above 20 mph (30 km/h).
The cruise control function is operated by
means of the cruise control lever.
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
lever found on the left-hand side of the
steering column (컄 page 20).
Warning!
G
Cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver is and must remain at all
times responsible for the vehicle speed and
for safe brake operation.
Only use cruise control if the traffic, road
and weather conditions make it advisable to
travel at a steady speed.
앫
The use of cruise control can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic
because conditions do not allow safe
driving at a steady speed.
앫
The use of cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in
tire traction can result in wheel spin and
loss of control.
앫
Deactivate cruise control when driving
in fog.
The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.
196
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The selected speed appears in the multifunction display for approximately 5 seconds, and the corresponding speedometer
segments from the selected speed to the
vehicle’s maximum speed are illuminated.
i
1 Set current or higher speed
2 Set current or lower speed
3 Cancel cruise control
4 Resume at previously set speed
Setting current speed
왘
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.
왘
Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise
control lever.
The current speed is set.
왘
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
On uphill or downhill grades, cruise
control may not be able to maintain the
set speed. Once the grade eases, the
set speed will be resumed.
Canceling cruise control
!
Moving gear selector lever to
position N while driving also cancels
cruise control. However, the gear selector lever should not be moved to
position N while driving except to coast
when the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy roads).
i
The last stored speed is canceled when
you turn off the engine.
There are several ways to cancel cruise
control:
왘
Step on the brake pedal.
or
왘
Briefly push the cruise control lever to
position 3.
Cruise control will be canceled. The
last speed set will be stored for later
use.
Cruise control is activated.
197
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting to last stored speed (“Resume”
function)
Warning!
Lift the cruise control lever to
position 1 and hold it up until the desired speed is reached.
왘
Release the cruise control lever.
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The selected speed appears in the multifunction display for approximately 5 seconds, and the corresponding speedometer
segments from the selected speed to the
vehicle’s maximum speed are illuminated.
198
i
When you use the cruise control lever
to decelerate, the transmission will automatically downshift if the engine’s
braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently.
The new speed is set.
i
Depressing the accelerator pedal does
not deactivate cruise control. After
brief acceleration (e.g. for passing),
cruise control will resume the last
speed set.
Briefly push the cruise control lever to
position 4.
The cruise control will resume the last
set speed.
왘
왘
G
The speed stored in memory should only be
set again if prevailing road conditions permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
differences arising from returning to preset
speed could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others.
왘
Setting a higher speed
Setting a lower speed
왘
Depress the cruise control lever to
position 2 and hold it down until the
desired speed is reached.
왘
Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is set.
Fine adjustment in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments
Faster
왘
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 1.
Slower
왘
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 2.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic*
When activated, the Distronic adaptive
cruise control system increases driving
convenience afforded by the cruise control
during travel on expressways and other
major roads.
앫
앫
If the Distronic distance sensor detects
a slower moving vehicle directly ahead,
your vehicle speed will be reduced so
that you follow that vehicle at a preset
distance.
If there is no vehicle directly ahead of
you, Distronic will function in the same
way as cruise control (컄 page 196).
Warning!
G
Distronic adaptive cruise control is no substitute for active driving involvement. It does
not react to stationary objects, nor recognize or predict the curvature and lane layout
or the movement of vehicles ahead. Distronic can only apply a maximum of 20% of the
vehicle’s braking power.
It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to
be attentive to traffic and road conditions
and to provide the steering, braking and other driving inputs necessary to retain control
of the vehicle.
Warning!
G
Distronic is a convenience system. Its speed
adjustment reduction capability is intended
to make cruise control more effective and
usable when traffic speeds vary. However, it
is not intended to, nor does it, replace the
need for extreme care. The responsibility for
the vehicle speed and the distance to the vehicle ahead, including most importantly
brake operation to assure safe stopping distance, always rests with the driver.
Distronic cannot take street and traffic conditions into account.
Warning!
G
Distronic requires familiarity with its operational characteristics. We strongly recommend that you review the following
information carefully before operating the
system.
i
For operation in the USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
앫
This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
앫
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
199
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning!
G
Distronic cannot take street and traffic conditions into account. Only use Distronic if
the weather, road, and traffic conditions
make it advisable to travel at a steady
speed.
Warning!
G
Use of Distronic can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction
can result in wheel spin and loss of control.
Distronic does not act upon adverse sight
distance conditions. Do not use Distronic
during conditions of fog and heavy rain,
snow or sleet.
Warning!
G
Close attention to road and traffic conditions is imperative at all times, regardless of
whether or not Distronic is activated.
Use of Distronic can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a steady
speed.
Distronic will not react to stationary objects
in the roadway (e.g. a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). Distronic
will also not respond to oncoming vehicles.
Switch off Distronic:
앫
when changing from the left to the right
lane if vehicles are moving more slowly
in the left lane
앫
when entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp
앫
in complex driving situations, such as in
highway construction zones
In these situations, Distronic will continue to
maintain the set speed unless deactivated.
200
Distronic is designed and intended only to
maintain a set speed and keep a set distance from moving objects in front of it.
Warning!
G
The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic displays in the speedometer
dial
Under no circumstances should the
driver await the intermittent warning
sound before braking.
The intermittent warning sound ceases
and the red Distronic warning
lamp l goes out when the necessary distance to the vehicle ahead is
again established.
Segments
Set speed
If Distronic is activated, one or two segments light up around the set speed.
i
The vehicle speed displayed on the
speedometer can briefly vary from the
speed setting on the Distronic system.
If Distronic detects a vehicle directly
ahead, the segments (representing the
difference) between the speed of the
vehicle ahead and the set speed light up.
If Distronic calculates that there is a danger of collision (컄 page 207):
앫
The red Distronic warning lamp l in
the instrument cluster lights up.
앫
An intermittent warning sounds.
왘
Immediately brake the vehicle to avoid
a collision.
201
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning!
G
Warning!
G
An intermittent warning sounds and the
Distronic warning lamp l in the instrument cluster is illuminated if the Distronic
system calculates that the distance to the
vehicle ahead and your vehicle’s current
speed indicate that Distronic will not be capable of slowing the vehicle sufficiently to
maintain the preset following distance,
which creates a danger of a collision.
Distronic brakes your vehicle with a maximum of 6.5 ft/s2 (2 m/s2). This corresponds to about 20% of the maximum
deceleration ability of your vehicle.
Immediately brake your vehicle to increase
the distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you. The warning sound is
intended as a final caution that you have not
interceded with your own braking inputs to
avoid a potentially dangerous situation. Do
not wait for the operation of the warning signal to intercede with your own braking, as
that will result in potentially dangerous
emergency braking which will not always result in an impact being avoided.
Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times, including the area under the brake pedal. Objects stored in this area may impair pedal
movement which could interfere with the
braking ability of the Distronic system.
Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.
202
Distronic brakes the vehicle in an effort to
restore the preset distance or to maintain
the speed. The brake pedal is automatically
applied as this happens which results in the
brake pedal moving.
Do not place your foot under the brake pedal
– your foot could become caught.
Distronic menu in the control system
In the Distronic menu you see the current
settings for Distronic. What appears in the
display depends on whether Distronic and
the distance warning function are turned
on or off.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see one of the following displays.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic deactivated
Distronic activated
Cruise control lever
If Distronic is deactivated, the standard
display of Distronic appears in the multifunction display.
When you turn Distronic on, you will see
the set speed in the multifunction display
for about five seconds. If Distronic is
activated, you can see the following display in the multifunction display.
The Distronic system is operated by means
of the cruise control lever.
1 Vehicle ahead, if detected
2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead
3 Should-be distance to vehicle ahead
4 Symbol for activated distance warning
function
5 Your vehicle
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
lever found on the left-hand side of the
steering column.
1 Distronic activated
1 Set current or higher speed
2 Set current or lower speed
3 Deactivate Distronic
4 Resume at previously set speed
203
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Activating Distronic
Setting the current speed
You can activate Distronic if:
왘
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.
왘
Briefly lift or depress the cruise control
lever.
앫
앫
you are driving between 25 mph
(40 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h)
the ESP is activated (컄 page 78)
If Distronic has not been activated after
pressing the cruise control lever you will
see the message --- in the multifunction
display.
In the following cases you cannot activate
Distronic:
앫
up to two minutes after starting the engine
앫
when you brake
앫
if you have set the parking brake
앫
if the gear selector lever is in
position P, R, or N
앫
if the ESP is switched off
204
Distronic is activated and the current
speed is set.
왘
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
i
If you do not take your foot off of the
accelerator completely, the following
message will appear in the multifunction display:
DISTRONIC OVERRIDE.
Distronic will not work to maintain the
distance to a slower moving vehicle in
front of you. Your vehicle speed will
then be determined only by the accelerator pedal position.
Setting a higher speed
왘
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 1 (컄 page 203) to increase vehicle speed in increments of
5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h)
The new speed is set.
The stored speed is displayed in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds (컄 page 203), and one or two
segments around the stored speed light up
on the speedometer (컄 page 201).
i
Depressing the accelerator pedal does
not deactivate Distronic. After brief acceleration (e.g. for passing), the cruise
control will resume the last speed set.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting a lower speed
왘
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 203) to
decrease vehicle speed in increments
of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h)
The new speed is set.
The stored speed is displayed in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds (컄 page 203), and one or two
segments around the stored speed light up
on the speedometer (컄 page 201).
i
When you use the cruise control lever
to decelerate, the transmission will automatically downshift if the rate of deceleration is too low.
Fine adjustment in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments
Faster
왘
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 203).
Setting to last stored speed (“Resume”
function)
Warning!
G
The speed stored in memory should only be
set again if prevailing road conditions permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
differences arising from returning to preset
speed could cause an accident and/or serious injury you and others.
왘
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 203).
Distronic is set to the last stored
speed.
왘
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
205
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Deactivating Distronic
Distronic deactivates automatically when:
There are several ways to deactivate the
Distronic system:
앫
you set the parking brake
앫
you drive slower than
25 mph (40 km/h)
앫
the ESP is active (컄 page 78) or you deactivate the ESP
앫
you move the transmission selector lever into position N
왘
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 3 (컄 page 203).
or
왘
Step on the brake pedal.
Distronic will be deactivated. The last
speed set will be stored into memory.
i
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display for approximately five seconds: DISTRONIC OFF.
The last stored speed is deleted when
you turn off the engine.
206
A signal will sound. The DISTRONIC OFF
message appears in the multifunction
display for approximately five seconds.
Warning!
G
Distronic switches off and releases the
brakes when the vehicle decelerates below
the minimum speed of approximately
25 mph (40 km/h) by operation of the system. At that time the driver must apply the
brakes in order to reduce vehicle speed further or bring it to a stop.
Setting the following distance in
Distronic
You can set the specified following distance for Distronic by varying the time setting between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Using
this time setting and the current speed of
your vehicle, Distronic calculates and sets
the required following distance to the vehicle ahead. The set distance will be shown
in the multifunction display field.
The thumbwheel for making the time setting is located on the lower section of the
center console.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning!
G
It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to
select the appropriate setting given road
conditions, traffic, driver’s preferred driving
style and applicable laws and driving recommendations for safe following distance.
Increasing distance
Distance warning function
Increasing the distance setting causes Distronic to maintain a greater following distance to the vehicle ahead.
When Distronic is deactivated, this function will continue to warn you when recognizing a stationary obstacle or a slower
vehicle moving in the vehicle’s path and
the danger of a collision exists:
왘
Decreasing distance
앫
Decreasing the distance setting causes
Distronic to maintain a shorter following
distance to the vehicle ahead.
The distance warning lamp l in the
instrument cluster lights up.
앫
An intermittent warning sounds.
왘
1 Distance warning function on/off
switch
2 Thumbwheel for setting distance
Turn thumbwheel 2 towards ¯ .
Turn thumbwheel 2 towards ® .
If these warnings are issued, you must
brake manually to maintain a safe distance
and avoid a collision with the vehicle
ahead.
When pressing the brake pedal, the warning sound stops. The warning sound also
stops when the distance to the vehicle
ahead is sufficient again without applying
the brake pedal. In this case the distance
warning lamp also extinguishes.
207
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning!
G
If the Distronic warning lamp l in the instrument cluster lights up while driving
and/or an intermittent warning sounds, immediate attention on the part of the driver is
required.
As required by the traffic situation, apply the
brakes and navigate around a possible obstacle. However, do not drive by relying on
the distance warning function, as this will result in an emergency braking application.
Especially depending on road surface conditions and driver reaction, this will not always
enable you to avoid a collision.
i
Complex driving situations are not always fully recognized by Distronic. This
could result in wrong or missing distance warnings.
208
Activating
왘
Press switch 1.
The indicator lamp on the switch lights
up. A loudspeaker symbol appears in
the multifunction display (컄 page 203).
Driving with Distronic
This section describes a number of driving
situations where special precaution is required on the part of the driver. Be prepared to brake in such situations which will
deactivate the Distronic system.
Deactivating
왘
G
Press switch 1.
Warning!
The indicator lamp on the switch goes
out.
Distronic works to maintain the speed selected by the driver unless a moving obstacle proceeding directly ahead of it in the
same travel direction is detected (e.g. following another vehicle ahead of you at a distance set by Distronic). This means that:
앫
Your vehicle can pass another vehicle
after you change lanes.
앫
While in a sharp turn or if the vehicle in
front is in a sharp turn, Distronic could
lose sight of a vehicle traveling in front
of it, then your vehicle could accelerate
컄컄
to the previously selected speed.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
컄컄 Distronic regulates only the distance be-
tween your vehicle and those directly ahead
of it, but does not register stationary objects
in the road, e.g.:
The most likely cause for a malfunctioning
system is a dirty sensor (located behind
the hood grille), especially at times of snow
and ice or heavy rain. In such a case, Distronic will switch off, and the message
앫
a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam
앫
a disabled vehicle
DISTRONIC - CLEAN SENSOR! SEE
OPERATOR’S MAN. appears in the multifunc-
앫
an oncoming vehicle
tion display.
The driver must always be on the alert, observe all traffic and intercede as required by
steering or braking the vehicle.
For cleaning and care of the Distronic sensor, see “Cleaning the Distronic* system
sensor cover” (컄 page 285).
i
G
If the message DISTRONIC - CLEAN
SENSOR! SEE OPERATOR’S MAN. disap-
Distronic should not be used in snowy or icy
road conditions.
pears during driving and the last speed
stored flashes for approximately five
seconds, the dirt (e.g. slush) has dissolved; Distronic is again operational.
Warning!
Turns and bends
In turns or bends, Distronic may not detect
a moving vehicle in front, or it may detect
one too soon. This may cause your vehicle
to brake late or unexpectedly.
209
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Offset driving
Lane changing
Narrow vehicles
A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset
from your direct line of travel may not be
detected by Distronic. There will be insufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle
changing lanes. There will be insufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle.
Because of its narrow profile, the vehicle
traveling near the edge of the roadway has
not yet been detected by Distronic. There
will be insufficient distance to the vehicle
ahead.
210
Controls in detail
Driving systems
AIRMATIC
AIRMATIC automatically selects the optimum suspension tuning and ride height for
your vehicle. AIRMATIC consists of two
components:
앫
Adaptive Damping System (ADS)
앫
Level control system
The ADS automatically selects the optimum damping for the respective driving
conditions. At the same time the suspension is set to either sporty or regular.
Suspension tuning
The suspension tuning is set according to:
앫
Your driving style
앫
Road surface conditions
앫
Your choice of suspension style,
“sporty” or “regular”, which you select
using the damping switch.
The following suspension styles are available:
앫
앫
Regular
Both indicator lamps 1 are off.
왘
Start the engine.
Sporty I
왘
Press the damping switch 2 until the
desired suspension style is set.
One indicator lamp 1 is on.
앫
1 Indicator lamps
2 Damping switch
Sporty II
Both indicator lamps 1 are on.
i
The selected suspension style is stored
in memory, even after the SmartKey is
removed from the starter switch.
211
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Vehicle level control with AIRMATIC
Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride
height to:
앫
reduce fuel consumption
앫
increase vehicle safety
The vehicle chassis ride height is raised or
lowered according to the selected level
setting and to the vehicle speed:
앫
With increasing speed, ride height is reduced by up to approximately 3/4 inch
(20 mm).
앫
With decreasing speed, the ride height
is again raised to the selected vehicle
level.
i
These height adjustments are so small
that you may not notice any change.
212
The following vehicle level settings can be
selected when the vehicle is stationary:
Level
Normal
For driving on normal roads.
The indicator lamp is off.
Raised
For driving on rough roads or
with snow chains.The indicator lamp is on.
Select the "Raised" level setting only when
required by current driving conditions.
Otherwise:
앫
Fuel consumption may increase
앫
Handling may be impaired
Warning!
G
To help avoid personal injury, keep hands
and feet away from wheel housing area, and
stay away from under the vehicle when lowering the vehicle chassis.
The switch with the indicator lamps is located in the upper part of the center console.
1 Indicator lamp
2 Vehicle level control switch
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왘
Briefly press switch 2 to change from
one level setting to the other.
The message:
AIRMATIC
VEHICLE RISING
appears in the multifunction display
when changing from normal level to
raised level. The indicator lamp is then
lit. The display switches off when the
vehicle is raised.
왘
Press switch 2 again to lower the vehicle. The indicator lamp is off.
The selected vehicle level setting remains
stored in memory even if the engine is
turned off and restarted except when you
앫
exceed a speed of 75 mph (120 km/h)
Active Body Control (ABC)*
The ABC system automatically selects the
optimum suspension tuning and ride
height for your vehicle.
or
앫
maintain a speed of between 50 mph
(80 km/h) and 75 mph (120 km/h) for
more than 5 minutes
The vehicle then lowers to regular level.
The message:
AIRMATIC
LEV. SELECT. CANCELED!
appears in the multifunction display and
the indicator lamp is off. The display
switches off when the vehicle is raised.
Suspension tuning
The suspension tuning is set according to:
앫
Your driving style
앫
Road surface conditions
앫
The vehicle loading
앫
Your choice of suspension style,
“sporty” or “regular”, which you select
using the ABC button
The selected suspension style is stored
in memory, even after the SmartKey is
removed from the starter switch.
213
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The ABC switch with the indicator lamps is
located in the upper part of the center console.
Suspension for sporty driving style
Suspension for regular driving style
The setting for sporty driving is selected
when indicator lamp 1 is illuminated.
The setting for regular driving is selected
when indicator lamp 1 is off.
왘
Press switch 2 to change from regular
suspension to sporty suspension style.
Indicator lamp 1 comes on.
왘
Press switch 2 to change from sporty
suspension style to regular suspension
style.
Indicator lamp 1 goes out.
1 Indicator lamp
2 ABC switch
왘
Start the engine.
214
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Vehicle level control with ABC*
i
Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride
height to:
These height adjustments are so small
that you may not notice any change.
앫
reduce fuel consumption
앫
increase vehicle safety
The vehicle chassis ride height is raised or
lowered according to the selected level
setting and to the vehicle speed:
앫
With increasing speed, ride height is reduced by up to approximately 1.4 inch
(35 mm).
앫
With decreasing speed, the ride height
is again raised to the selected vehicle
level.
Select the level 1 and 2 settings only when
required by current driving conditions.
Otherwise:
앫
Fuel consumption may increase
앫
Handling may be impaired
Warning!
G
To help avoid personal injury, keep hands
and feet away from wheel housing area, and
stay away from under the vehicle when lowering the vehicle chassis.
215
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The following vehicle level settings can be
selected when the vehicle is stationary:
Vehicle level when Use for
stationary
Ride height increase
over normal
Automatic lowering
Normal
None
Max. approx. 0.6 in (15 mm) Both lamps off
Normal operation
1
Indicator lamps
Level 1
Driving with snow chains
(컄 page 247)
Max. 0.4 in (10 mm)
Max. approx. 1.0 in (25 mm) One lamp lit
Level 2
Very rough road surface
conditions
Max. 0.8 in (20 mm)1
Max. approx. 1.4 in (35 mm) Both lamps lit
1
Dependent on loading
The switch with the indicator lamps is located in the upper part of the center console.
왘
Briefly press switch 2 to change from
one level setting to the next. When vehicle is at level 2, pressing the switch
will return the vehicle to normal level.
The message:
ACTIVE BODY CONTROL
VEHICLE RISING
1 Indicator lamps
2 Vehicle level control switch
216
appears in the multifunction display.
The display switches off when the vehicle is raised.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i
Raised level 1 (see table)
Raised level 2 (see table)
Pressing the switch twice in quick succession will cause the vehicle to immediately raise or lower according to the
starting level.
Speed-dependent lowering of vehicle
chassis (approximate values):
Speed-dependent lowering of vehicle
chassis (approximate values):
The selected vehicle level setting remains stored in memory even if the engine is turned off and restarted.
Normal level (see table)
Speed-dependent lowering of vehicle
chassis (approximate values):
앫
Between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 40 mph
(65 km/h) – none
앫
Between 40 mph (65 km/h) and
87 mph (140 km/h) – lowered
progressively by approximately 0.6 in
(15 mm).
앫
Between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 38 mph
(60 km/h) - raised by approximately
0.4 in (10 mm)
앫
Between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 18 mph
(30 km/h) - raised by approximately
0.8 in (20 mm)
앫
Between 38 mph (60 km/h) and
118 mph (190 km/h) - lowered
progressively by approximately 1.0 in
(25 mm)
앫
Between 18 mph (30 km/h) and
38 mph (60 km/h) – lowered progressively by approximately 0.4 in (10 mm)
앫
Between 38 mph (60 km/h) and
118 mph (190 km/h) – lowered progressively by additional 1.0 in (25 mm)
217
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Parktronic system* (Parking assist)
Warning!
G
Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is
not intended to, nor does it replace, the
need for extreme care. The responsibility
during parking and other critical maneuvers
always rests with the driver.
Special attention must be paid to objects
with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes
(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts, or road
curbs). Such objects may not be detected by
the system and can damage the vehicle.
The operational function of the Parktronic
can be affected by dirty sensors, especially
at times of snow and ice, see “Cleaning the
Parktronic* system sensors” (컄 page 285).
Interference caused by other ultrasonic signals (e.g. working jackhammers or the air
brakes of trucks) can cause the system to
send erratic indications, and should be taken into consideration.
218
Warning!
G
Make sure that no persons or animals are in
the area in which you are maneuvering. You
could otherwise injure them.
The Parktronic system monitors the surroundings of your vehicle with six sensors
in the front bumper and four sensors in the
rear bumper.
The Parktronic system is an electronic aid
designed to assist the driver during parking maneuvers. It visually and audibly indicates the relative distance between the
vehicle and an obstacle.
The Parktronic system is automatically activated when you switch on the ignition
and release the parking brake. The Parktronic system deactivates at speeds
exceeding 11 mph (18 km/h). At lower
speeds the Parktronic system turns on
again.
1 Sensors in the front bumper
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Range of the sensors
To function properly, the sensors must be
free of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean the
sensors regularly, being careful not to
scratch or damage the sensors.
Front sensors
Minimum distance
Center
approx. 40 in (100 cm)
Center
approx. 8 in (20 cm)
Corners
approx. 24 in (60 cm)
Corners
approx. 6 in (15 cm)
Rear sensors
Center
approx. 48 in (120 cm)
Corners
approx. 32 in (80 cm)
!
If the system detects an obstacle in this
range, all the warning lamps light up and
you hear a warning signal. If the obstacle is
closer than the minimum distance, the actual distance might no longer be indicated
by the system.
During parking maneuvers, pay special
attention to objects located above or
below the height of the sensors (e.g.
planters or trailer hitches). The Parktronic system will not detect such objects at close range and damage to
your vehicle or the object may result.
Ultrasonic signals from outside sources (e.g. truck air brakes or jackhammers) may impair the operation of the
Parktronic system.
219
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The position of the gear selector lever determines which warning indicators will be
activated.
Warning indicators
Visual signals indicate to the driver the relative distance between the sensors and an
obstacle. The warning indicators for the
front area are located in the dashboard
(컄 page 20). The warning indicator for the
rear area is integrated in the rear trim.
Selector lever po- Warning indicator
sition
2 Right front area warning indicator
Each warning indicator is divided into six
yellow and two red segments for either
side of the vehicle. The Parktronic system
is ready when the border around the indicator is illuminated.
1 Left front area warning indicator
220
D
Front area activated
R or N
Front and rear area
activated
P
Neither activated
Controls in detail
Driving systems
As your vehicle approaches an object, one
or more segments will light up, depending
on the distance between your vehicle and
the object. When the eighth segment lights
up, you have reached the minimum distance.
앫
Front area: An intermittent acoustic
warning will sound as the first red segment lights up and a constant acoustic
warning, both lasting a maximum of
three seconds, will sound for the eighth
segment, i.e. the second red segment.
앫
Rear area: An intermittent acoustic
warning will sound as the first red segment lights up and a constant acoustic
warning, both lasting a maximum of
three seconds, will sound for the eighth
segment, i.e. the second red segment.
The signal is canceled when the selector lever is placed in position D or P.
Switching the Parktronic system
on/off
Switching off the Parktronic system
왘
You can switch off the Parktronic system
manually.
The Parktronic switch is located in the upper section of the center console.
Press switch 2.
Indicator lamp 1 comes on.
Switching on the Parktronic system
왘
Press switch 2 again.
Indicator lamp 1 goes out.
1 Indicator lamp
2 Parktronic on/off
221
Controls in detail
Loading
Loading
Roof rack*
Warning!
Preparing roof rack installation
G
Use only roof racks approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model to avoid
damage to the vehicle. Follow manufacturer’s installation instructions.
왘
Open trim at the trim strips in the roof.
왘
Secure the roof rack according to manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
!
Load the roof rack in such a way that
the vehicle cannot be damaged while
driving.
Make sure that:
222
앫
you can fully raise the
sliding/pop-up roof
앫
you can fully open the trunk
Loading instructions
The total load weight including vehicle occupants and luggage/cargo should not exceed the vehicle capacity weight indicated
on the certification tag which can be found
on the left door pillar.
Controls in detail
Loading
Warning!
G
Cargo tie-down hooks
Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle and can cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items
are securely fastened in the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when transporting cargo. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backs.
Do not place anything on the rear-window
shelf.
Six hooks are located in the trunk.
왘
Carefully secure cargo by applying
even load on all hooks with rope of sufficient strength to hold down the cargo.
Never drive vehicle with trunk open. Deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness
and death.
223
Controls in detail
Useful features
Useful features
Interior storage spaces
Warning!
Glove box
An AUX socket 1 is located on the left side
of the glove box. Portable audio devices
can be plugged in here. A storage compartment is located in the cover of the glove
box. It can be used to store check cards,
pens, a flashlight, etc.
G
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when stowing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not
pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat
backs.
Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy
objects.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
to prevent stored objects from being thrown
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
an accident.
1 Unlocked position
2 Locked position
3 Glove box lid release
Opening the glove box
왘
Press glove box lid release 3.
The glove box lid opens downward.
i
The glove box can be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key.
Closing the glove box
왘
224
Storage compartment in the glove box
Push lid up to close.
1 AUX socket
2 Storage compartment in glove box
왘
Lightly press the marking on the lid of
storage compartment 2.
The lid opens upward.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage compartment in the center
console
Storage compartment in front of armrest
Storage compartment below the front
armrest
The buttons are located under the cushion
of the armrest.
The storage compartment is located in the
lower portion of the center console.
1 Storage compartment
1 Storage compartment
Opening
왘
Slide the mark on the compartment
cover forward.
Closing
왘
Lightly press the mark on the compartment cover forward. The cover closes
automatically.
Opening
The compartment contains a cup holder
(컄 page 229).
왘
1 Button to open storage compartment
2 Button to open storage tray
Lightly touch cover plate 1.
The cover opens automatically.
Closing
왘
Lightly push cover plate 1 up until it engages.
225
Controls in detail
Useful features
Opening storage tray
Compartment for glasses
Press button 1 and lift the armrest lid.
The tray contains a coin holder.
i
왘
The compartment for glasses is located under the armrest in the center console.
Opening storage compartment
왘
The storage compartment can be heated or cooled.
The compartment can get very warm
due to its confined space. When storing
heat-sensitive objects in the compartment, close the air vent (컄 page 184)
while heating the passenger compartment.
!
Do not obstruct the air vent in the storage compartment.
226
Press button 2 and lift the armrest.
!
Do not store any objects under the
storage tray.
Do not let bank cards, credit cards, or
other cards with a magnetic strip come
near the storage tray, as a magnet built
into the tray could erase or change the
information on the card.
1 Compartment for glasses
Opening compartment for glasses
왘
Fold the right side of the armrest upwards.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Telephone holder*
The telephone holder is located under the
armrest in the center console.
Storage compartments in the rear passenger compartment
Armrest with integrated storage compartment
!
Before storing the armrest in the backrest, close the storage compartment
lid.
1 Telephone holder
Opening telephone holder
왘
Fold the right side of the armrest upwards.
1 Rear armrest
2 Lid handle
Opening
왘
Pull down the armrest by its strap.
왘
Press handle 2 and lift lid.
227
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage compartment between rear
seats*
Storage compartment in rear shelf*
Storage compartments under the front
seats
1 Rear shelf compartment
1 Storage compartment lid
Opening
Opening
왘
Push the lid toward the backrest.
왘
Lift the lid using the handle in the front.
1 Lid
2 Buttons
Opening
왘
Press buttons 2 together and fold lid 1
down.
Closing
왘
228
Close lid 1 until both buttons 2 of lock
engage.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cup holder in front of seat armrest
Warning!
G
Folding out cup holder
Folding in cup holder
The cup holder is located in the storage
compartment in front of the armrest.
When not in use, keep the cup holder closed
while traveling. Place only containers that fit
into the cup holder to prevent spills. Use lids
on open containers and do not fill containers
to a height where the contents, especially
hot liquids, could spill during vehicle maneuvers.
1 Cup holder
왘
1 Button for folding out the cup holder
왘
Open the storage compartment in front
of armrest (컄 page 225).
왘
Push button 1.
Swing cup holder 1 back and press it
into the storage compartment until it
engages.
The cup holder opens automatically.
229
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cup holder in rear seat armrest
Warning!
Opening cup holder
G
When not in use, keep the cup holder
closed. Place only containers that fit into the
cup holder to prevent spills. Use lids on
open containers and do not fill containers to
a height where the contents, especially hot
liquids, could spill during vehicle maneuvers.
왘
Push front of sliding compartment 1.
The cup holder slides out.
Closing cup holder
왘
Push sliding compartment 1 back until
it engages.
Auxiliary cup holder
You can fasten the auxiliary cup holder
onto the left front side of the passenger
seat.
Inserting auxiliary cup holder
1 Cover
왘
230
Pull up cover 1 and place it in a storage
compartment.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Warning!
G
When not in use, remove the auxiliary cup
holder. Place only containers that fit into the
auxiliary cup holder to prevent spills. Use
lids on open containers and do not fill containers to a height where the contents, especially hot liquids, could spill during vehicle
maneuvers.
2 Insert
3 Auxiliary cup holder
왘
Removing the auxiliary cup holder
왘
Pull auxiliary cup holder 3
(컄 page 230) up and out of the receptacle and place it in a storage compartment.
왘
Install cover 1 (컄 page 230) on the
opening and press cover down until it
snaps into place.
i
Press auxiliary cup holder 3 in direction
of the arrow until it snaps into place.
When you move the seat forward, the
auxiliary cup holder turns to the side.
You can now place a larger container in
the holder. For even larger containers
you can take out insert 2. Make sure
that the container does not press
against the glove box.
When you move the seat backward,
turn the auxiliary cup holder back to its
original position.
231
Controls in detail
Useful features
Parcel net in front passenger footwell
Parcel net in trunk
Ashtrays
A small convenience parcel net is located
in the front passenger footwell. It is for
small and light items, such as road maps,
mail, etc.
You can hang a parcel net in the trunk. The
hooks and the parcel net in the trunk can
hold a load of up to 29.8 lbs (13.5 kg).
Center console ashtray
Warning!
G
Do not place heavy or fragile objects, or objects having sharp edges, in the parcel net.
In an accident, during hard braking, or sudden maneuvers they could be thrown
around inside the vehicle and cause injury to
vehicle occupants.
왘
Hang the parcel net on hooks 1 on the
left and right sides of the trunk.
!
The parcel net cannot protect or sufficiently secure goods in the event of an
accident.
232
Opening ashtray
왘
Briefly touch cover plate 1.
The ashtray opens automatically.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Removing ashtray insert
Warning!
Rear door ashtray
Cigarette lighters
G
Remove front ashtray only with vehicle
standing still. Set the parking brake to secure vehicle from movement. Move gear selector lever to position N. With gear selector
lever in position N turn off the engine.
왘
왘
Secure vehicle from movement by setting the parking brake. Move the selector lever to position N.
Lightly touch the back of the ashtray.
Removing ashtray insert
Push sliding button 2 to the right.
왘
Remove insert from ashtray frame.
Reinstalling the ashtray insert
왘
왘
Now you have more room to take out
the insert.
The ashtray is disengaged and slides
out a short way.
왘
Opening ashtray
Pull the ashtray back slightly and remove the insert (see arrows).
Reinstalling the ashtray insert
왘
Position the insert and press down
while sliding forward.
1 Center console cigarette lighter
왘
Turn SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2.
왘
Briefly touch cover plate to open ashtray and access cigarette lighter.
왘
Push in cigarette lighter 1.
The lighter will pop out automatically
when hot.
Install insert by pushing it back into the
frame until it engages.
233
Controls in detail
Useful features
Warning!
G
Warning!
G
Never touch the heating element or sides of
the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the
knob only.
Never touch the heating element or sides of
the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the
knob only.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
KEYLESS-GO* card (if so equipped) with you
and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
To avoid possible injury to children sitting in
the rear seat, deactivate the operation of
the rear door windows, see (컄 page 74). Deactivation of the rear windows also deactivates the lighters.
i
The lighter socket can be used to accommodate electrical accessories up
to a maximum 85 W.
234
1 Rear door lighters
왘
Turn SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2.
왘
Lightly touch the back of the ashtray to
open it (컄 page 233).
왘
Push in cigarette lighter 1.
The lighter will pop out automatically
when hot.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
KEYLESS-GO* card (if so equipped) with you
and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Heated steering wheel*
The steering wheel heating warms up the
leather area of the steering wheel.
Switching on
왘
Make sure that the ignition is switched
on.
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
should light up.
The lever is on the lower left-hand side of
the steering wheel.
왘
Turn lever in the direction of arrow 1.
The steering wheel is heated. Indicator
lamp 2 lights up.
Switching off
왘
Turn the lever in direction of arrow 3.
The steering wheel heating is turned
off. Indicator lamp 2 goes out.
i
The steering wheel heating does not
turn off automatically.
1 Switching on
2 Indicator lamp
3 Switching off
235
Controls in detail
Useful features
Telephone*
Warning!
Warning!
G
Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
attention to the road must always be
his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a telephone call.
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
If you choose to use the telephone1 while
driving, please use the hands-free device
and only use the telephone when road,
weather and traffic conditions permit. Some
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit, should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
The external antenna must be approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information on the installation of an approved
external antenna. Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use
of an external antenna.
236
G
Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System)1 if road, weather
and traffic conditions permit.
1
Observe all legal requirements.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of approximately
44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every second.
You can take and place telephone calls using the í and ì buttons on the
steering wheel. To carry out other telephone functions, use the control system
(컄 page 130).
See separate operating manual for instructions on how to use the telephone.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Tele Aid
!
The initial activation of the Tele Aid system may only be performed by completing the subscriber agreement and
placing an acquaintance call using the
SOS button. Failure to complete either
of these steps will result in a system
that is not activated. If the system is
not activated, the indicator lamp in the
SOS button stays on after turning
SmartKey in starter switch to
position 2 or pressing KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button (if so equipped)
twice to position 2 (컄 page 33). The
message TELE AID – NOT ACTIVATED
will be shown in the multifunction display for approximately 10 seconds.
If you have any questions regarding activation, please call the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
The Tele Aid system
i
(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)
The SOS button is located above the inside rear view mirror.
The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response:
The Roadside Assistance button •
and the Information button ¡ are
located below the center armrest cover.
앫
Automatic and manual emergency
앫
Roadside Assistance, and
앫
Information
The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the vehicle’s battery is charged,
properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available.
The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can
be adjusted using the volume control on
the multifunction steering wheel. To turn
volume up, press button æ. Press
button ç to turn volume down.
왘
Shortly after the completion of your acquaintance call, you will receive a user ID
and password via first call mail. By visiting
www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid”
(USA only), you will have access to account
information, remote door unlock, and
more.
To activate, press the SOS button, the
Roadside Assistance button • or
the Information button ¡, depending on the type of response required.
237
Controls in detail
Useful features
System self-check
Initially, after turning the SmartKey in
starter switch to position 2, malfunctions
are detected and indicated (the indicator
lamps in the SOS button, the Roadside Assistance button • and the Information
button ¡ stay on longer than
10 seconds or do not come on). The message TELE AID – VISIT WORKSHOP! appears for approximately 10 seconds in the
multifunction display.
i
The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular
network for communication and the
GPS (Global Positioning System) satellites for vehicle location. If either of
these signals are unavailable, the Tele
Aid system may not function and if this
occurs, assistance must be summoned
by other means.
238
Warning!
G
If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in
the Roadside Assistance button and/or in
the Information button remain illuminated
constantly in red and/or the message
TELE AID – VISIT WORKSHOP! is displayed in the multifunction display after the
system self-check, a malfunction in the system has been detected.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
above, the system may not operate as expected. Have the system checked at the
nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Emergency calls
An emergency call is initiated automatically:
앫
Following an accident in which the
emergency tensioning devices (ETDs)
or airbags deploy
앫
If the anti-theft alarm or the tow-away
alarm stays on for more than
20 seconds. See anti-theft alarm system (컄 page 82) and tow-away alarm
(컄 page 84)
An emergency call can also be initiated
manually by opening the cover next to the
inside rear view mirror labeled SOS, then
briefly pressing the button located under
the cover. See below for instructions on
initiating an emergency call manually.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Once the emergency call is in progress, the
indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin
to flash. The message EMERGENCY CALL –
CONNECTING CALL appears in the multifunction display. When the connection is established, the message EMERGENCY CALL –
CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunction display. All information relevant to the
emergency, such as the location of the vehicle (determined by the GPS satellite location system), vehicle model, identification
number and color are generated.
A voice connection between the Response
Center and the occupants of the vehicle
will be established automatically soon after the emergency call has been initiated.
When a voice connection is established,
the audio system mutes and the message
TELE AID – EMERGENCY CALL ACTIVE appears in the multifunction display. The Response Center will attempt to determine
more precisely the nature of the accident
provided they can speak to an occupant of
the vehicle.
The Tele Aid system is available if:
앫
앫
it has been activated and is operational. Activation requires a subscription
for monitoring services, connection,
and cellular air time
the relevant cellular phone network
and GPS signals are available and pass
the information on to the response center
i
Location of the vehicle on a map is only
possible if the vehicle is able to receive
signals from the GPS satellite network
and pass the information on to the response center.
Warning!
G
If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is illuminated continuously and there was no
voice connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system could
not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available).
The message EMERGENCY CALL –
CALL FAILED appears in the multifunction
display for approximately 10 seconds.
Should this occur, assistance must be summoned by other means.
239
Controls in detail
Useful features
Initiating an emergency call manually
왘
Wait for a voice connection to the
Response Center.
왘
Close cover 1 after the emergency call
is concluded.
Warning!
1 SOS button
왘
Briefly press on the cover of the emergency call button with the
inscription SOS above the inside rear
view mirror.
The cover opens.
왘
Press SOS button 1 briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button 1 will
flash until the emergency call is concluded.
240
G
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehicle in a dangerous road location), please
do not wait for voice contact after you have
pressed the emergency button. Carefully
leave the vehicle and move to a safe location. The Response Center will automatically
contact local emergency officials with the
vehicle’s approximate location if they receive an automatic SOS signal and cannot
make voice contact with the vehicle occupants.
Roadside Assistance button •
Located below the center armrest cover is
the Roadside Assistance button •.
왘
Press and hold the button (for longer
than 2 seconds).
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will be initiated.
The button will flash while the call is in
progress. The message ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE – CONNECTING CALL will appear in the multifunction display.
When the connection is established, the
message ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE –
CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle
identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular
and GPS signals).
Controls in detail
Useful features
A voice connection between the Roadside
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants
of the vehicle will be established. When a
voice connection is established, the audio
system mutes and the message TELE AID
– ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE CALL ACTIVE appears in the multifunction display.
왘
Describe the nature of the need for assistance.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to
tow your vehicle to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such
as labor and/or towing, charges may apply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual for more information.
These programs are only available in the
USA:
앫
Sign and Drive services: Services such
as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or
the replacement of a flat tire with the
vehicle spare tire are obtainable.
앫
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics: This function permits the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher to
download malfunction codes and actual vehicle data.
i
The indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance button • remains illuminated in red for approx. 10 seconds
during the system self-check after turning the key in the starter switch to
position 2 (together with the SOS button and the Information button ¡).
See system self-check (컄 page 238)
when the indicator lamp does not light
up in red or stays on longer than approximately 10 seconds.
If the indicator lamp in the Roadside
Assistance button • is continuously illuminated and no voice connection
to the Response Center was established, the Tele Aid system could not
initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g.
the relevant cellular phone network is
not available). The message ROADSIDE
ASSISTANCE – CALL FAILED appears in
the multifunction display. Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated using
the ì button on the multifunction
steering wheel.
241
Controls in detail
Useful features
Information button ¡
The information button ¡ is located below the center armrest cover.
왘
Press and hold the button (for longer
than 2 seconds).
A call to the Customer Assistance Center will be initiated. The button will
flash while the call is in progress. The
message INFO – CONNECTING CALL will
appear in the multifunction display.
When the connection is established, the
message INFO – CALL CONNECTED appears
in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid
system will transmit data generating the
vehicle identification number, model, color
and location (subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals).
A voice connection between the Customer
Assistance Center representative and the
occupants of the vehicle will be established. When a voice connection is established, the audio system mutes and the
message TELE AID – INFO CALL ACTIVE
appears in the multifunction display. Infor-
242
mation regarding the operation of your vehicle, the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center
or Mercedes-Benz USA products and services is available to you.
For more details concerning the Tele Aid
system, please visit www.mbusa.com and
use your ID and password (sent to you separately) to learn more (USA only).
i
The indicator lamp in the Information
button ¡ remains illuminated in red
for approx. 10 seconds during the system self-check after turning the
SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 2 (together with the SOS button and the Roadside Assistance
button •).
See System self-check (컄 page 238)
when the indicator lamp does not light
up in red or stays on longer than approximately 10 seconds.
If the indicator lamp in the Information
button ¡ is continuously illuminated and no voice connection was established to the Response Center, then the
Tele Aid system could not initiate an Information call (e.g. the relevant cellular
phone network is not available). The
message INFO – CALL FAILED appears
in the multifunction display.
Information calls can be terminated using the ì button on the multifunction steering wheel.
!
If the indicator lamps do not start flashing after pressing one of the buttons or
remain illuminated (in red) at any time,
the Tele Aid system has detected a
fault or the service is not currently active, and may not initiate a call. Visit
your Mercedes-Benz Center and have
the system checked or contact the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in
the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon as possible.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Upgrade Signals
!
i
The Tele Aid system processes calls using
the following priority:
If the indicator lamp continues to flash
or the system does not reset, contact
the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in
Canada.
When a Tele Aid call has been initiated,
the audio system or the COMAND system audio is muted and the selected
mode (radio, tape or CD) pauses. The
optional cellular phone (if installed)
switches off. If you must use this
phone, the vehicle must be parked. Disconnect the coiled cord and place the
call. The COMAND navigation system
(if engaged) will continue to run. The
display in the instrument cluster is
available for use and spoken commands are only available by pressing
the RPT button on the COMAND unit. A
pop-up window will appear in the COMAND display to indicate that a
Tele Aid call is in progress.
앫
Automatic emergency – First priority
앫
Manual emergency – Second priority
앫
Roadside Assistance – Third priority
앫
Information – Fourth priority
Should a higher priority call be initiated
while you are connected, an upgrade (alternating) tone will be heard, and the appropriate indicator lamp will flash. If
certain information such as vehicle identification number or customer information is
not available, the operator may need to retransmit.
During this time you will hear a beep and
voice contact will be interrupted. Voice
contact will resume once the retransmission is completed. Once a call is concluded, a beep will be heard and the
appropriate indicator lamp will stop flashing. The COMAND system operation will
resume.
i
The indicator lamp in the respective
button flashes until the call is concluded. Calls can only be terminated by a
Response Center or Customer Assistance Center representative except
Roadside Assistance and Information
calls, which can also be terminated by
pressing button ì on the multifunction steering wheel.
243
Controls in detail
Useful features
Remote door unlock
In case you have locked your vehicle unintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),
and the spare key is not handy:
왘
왘
The Response Center will then unlock your
vehicle with the remote door unlocking
feature.
i
Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
The remote door unlock feature is available if the relevant cellular phone network is available.
You will be asked to provide your password which you provided when you
completed the subscriber agreement.
The SOS button will flash and the message EMERGENCY CALL –
CALL CONNECTED will appear in the multifunction display to indicate receipt of
the door unlock command.
Then return to your vehicle and pull the
trunk recessed handle for a minimum
of 20 seconds until the SOS button is
flashing.
The message EMERGENCY CALL –
CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunction display.
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle via Internet using the ID and password
sent to you shortly after the completion of
your acquaintance call.
244
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response Center specialist will attempt
to establish voice contact with the vehicle occupants.
If the trunk recessed handle was pulled
for more than 20 seconds before door
unlock authorization was received by
the Response Center, you must wait
15 minutes before pulling the trunk recessed handle again.
Stolen vehicle tracking services
In the event your vehicle was stolen:
왘
Report the incident to the police.
The police will issue a numbered incident report.
왘
Pass this number on to the
Mercedes-Benz Response Center along
with your password issued to you when
you subscribed to the service.
The Response Center will then attempt
to covertly contact the vehicle’s
Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is located, the Response Center will contact the local law enforcement and you.
The vehicle’s location will only be provided to law enforcement.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Garage door opener
The built-in remote control is capable of
operating up to three separately controlled
objects.
Warning!
G
When programming a garage door opener,
the door moves up or down.
When programming or operating the remote
control, make sure there is no possibility of
anyone being injured by the moving door.
i
1
Indicator lamp
2, 3, 4
Signal transmitter key
5
Hand-held remote control transmitter (not part of vehicle equipment)
Certain types of garage door openers
are incompatible with the integrated
opener. If you should experience difficulties with programming the transmitter, contact your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, or call
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA only) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer
Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
i
For operation in the USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
245
Controls in detail
Useful features
Programming or reprogramming the integrated remote control
왘
Turn SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2.
왘
Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter of the device you wish to train
approximately 2 to 5 inches (5 cm to
12 cm) away from the surface of the integrated remote control located on the
inside rear view mirror, keeping the indicator lamp in view.
왘
Using both hands, simultaneously push
the hand-held transmitter button and
the desired integrated remote control
button. Do not release the buttons until
completing next step.
The indicator lamp on the integrated remote control will flash, first slowly and
then rapidly. The rapid flashing lamp indicates successful programming of the new
frequency signal.
왘
When the indicator lamp flashes rapidly, release both buttons.
246
왘
Exact location and color of the button
may vary by garage door opener brand.
If there is difficulty locating the transmitting button, refer to garage door
opener operator’s manual.
To program the remaining two buttons,
repeat the above steps.
i
If, after several attempts, you do not
successfully program the integrated remote control device to learn the signal
of the hand-held transmitter, the garage door opener could be equipped
with the “rolling code feature.”
Rolling code programming
To train a garage door opener (or other rolling code devices) with the rolling code feature, follow these instructions after
completing the “Programming” portion of
this text. (A second person may make the
following training procedures quicker and
easier.)
왘
Locate training button on the garage
door opener motor head unit.
왘
Press “training” button on the garage
door opener motor head unit.
The “training light” is activated.
You have 30 seconds to initiate the following step.
왘
Firmly press and release the programmed integrated remote control
transmit button.
왘
Press and release same button a second time to complete the training process.
Some garage door openers may require
you to do this procedure a third time to
complete the training.
왘
Confirm the garage door operation by
pressing the programmed button on
the integrated remote control transmitter.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Canadian programming
Operating the remote control
During programming, your hand-held
transmitter may automatically stop transmitting.
왘
Turn SmartKey in starter switch to
position 1 or 2.
왘
Turn SmartKey in starter switch to
position 1 or 2.
왘
Select and press the appropriate button to activate the remote controlled
device.
왘
Simultaneously hold down the left and
right side buttons for approximately
20 seconds, or until the indicator lamp
blinks rapidly.
왘
Continue to press and hold the integrated remote control transmitter button (refer to steps two through four in
the “Programming” portion) while you
press and re-press (“cycle”) your
hand-held transmitter every two seconds until the frequency signal has
been learned.
Upon successful training, the indicator
lamp will flash slowly and then rapidly
after several seconds.
The integrated remote control transmitter continues to send the signal as
long as the button is pressed – up to
20 seconds.
Erasing the remote control memory
The codes of all three channels are
erased.
i
If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes
of all three channels.
247
Controls in detail
Useful features
Infrared reflecting windshield
Your vehicle is equipped with infrared reflecting glass which reduces the amount of
radiated heat entering the interior through
the windows.
The infrared reflecting glass also prevents
the transmission of signals through the
glass by in-vehicle electronic devices (e.g.
electronic toll collection devices).
1 Mounting location for electronic toll
collection devices (infrared transparent)
2 Infrared transparent area
(pass-through for electronic signals)
3 31.5 in (80 cm)
4 19.0 in (48 cm)
5 1.75 in (4.5 cm)
248
To allow the use of these devices in the vehicle, two infrared transparent areas
(1 and 2) are placed in the windshield.
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care
249
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
In the “Operation” section you will find detailed information on operating, maintaining and caring for your vehicle.
The more cautiously you treat your vehicle
during the break-in period, the more satisfied you will be with its performance later
on.
앫
Drive your vehicle during the first
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
앫
During this period, avoid heavy loads
(full throttle driving) and excessive engine speeds (no more than 2⁄3 of maximum rpm in each gear).
앫
Avoid accelerating by kick-down.
앫
Do not attempt to slow the vehicle
down by shifting to a lower gear using
the selector lever.
앫
Select positions 3, 2 or 1 only when
driving at moderate speeds (for hill
driving).
After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may
gradually increase vehicle and engine
speeds to the permissible maximum.
250
!
Additional instructions for AMG vehicles:
앫
During the first 1000 miles
(1500 km) do not exceed a speed
of 85 mph (140 km/h).
앫
During this period, avoid engine
speeds above 4500 rpm in each
gear.
All of the above instructions, as may apply
to your vehicle type, also apply when driving the first 1000 miles (1500 km) after
the engine or the rear differential has been
replaced.
!
Always obey applicable speed limits.
Operation
Driving instructions
Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuel
Fuel consumption, to a great extent, depends on driving habits and operating conditions.
To save fuel you should:
앫
Keep tires at the recommended inflation pressures.
앫
Remove unnecessary loads.
앫
Remove roof rack when not in use.
앫
Allow engine to warm up under low
load use.
앫
Avoid frequent acceleration and deceleration.
앫
Have all maintenance work performed
at regular intervals by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Drinking and driving
Warning!
Pedals
G
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs
and driving are a very dangerous combination. Even a small amount of alcohol or
drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions,
and judgement.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident is sharply increased when you drink
or take drugs and drive.
Please don’t drink or take drugs and drive or
allow anyone to drive after drinking or taking
drugs.
Warning!
G
Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times. Objects stored in this area may impair pedal
movement.
Power assistance
Warning!
G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.
Fuel consumption is also increased by driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic,
on short trips, and in hilly country.
251
Operation
Driving instructions
Brakes
Warning!
G
After driving in heavy rain for some time
without applying the brakes or through water deep enough to wet brake components,
the first braking action may be somewhat
reduced and increased pedal pressure may
be necessary to obtain expected braking effect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles
in front.
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after
driving on wet road surfaces (particularly
salted roads), it is advisable to brake the
vehicle with considerable force prior to
parking. The heat generated serves to dry
the brakes.
If your brake system is normally only subjected to moderate loads, you should occasionally test the effectiveness of the
brakes by applying above-normal braking
pressure at higher speeds. This will also
enhance the grip of the brake pads.
If the parking brake is released and the
brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster stays on, the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low.
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
be the reason for low brake fluid in the reservoir.
Have the brake system inspected at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will
cause excessive and premature wear of the
brake pads.
!
All checks and service work on the brake
system should be carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Be very careful not to endanger other
road users when you apply the brakes.
It can also result in the brakes overheating,
thereby significantly reducing their effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop the
vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an accident.
Install only brake pads and brake fluid recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
Refer to the description of the Brake
Assist System (BAS) (컄 page 78).
252
Operation
Driving instructions
Warning!
G
If other than recommended brake pads are
installed, or other than recommended brake
fluid is used, the braking properties of the
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
safe braking is substantially impaired. This
could result in an accident.
!
When driving down long and steep
grades, relieve the load on the brakes
by shifting into a lower gear to use the
engine’s braking power. This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and reduces brake pad wear.
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive
on for some time, rather than immediately
parking, so that the air stream can cool
down the brakes faster.
Driving off
Apply the brakes to test them briefly after
driving off. Perform this procedure only
when the road is clear of other traffic.
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not
place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached.
When starting off on a slippery surface, do
not allow one drive wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP switched off.
Doing so may cause serious damage to the
drive train which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Parking
!
Set the parking brake whenever parking or leaving the vehicle. In addition,
move selector lever to position P. In addition, when parking on hills, always
turn front wheels towards the road
curb.
!
Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes
premature brake and drivetrain wear.
253
Operation
Driving instructions
Warning!
G
Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of vehicle movement, before turning off
the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
앫
Keep right foot on brake pedal.
앫
Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
앫
Move the selector lever to position P.
앫
Slowly release brake pedal.
앫
When parked on an incline, turn front
wheel towards the road curb.
앫
Turn the SmartKey to starter switch
position 0 and remove, or press
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*).
앫
Take the SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO*
card (if so equipped) with you and lock
vehicle when leaving.
254
The tread wear indicator appears as a solid
band across the tread.
Tires
Warning!
G
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to your vehicle has occurred,
you should turn on the hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from
the road.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Center or tire dealer for repairs.
Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approximately 1⁄16 in (1.5 mm), at which point the
tire is considered worn and should be replaced.
Warning!
G
Do not allow your tires to wear down too far.
As tread depth approaches 1⁄16 in (1.5 mm),
the adhesion properties on a wet road are
sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
Specified tire pressures must be maintained. This applies particularly if the tires
are subjected to high loads (e.g. high
speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temperatures).
Operation
Driving instructions
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire or driving at high
speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Tire traction
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or
icy road is always lower than on a dry road.
You should pay particular attention to the
condition of the road whenever the outside
temperatures are close to the freezing
point.
G
Hydroplaning
Warning!
Depending on the depth of the water layer
on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even
at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce
vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the
road and apply brakes cautiously in the
rain.
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
will be substantially reduced. Under such
weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
with extreme caution.
Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated
radial-ply tires for the winter season for all
four wheels to insure normal balanced
handling characteristics. On packed snow,
they can reduce your stopping distance
compared to summer tires. Stopping distance, however, is still considerably
greater than when the road is not covered
with snow or ice. Exercise appropriate caution.
Tire speed rating
Regardless of the tire rating, local speed
limits should be obeyed. Use prudent driving speeds appropriate to prevailing conditions.
Warning!
G
Even when permitted by law, never operate
a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or serious
injury and possible death, for you and for
others.
255
Operation
Driving instructions
S 430, S 430 4MATIC, S 500, and
S 500 4MATIC
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“H”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 130 mph (210 km/h).
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
130 mph (210 km/h).
S 430, S 430 4MATIC, S 500,
S 500 4MATIC, and S 600 with
Sport Package*
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“Y”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 188 mph (300 km/h).
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
130 mph (210 km/h).
S 600
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“Y”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 188 mph (300 km/h).
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
130 mph (210 km/h).
S 55 AMG
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“Y”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 188 mph (300 km/h).
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
155 mph (250 km/h).
i
For information on speed rating for winter tires see “Winter tires”
(컄 page 278).
256
Winter driving instructions
The most important rule for slippery or icy
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
system under such conditions.
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding,
move selector lever to position N. Try to
keep the vehicle under control by corrective steering action.
i
For information on driving with snow
chains see “Snow chains”
(컄 page 279).
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of control loss.
Operation
Driving instructions
Road salts and chemicals can adversely affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
force may become necessary to produce
the normal braking effect.
We therefore recommend depressing the
brake pedal periodically when traveling at
length on salt-strewn roads.
This can bring road salt impaired braking
efficiency back to normal. Be very careful
that you carry out these braking maneuvers without endangering any other road
users.
If the vehicle is parked after being driven
on salt treated roads, the braking efficiency should be tested as soon as possible after driving is resumed while observing the
safety rules in the previous paragraph.
Warning!
G
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust
pipe and from around the vehicle with the
engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and
death.
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,
open a window slightly on the side of the vehicle not facing the wind.
Warning!
G
The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road
surface is free of ice.
Standing water
!
Do not drive through flooded areas or
water of unknown depth.
If you must drive through standing water, drive slowly to prevent water from
entering the passenger compartment
or the engine compartment. Water in
these areas could cause damage to
electrical components or wiring of the
engine or transmission, or could result
in water being ingested by the engine
through the air intake causing severe
internal engine damage. Any such damage is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
For more information, see “Winter driving”
(컄 page 278).
257
Operation
Driving instructions
Control and operation of radio transmitters
Passenger compartment
Warning!
G
Warning!
COMAND*, radio, and telephone*
Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible.
Warning!
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of approximately
44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every second.
Driving abroad
258
G
Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle safely.
Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System), radio, or telephone1 if road, weather and traffic
conditions permit.
The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects.
Abroad, there is a widely-spread
Mercedes-Benz service network at your
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas
which are not listed in the index of your
Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you
should request pertinent information from
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Telephones and two-way radios
1
Observe all legal requirements.
G
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury.
Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna.
Operation
Driving instructions
Catalytic converter
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with
monolithic type catalytic converters, an
important element in conjunction with the
oxygen sensors to achieve substantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper
operating condition by following our recommended maintenance instructions as
outlined in your Service Booklet.
!
To prevent damage to the catalytic converters, use only premium unleaded
gasoline in this vehicle.
Any noticeable irregularities in engine
operation should be repaired promptly.
Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel
may reach the catalytic converter,
causing it to overheat and start a fire.
Warning!
G
As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves
can come into contact with the hot exhaust
system, as these materials could be ignited
and cause a vehicle fire.
Emission control
Certain systems of the engine serve to
keep the toxic components of the exhaust
gases within permissible limits required by
law.
These systems, of course, will function
properly only when maintained strictly according to factory specifications. Any adjustments on the engine should, therefore,
be carried out only by qualified
Mercedes-Benz Center authorized technicians.
Engine adjustments should not be altered
in any way. Moreover, the specified service
jobs must be carried out regularly according to Mercedes-Benz servicing requirements. For details refer to the Service
Booklet.
259
Operation
Driving instructions
Warning!
G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and lead to death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with at least one window fully open at all times.
260
Coolant temperature
During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to approximately
248°F (120°C).
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature over 248°F
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Warning!
G
앫
Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids, which
may have leaked into the engine compartment, to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
앫
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns and can occur just
by opening the engine hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until it
cools down.
Operation
At the gas station
At the gas station
Warning!
G
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
It burns violently and can cause serious injury. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
inhaling fumes and skin contact, extinguish
all smoking materials. Never allow sparks,
flame or smoking materials near gasoline!
The fuel filler flap is located on the
right-hand side of the vehicle towards the
rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with
the remote control or the KEYLESS-GO*
card automatically locks/unlocks the fuel
filler flap.
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
왘
Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at
the point indicated by the arrow.
The fuel filler flap springs open.
Turn the fuel cap to the left and hold on
to it until possible pressure is released.
왘
Take off the cap and set it in the recess
on the fuel filler flap.
To prevent fuel vapors from escaping
into open air, fully insert filler nozzle
unit.
Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle
unit cuts out – do not top up or overfill.
Warning!
G
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pressure in the system which could cause a gas
discharge. This could cause the gas to spray
back out when removing the fuel pump nozzle, which could cause personal injury.
Replace the fuel cap by turning it to the
right.
You will hear when the fuel cap is tightened.
왘
왘
왘
왘
Close the fuel filler flap.
i
S 600: Use only premium unleaded
gasoline with a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 93 (average of
98 RON/88 MON).
S 430, S 500 and S 55 AMG: Use only
premium unleaded gasoline with a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON).
Information on gasoline quality can
normally be found on the fuel pump.
More information on gasoline can be
found in the Factory Approved Service
Products pamphlet.
261
Operation
At the gas station
i
Check regularly and before a long trip
Engine oil level
Leaving the engine running and the fuel
cap open can cause the ? lamp to
illuminate.
More information on engine oil can be
found in the “Operation” section on
(컄 page 264).
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 289).
Opening hood see (컄 page 263).
Vehicle lighting
1 Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system
More information on refilling the reservoir can be found in the “Operation”
section on (컄 page 271).
2 Coolant level
More information on coolant can be
found in the “Operation” section on
(컄 page 268).
3 Brake fluid
More information on brake fluid can be
found in the “Technical data” section
on (컄 page 373).
262
Check function and cleanliness.More information on replacing light bulbs can be
found in the “Practical hints” section
(컄 page 331).
Exterior lamp switch see “Switching on
headlamps” (컄 page 46).
Tire inflation pressure
More information on tire inflation pressure
can be found in the “Operation” section
(컄 page 273).
Operation
Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Hood
Warning!
왘
G
Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could
be forced open by passing air flow.
Opening
Pull lever 1 towards you in the direction
of the arrow.
왘
Pull handle 2 to its stop out of radiator
grill.
The hood is unlocked and handle 2 will
extend out of the radiator grill.
왘
Pull up on the hood (do not pull up on
the handle) and then release it.
!
To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or hood, never open the hood if the
wiper arms are folded forward away
from the windshield.
The hood lock release lever is located in
the driver’s footwell to the left of the parking brake pedal.
The hood will be automatically held
open at shoulder height by gas-filled
struts.
Warning!
G
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running. Make sure the hood is
properly closed before driving. When closing
the hood, use extreme caution not to catch
hands or fingers.
The radiator fan may continue to run for approximately 30 seconds or even restart after the engine has been turned off. Stay
clear of fan blades.
2 Handle for opening the hood
1 Hood lock release
263
Operation
Engine compartment
Warning!
G
If you see flames or smoke coming from the
engine compartment, or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the engine is
overheated, do not open the hood. Move
away from vehicle and do not open the hood
until the engine has cooled. If necessary,
call the fire department.
Warning!
G
The engine is equipped with a transistorized
ignition system. Because of the high voltage
it is dangerous to touch any components (ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic
socket) of the ignition system
앫
with the engine running
앫
while starting the engine
앫
if ignition is “on” and the engine is
cranked manually
264
Closing
Warning!
Engine oil
G
Be careful that you do not close the hood on
anyone.
왘
왘
The amount of oil your engine needs will
depend on a number of factors, including
driving style. Higher oil consumption can
occur when
앫
the vehicle is new
Let the hood drop from a height of approximately 1 ft. (30 cm).
앫
the vehicle is driven frequently at higher engine speeds
The hood will lock audibly.
Engine oil consumption checks should only
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
Check to make sure that the hood is
fully closed.
If you can raise the hood at a point
above the headlamps, then it is not
properly closed. Open it again and let it
drop with somewhat greater force.
Checking engine oil level
When checking the oil level the vehicle
must:
앫
be parked on level ground
앫
be at normal operating temperature
앫
have been stationary for at least five
minutes with the engine turned off
Operation
Engine compartment
Checking the engine oil level with the
control system
One of the following messages will subsequently appear in the indicator:
You can check the engine oil level on the
multifunction display.
앫
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
OK
앫
ADD 1.0 QT. TO
REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL!
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 2.
The standard display (컄 page 135) should
appear in the multifunction display.
왘
(Canada: 1.0 LITER)
앫
Press buttonk or j on the
steering wheel until the following message is seen in the multifunction display:
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
MEASURING NOW!
MEASURE. CORRECT
ONLY IF VEH. LEVEL
ADD 1.5 QTS. TO
REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL!
(Canada: 1.5 LITERS)
앫
ADD 2.0 QTS.
TO REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL!
(Canada: 2.0 LITERS)
왘
If necessary, add engine oil.
For adding oil see (컄 page 267).
Other display messages
If the SmartKey is not turned to position 2
in the starter switch, the following message will appear:
FOR ENGINE OIL LEVEL
SWITCH ON IGNITION!
왘
Switch on the ignition.
If you see the message:
OBSERVE WAITING PERIOD
왘
Wait five minutes before repeating
check procedure.
If you see the message:
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
NOT WHEN ENGINE ON!
왘
Turn off the engine. If engine is at normal operating temperature, wait five
minutes before checking oil. If the engine is not yet at normal operating temperature, you must wait 30 minutes
before checking oil.
265
Operation
Engine compartment
If there is excessive engine oil with the engine at normal operating temperature, the
following message will appear:
Checking the engine oil level with the
oil dipstick (except S 430 4MATIC,
S 500 4MATIC, and S 600)
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
REDUCE OIL LEVEL!
The engine oil level can be checked by either oil dipstick 1 or via the multifunction
display in the instrument cluster
(컄 page 265). The amount of engine oil
needed is shown more precisely on the operating system display.
왘
Have excess oil siphoned.
i
If you want to interrupt the checking
procedure, press the k or j button on the multifunction steering
wheel.
Fully insert oil dipstick 1 into the dipstick guide tube, and remove after approximately three seconds to obtain
accurate reading.
The oil level is acceptable when it
leaves a line between the upper and
lower marks of oil dipstick 1.
i
The filling quantity between the upper
and lower marks on the oil dipstick is
approximately 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l).
For adding oil see (컄 page 267).
See “Practical hints” (컄 page 289) if the
engine oil level indicator lights up in the
display while the engine is running.
See “Practical hints” (컄 page 289) if the
engine oil level indicator lights up in the
display while the engine is running.
More information on engine oil can be
found in “Technical data” (컄 page 357).
1 Oil dipstick
266
왘
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 263).
왘
Pull out oil dipstick 1 (컄 page 267).
왘
Wipe oil dipstick 1 clean.
Operation
Engine compartment
Adding engine oil
!
Excessive oil must be siphoned or
drained off. It could cause damage to
the engine and catalytic converter not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
왘
S 430, S 500, S 55 AMG
1 Oil dipstick
2 Filler neck
Screw the cap back on the filler neck.
S 600
1 Filler cap
왘
Unscrew the cap 1 from filler neck.
왘
Add engine oil as required. Be careful
not to overfill with oil.
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
entering the ground or water.
267
Operation
Engine compartment
Transmission fluid level
Coolant
The transmission fluid level does not need
to be checked. If you notice transmission
fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions,
have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
check the automatic transmission.
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check
the coolant level, the vehicle must be
parked on level ground and the engine
must be cool.
Warning!
In order to avoid any possibly serious burns:
앫
Use extreme caution when opening the
hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system,
or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the coolant is overheated.
앫
Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if engine temperature is above
194°F (90°C). Allow engine to cool
down before removing cap. The coolant
reservoir contains hot fluid and is under
pressure.
앫
Using a rag, slowly open the cap approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess pressure. If opened immediately, scalding
hot fluid and steam will be blown out under pressure.
앫
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts.
Active Body Control* (ABC*) fluid level
Regular fluid level check is not required. If
you notice fluid leaks or malfunction messages in the multifunction display, have an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center check
the ABC-system.
268
G
Operation
Engine compartment
The coolant expansion tank is located on
the passenger side of the engine compartment.
The coolant level is correct if the level
앫
for cold coolant: reaches the black top
part of the reservoir
앫
for warm coolant: is approximately
0.6 in. (1.5 cm) higher
왘
Add coolant as required.
왘
Replace and tighten cap.
More information on coolant can be found
in the “Technical data” section
(컄 page 357).
1 Coolant expansion tank
왘
Using a rag, turn the cap slowly approximately one half turn to the left to release any excess pressure.
왘
Continue turning the cap to the left and
remove it.
269
Operation
Engine compartment
Battery
Your vehicle’s battery is located on the
right side of the trunk floor (컄 page 344).
The battery should always be sufficiently
charged in order to achieve its rated service life. Refer to Service Booklet for battery maintenance intervals.
If you use your vehicle mostly for short distance trips, you will need to have the battery charge checked more frequently.
When replacing the battery, always use
batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
for an extended period of time, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
steps you need to observe.
270
all safety instructions
and precautions when handling
G Observe
E
automotive batteries.
C
A Risk of explosion
flames or sparks away
F
from battery. Do not smoke.
D Keep
B
Battery acid is caustic. Do not
allow it to come into contact
with skin, eyes or clothing.
In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with clear
water and seek medical help if
necessary.
Wear eye protection.
Keep children away.
Follow the instructions in this
Operator's Manual.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
Operation
Engine compartment
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system*
Fluid for the windshield washer system and
the headlamp cleaning system is supplied
from the windshield washer reservoir. It
has a capacity of approx. 7.1 US qt. (6.7 l).
During all seasons, add MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “S” to water. Premix
the windshield washer fluid in a suitable
container.
왘
Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate and water (or
commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures).
The windshield washer system on this vehicle is heated, so a fluid mixture produced
for temperatures of approximately 14°F
(–10°C) should be sufficient.
Warning!
G
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer
solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may ignite. You could be seriously
burned.
More information can be found in the
“Technical data” section (컄 page 357).
1 Washer fluid reservoir
!
Only use washer fluid which is suitable
for plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can damage the plastic lenses of the
headlamps.
Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
where temperatures may fall below
freezing. Failure to do so could result in
damage to the washer system/reservoir.
271
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tires and wheels
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information on tested and recommended rims and tires for summer and
winter operation. They can also offer advice concerning tire service and purchase.
Warning!
G
Replace rims or tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on the
original part. See your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for further information. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are
mounted:
앫
The wheel brakes or suspension components can be damaged.
앫
The correct operating clearance of the
wheels and the tires are no longer guaranteed.
272
Warning!
G
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them.
When replacing rims, use only genuine
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
particular rim type. Failure to do so can result in the bolts loosening and possibly an
accident.
Retreaded tires are not tested or recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous
damage cannot always be recognized on
retreads. Mercedes-Benz can therefore
not assure the operating safety of the vehicle when such tires are used.
Important guidelines
앫
Use only sets of tires and rims of the
same type and make.
앫
Tires must be of the correct size for the
rim.
앫
Break in new tires for approximately
60 miles (100 km) at moderate
speeds.
앫
Regularly check the tires and rims for
damage.
앫
If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
pressure and correct as required.
앫
Do not allow your tires to wear down
too far. Adhesion properties on wet
roads are sharply reduced at tread
depths under 1/8 in (3 mm).
앫
When replacing individual tires, you
should mount new tires on the front
wheels first (on vehicles with
same-sized wheels all around).
Operation
Tires and wheels
Life of tires
Direction of rotation
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including but not limited to:
Unidirectional tires offer added advantages, such as better hydroplaning performance. To benefit, however, you must
ensure that the tires rotate in the direction
specified.
앫
driving style
앫
tire pressure
앫
distance driven
Warning!
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the intended direction of tire rotation.
G
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
six years, regardless of the remaining tread.
!
Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry
place with as little exposure to light as
possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease and gasoline.
Checking tire inflation pressure
Warning!
G
If the tire pressure repeatedly drops:
앫
Check the tires for punctures from
foreign objects.
앫
Check to see whether air is leaking from
the valves or from around the rim.
Correct the tire pressure only when tires
are cold.
Regularly check your tire pressure at intervals of no more than 14 days.
If the tires are warm, you should only correct the tire pressure if it is too low for current operating conditions.
A table on the fuel filler flap lists the specified tire inflation pressures for warm and
cold tires as well as for various operating
conditions.
273
Operation
Tires and wheels
i
The pressures listed for light loads are
minimum values offering high driving
comfort.
Increased inflation pressures listed for
heavier loads may also be used for light
loads. These higher pressures produce
favorable handling characteristics. The
ride of the vehicle, however, will be
somewhat harder. Never exceed the
max. values or inflate tires below the
min. values listed on the fuel filler flap.
Tire pressure changes by approximately
1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of air
temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure where the
temperature is different from the outside
temperature.
Tire temperature and tire pressure also increase while driving, depending on the
driving speed and the tire load.
274
Warning!
G
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires
can result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes
etc.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear unevenly, adversely affect handling
and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
from being overheated.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified vehicle capacity weight (as indicated by the label on the pillar in the driver’s
door opening). Overloading the tires can
overheat them, possibly causing a blowout.
Check the spare tire periodically for condition and inflation pressure. Spare tires will
age and become worn over time even if
never used, and thus should be inspected
and replaced when necessary or after a
maximum of six years.
Checking tire pressure electronically*
The tire inflation pressure monitor only
functions on wheels that are equipped with
the proper electronic sensors. It monitors
the tire inflation pressure, as selected by
the driver, in all four tires. A warning is issued to alert you to a decrease in pressure
in one or more of the tires.
Tire pressure inquiries are made using the
multifunction display (컄 page 130). The inflation pressures are displayed only after a
few minutes travel time.
You can select the unit of measure used for
the tire inflation pressure by changing the
setting in the control system (컄 page 130).
Operation
Tires and wheels
i
Possible differences between the readings of a tire pressure gauge of an air
hose, e.g. gas station equipment, and
the vehicle’s control system can occur.
The readings issued by the control system are more precise.
왘
Switch on ignition.
왘
Press button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the standard display menu appears in the multifunction display
(컄 page 130).
왘
Press button k or j repeatedly
until you see the current inflation pressures for each tire appear in the display.
Warning!
G
The tire inflation pressure monitor does not
indicate a warning for wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always adjust tire inflation
pressure according to the label on the fuel
filler flap.
The tire inflation pressure monitor is not
able to issue a warning due to a sudden loss
of pressure (e.g. tire puncture caused by a
foreign object). In the event of a sudden loss
of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by
carefully applying the brakes and avoiding
abrupt steering maneuvers.
i
Operating radio transmission equipment (e.g. wireless headsets, two-way
radios) in or near the vehicle could
cause the tire inflation pressure monitor to malfunction.
Warning!
G
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires
can result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes
etc.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear unevenly, adversely affect handling
and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
from being overheated.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified vehicle capacity weight (as indicated by the label on the pillar in the driver’s
door opening). Overloading the tires can
overheat them, possibly causing a blowout.
275
Operation
Tires and wheels
Activating the tire inflation pressure
monitor
You must activate the tire inflation pressure monitor in the following cases:
앫
If you have changed the tire pressure
앫
If you have replaced the wheels or tires
앫
If you have installed new wheels or
tires
왘
Make sure that the tire pressure is correctly set.
왘
Press button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the standard display menu appear
in the in the multifunction display
(컄 page 135).
276
왘
Press the j or k button repeatedly until you see the current inflation
pressures for each tire appear in the
display
or the following message appears in
the display
TIRE PRES. MONITOR
PRES. DISPLAY AFTER DRIVING A FEW
MINS. REACTIVATE USING R BUTTON
i
If transporting a deflated road wheel or
additional wheel sensors in the vehicle,
the tire inflation pressure monitor
should not be reactivated until the deflated wheel or additional wheel sensors have been removed from the
vehicle. Otherwise, the deflated wheel
or additional sensors could cause the
tire inflation pressure monitor system
to malfunction.
왘
Press the reset button J(컄 page 22).
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
CHECK CURRENT TIRE PRES.?
왘
Press the æ button.
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display field:
TIRE PRES. MONITOR ACTIVATED
The tire inflation pressure monitor will
now monitor the tire inflation pressure
values of all four tires.
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display field:
TIRE PRES. MONITOR
PRES. DISPLAY AFTER DRIVING A FEW
MINS. REACTIVATE USING R BUTTON
This display appears until the individual
inflation pressure values are matched
with the tires. The individual values are
then displayed (컄 page 274).
Operation
Tires and wheels
If you wish to cancel activation:
왘
Rotating wheels
!
Press the ç button.
G
If the following message appears in the
multifunction display field:
Warning!
REACTIVATE TIRE
PRES. MONITOR
Rotate front and rear wheels only if they are
of the same size.
or
TIRE PRES.
CHECK TIRES!
왘
Check the tire inflation pressures and
correct them if necessary.
왘
Reactivate the tire inflation pressure
monitor.
On vehicles with the same wheel size all
around, wheels can be rotated every 3000
to 6000 miles (5000 to 10000 km), or
sooner if necessary, according to the degree of tire wear. The same direction of tire
rotation must be retained.
Rotate the wheels before the characteristic tire wear pattern becomes visible
(shoulder wear on front wheels and tread
center wear on rear wheels).
Thoroughly clean the inner side of the
wheels after each rotation. Check and ensure proper tire inflation pressure. If necessary, activate the tire inflation pressure
monitor*.
If your vehicle is equipped with a tire inflation pressure monitor*, there are
electronic components built into the
wheel.
Do not use mounting tools in the area
of the valve as they could damage the
electronic components.
To prevent damage or incorrect installation, have the tires changed at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
G
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. Wheels could become
loose if not tightened with a torque of
110 ft.lb. (150 Nm).
Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
bolts specified for your vehicle's rims.
277
Operation
Winter driving
Winter driving
Before the onset of winter have your vehicle winterized at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. This service includes:
앫
Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze
concentration.
앫
Addition of cleaning concentrate to the
water of the windshield and headlamp
cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate
“S” to a premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze which is formulated
for temperatures below freezing point
(컄 page 376).
앫
Battery test. Battery capacity drops
with decreasing ambient temperature.
A well charged battery helps to ensure
that the engine can be started even at
low ambient temperatures.
앫
Tire change. We recommend M+S rated radial-ply tires on all four wheels for
the winter season.
278
Winter tires
Always use winter tires at temperatures
below 39°F (4°C) and whenever wintry
road conditions prevail. Use of winter tires
is the only way to achieve the maximum effectiveness of the ABS, ESP, and 4MATIC
in winter operation.
For safe handling, ensure that all mounted
winter tires are of the same make and have
the same tread design.
Warning!
G
Winter tires with a tread depth of less than
0.16 in. (4 mm) must be replaced. They are
no longer suitable for winter operation.
Always observe the speed rating of the
winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
maximum speed for which your tires are
rated is below the speed rating of your vehicle, you must place a notice to this effect
where it will be seen by the driver. Such notices are available from your tire dealer or
from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Warning!
G
If you use your spare tire when winter tires
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
the difference in tire characteristics may
very well impair turning stability and that
overall driving stability may be reduced.
Adapt your driving style accordingly.
Have the spare tire replaced with a winter
tire at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Operation
Winter driving
Block heater*
Snow chains
(Canada only)
The engine is equipped with a block heater.
When using snow chains, vehicles with
AIRMATIC should only be driven at raised
vehicle level (컄 page 212). Vehicles with
ABC* should only be driven at vehicle
height 1 (컄 page 215).
The electrical cable may be installed at
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Snow chains should only be driven on
snow-covered roads at speeds not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains
as soon as possible when driving on roads
without snow.
Please observe the following guidelines
when using snow chains:
앫
Using snow chains is not permissible
with all wheel/tire combinations.
앫
Chains should only be used on the rear
wheels. Follow the manufacturer's
mounting instructions.
앫
Use only snow chains that are approved by Mercedes-Benz. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to advise you on this subject.
i
!
When driving with snow chains, you
may wish to deactivate the
ESP (컄 page 80) before setting the vehicle in motion. This will improve the
vehicle‘s traction.
Even on vehicles with all-wheel drive,
use snow chains on rear tires only.
Do not use snow chains with tire sizes
245/45 R 18 on 8 1/2 x 18 rims and
265/40 R 18 in general (컄 page 364).
Do not use snow chains on tires mounted on AMG rims.
279
Operation
Maintenance
Maintenance
We strongly recommend that you have
your vehicle serviced by your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, in accordance with
the Service Booklet at the times called for
by the FSS (Flexible Service System).
Clearing the service indicator
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in
accordance with the Service Booklet at the
designated times/mileage called for by
the FSS may result in vehicle damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
왘
FSS will notify you when your next service
is due.
Approximately one month before your next
service is due, one of the following messages will appear in the multifunction display while you are driving or when you
switch on the ignition (example service A):
SERVICE
SERVICE
SERVICE
SERVICE
280
A
A
A
A
IN XXXXX MILES (KM)
IN XXX DAYS
IN X DAY
DUE NOW!
The service indicator is automatically
cleared after 30 seconds. You can also
clear it yourself.
The type of service due is indicated in the
multifunction display:
9
´
Minor service (A)
Major service (B)
i
The interval between services depends
on your driving habits. A gentle driving
style, moderate engine speeds and the
avoidance of short distance trips will
lengthen the interval between services.
Press the reset button J to the right in
the instrument cluster (컄 page 22).
Service term exceeded
If you have exceeded the suggested service term, you will see the following message in the multifunction display:
SERVICE A EXCEEDED BY XXXX MILES (KM)
SERVICE A EXCEEDED BY XXX DAYS
SERVICE A EXCEEDED BY X DAY
An acoustic signal will also sound.
The Mercedes-Benz Center will reset the
service indicator following a completed
service.
Operation
Maintenance
Calling up the service indicator
왘
Switch on ignition.
The standard display of the control system appears (컄 page 135).
왘
Press button k or j on the multifunction steering wheel until FSS indicator with the service symbol 9 or
´ and the service deadline appears
in the multifunction display.
Resetting the service indicator
In the event that the service on your vehicle is not carried out by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, you can reset the
service indicator yourself.
왘
The standard display of the control system appears (컄 page 135).
왘
Press button k or j on the multifunction steering wheel until the FSS
indicator with the service symbol 9
or ´ and the service deadline appears in the multifunction display.
왘
Press the reset button J(컄 page 22)
to the right in the instrument cluster for
about two seconds.
i
If the battery is disconnected, the days
of disconnection will not be included in
the count shown by the service indicator. To arrive at the true service deadline, you will need to subtract these
days from the days shown in the service indicator.
Do not confuse the service indicator
with the engine oil level indicator :.
Switch on ignition.
왘
To confirm, hold down the reset knob
until you hear a signal.
The service indicator now displays the
reset interval.
i
If the service indicator was inadvertently reset, have a Mercedes-Benz Center
correct it.
Only reset if the proper service has
been performed. Resetting the system
without performing proper service as
called for by the FSS will cause the FSS
to incorrectly determine the next service interval which will result in engine
damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
This message appears in the multifunction display:
SERVICE INTERVAL?
RESET WITH R BUTTON
281
Operation
Vehicle care
Vehicle care
To avoid paint damage, you should immediately remove:
Cleaning and care of vehicle
Warning!
G
Many cleaning products can be hazardous.
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
Always follow the instructions on the particular container. Always open your vehicle’s
doors or windows when cleaning the inside.
Never use fluids or solvents that are not designed for cleaning your vehicle.
In operation, even while parked, your vehicle is subjected to varying external influences which, if gone unchecked, can
attack the paintwork as well as the underbody and cause lasting damage.
Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying climatic conditions, but
also by:
앫
Air pollution
앫
Road salt
앫
Tar, gravel and stone chipping
282
앫
Grease and oil
앫
Fuel
앫
Coolant
앫
Brake fluid
앫
Insects
앫
Tree resins etc.
Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates the aggressiveness and potency of
the above adverse influences.
More frequent washings are necessary to
deal with unfavorable conditions:
앫
Near the ocean
앫
In industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
emissions)
앫
During winter operation
You should check your vehicle from time to
time for stone chipping or other damage.
Any damage should be repaired as soon as
possible to prevent corrosion.
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody
of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough check is a washing of the underbody
followed by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas need to be re-undercoated.
Your vehicle has been treated at the factory with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
cavities which will last for the lifetime of
the vehicle. Post-production treatment is
neither necessary nor recommended by
Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility
of incompatibility between materials used
in the production process and others applied later.
We have selected car-care products and
compiled recommendations which are
specially matched to our vehicles and
which always reflect the latest technology.
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved
car-care products at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Operation
Vehicle care
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or
damage due to negligent or incorrect care
cannot always be removed or repaired with
the car-care products recommended here.
In such cases it is best to seek aid at your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The following topics deal with the cleaning
and care of your vehicle and give important
“how-to” information as well as references
to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care products.
Additional information can be found in the
booklet “Vehicle Care Guide“.
Power washer
When using a power washer for cleaning
the vehicle always observe the manufacturer’s operating instructions.
i
Tar stains
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
water, and a KEYLESS-GO* card is in
close proximity, i.e. within approx. 3 ft.
(approx. 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently locked or unlocked.
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry
and become more difficult to remove. A tar
remover is recommended.
!
Never use a round nozzle to power
wash tires. The intense jet of water can
result in damage to the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Always keep the jet of water moving
across the surface. Do not aim directly
at electrical parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other rubber parts.
Paintwork, painted body components
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care
should be applied when water drops on the
paint surface do not “bead up”, normally
every 3 to 5 months, depending on climate
and washing detergent used.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
should be applied if the paint surface
shows signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of
gloss).
Do not apply any of these products or wax
if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the
hood is still hot.
Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick
for quick and provisional repairs of minor
paint damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehicle doors etc.).
283
Operation
Vehicle care
Engine cleaning
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment
make sure to protect electrical components and connectors from contact with
water and cleaning agents.
Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticorrosion Wax should be applied to the engine
compartment after every engine cleaning.
Before applying, all control linkage bushings and joints should be lubricated. The
poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be protected from any wax.
Vehicle washing
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle
in direct sunlight. Use only a mild car wash
detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo.
Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a diffused jet of water. Direct only a very weak
spray towards the ventilation intake. Use
plenty of water and rinse the sponge and
chamois frequently.
284
Rinse with clear water and thoroughly dry
with a chamois. Do not allow cleaning
agents to dry on the finish.
Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in outside mirrors prior to running the vehicle
through an automatic car wash to prevent
damage to the mirrors.
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces
of road salt as soon as possible.
When washing the underbody, do not forget to clean the inner sides of the wheels.
i
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
water, and a KEYLESS-GO* card is in
close proximity, i.e. within approx. 3 ft.
(approx. 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently locked or unlocked.
Ornamental moldings
For regular cleaning and care of very dirty
chrome-plated parts, use a chrome cleaner.
Headlamps, tail lamps, turn signal
lenses
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
with plenty of water.
To prevent scratches, never apply strong
force and use only a soft, non-scratchy
cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth
or sponge.
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning the Distronic* system sensor
cover
i
Restart the engine after cleaning sensor cover 1.
Cleaning the Parktronic* system
sensors
When using a steam cleaner or power
washer, aim nozzle only briefly from a minimum distance of 4 in. (10 cm) at
sensors 1.
To prevent scratches, never apply strong
force and use only a soft, non-scratchy
cloth when cleaning the sensor. Do not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth
or sponge.
1 Distronic* system sensor cover
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
with plenty of water to clean sensor
cover 1.
To prevent scratches, never apply strong
force and use only a soft, non-scratchy
cloth when cleaning the sensor cover. Do
not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a
dry cloth or sponge.
1 Parktronic sensors
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo
with plenty of water.
285
Operation
Vehicle care
Wiper blades
Window cleaning
Light alloy wheels
Clean the wiper blade inserts with a clean
cloth and detergent solution.
Use a window cleaning solution on all glass
surfaces. An automotive glass cleaner is
recommended.
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care
should be used for regular cleaning of the
light alloy wheels.
i
For safety reasons, switch off wipers
and remove SmartKey from starter
switch before cleaning the wiper
blades, otherwise the wiper motor can
suddenly turn on and cause injury.
i
For safety reasons, switch off wipers
and remove SmartKey from starter
switch before cleaning the windshield,
otherwise the wiper motor can suddenly turn on and cause injury.
!
Fold the windshield wiper arms away
from the windshield in a vertical position only. They could otherwise damage the hood.
Fold the windshield wiper arms back
onto the windshield before turning the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
286
!
Fold the windshield wiper arms away
from the windshield in a vertical position only. They could otherwise damage the hood.
Fold the windshield wiper arms back
onto the windshield before turning the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
If possible, clean wheels once a week with
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care, using a soft bristle brush and a strong spray
of water.
Follow instructions on container.
i
Use only acid-free cleaning materials.
Acid could lead to corrosion.
Operation
Vehicle care
Instrument cluster
Headliner
Leather upholstery
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
scouring agents.
Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a
dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive
dirt.
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing
clothing that have the tendency to give off
coloring (e.g. when wet etc.) may cause
the upholstery to become permanently discolored. By lining the seats with a proper
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration
will be prevented.
Steering wheel and gear selector lever
Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly
or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved
Leather Care.
Cup holder
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
scouring agents.
Seat belts
The webbing must not be treated with
chemical cleaning agents. Use only clear,
lukewarm water and soap. Do not dry the
webbing at temperatures above 176°F
(80°C) or in direct sunlight.
Warning!
G
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth
and dry thoroughly or clean with
Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.
Exercise particular care when cleaning perforated leather as its underside should not
become wet.
Plastic and rubber parts
Do not use oil or wax on these parts.
Hard plastic trim items
Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
Care onto soft lint-free cloth and apply
with light pressure.
287
288
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Where will I find ...?
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Battery
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses
289
Practical hints
What to do if …?
What to do if …?
Lamps in instrument cluster
General information:
If a bulb in the instrument cluster fails to
light up during the bulb self-check when
turning the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 2, have it checked and replaced
if necessary.
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solution
The yellow ESP warning lamp
lights up while driving.
The ESP is deactivated.
왘
The yellow ESP warning lamp
flashes while driving.
The ESP or traction control has come into operation because of detected traction loss in
at least one tire.
v
v
Turn the ESP back on (컄 page 80).
Risk of accident!
If the ESP cannot be turned back on, have
the system checked at an authorized
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailMercedes-Benz Center as soon as possiing road, weather, and traffic conditions.
ble.
왘
When driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.
왘
While driving, ease up on the accelerator.
왘
Adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road and weather conditions.
왘
Do not deactivate the ESP. Exceptions: (컄 page 80).
Distronic* is deactivated.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accidents.
290
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem
-
Possible cause
Suggested solution
The yellow ABS malfunction indi- The ABS has detected a malfunction and has
cator lamp comes on while driv- switched off. The BAS and the ESP are also
ing.
switched off (see messages in display).
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
Wheels may lock during hard braking,
reducing steering capability.
The brake system is still functioning normally
but without the ABS available.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, other systems such as Parktronic*, Distronic*, Failure to follow these instructions inthe navigation system, and the automatic
creases the risk of an accident.
transmission can also malfunction.
The charging voltage has fallen below
10 volts and the ABS has switched off.
왘
When the voltage is above this value
again, the ABS is operational again.
왘
If necessary, have the generator and
battery checked.
l
The red Distronic warning lamp
lights up while driving.
You are too close to the vehicle in front of you
to maintain selected speed.
왘
Apply the brakes immediately to increase the following distance.
l
The red Distronic warning lamp
comes on while driving and you
hear a warning sound.
앫
You are gaining too rapidly on the vehicle
ahead of you.
왘
Apply the brakes immediately.
왘
앫
The distance warning system has recognized a stationary obstacle on your probable line of travel.
Carefully observe the traffic situation.
You may need to brake or maneuver
to avoid hitting an obstacle.
291
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem
1
Possible cause
The red SRS indicator lamp lights There is a malfunction in the restraint sysup while driving.
tems. The airbags or emergency tensioning
devices (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or
fail to activate in an accident.
Warning!
G
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal
injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and
unnecessarily which could result in an accident and/or injury to you or to others.
292
Suggested solution
왘
Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem
;
3
Possible cause
Suggested solution
The red brake warning lamp
lights up while driving and you
hear a warning sound.
You are driving with the parking brake set.
왘
Release the parking brake
(컄 page 44).
The red brake warning lamp
lights up while driving.
There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.
왘
Risk of accident! Carefully stop the
vehicle and notify an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add
brake fluid! This will not solve the
problem.
(USA only)
(Canada only)
Warning!
G
Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your
brake system checked immediately if the
brake warning lamp stays on. Don’t add
brake fluid before checking the brake
system.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You
can be seriously burned.
!
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks.
293
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem
?
The yellow “CHECK ENGINE”
malfunction indicator lamp
comes on while driving.
Possible cause
Suggested solution
There is a malfunction in:
왘
Have the vehicle checked as soon as
possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
An on-board diagnostic connector is
used by the service station to link the
vehicle to the shop diagnostics system. It allows the accurate identification of system malfunctions through
the readout of diagnostic trouble
codes. It is located in the front left
area of the footwell next to the parking brake pedal.
The fuel cap is not closed tightly.
왘
Close the fuel cap.
Your gas tank is empty.
왘
After refuelling, start the engine three
or four times in succession.
앫
The fuel management system
앫
The ignition system
앫
The emission control system
앫
Systems which affect emissions
Such malfunctions may result in excessive
emissions values and may switch the engine
to its limp-home (emergency operation)
mode.
The limp-home mode is canceled. You do
not need to have your vehicle checked.
<
294
The yellow fuel tank reserve
warning lamp lights up while
driving.
The fuel level has gone below the reserve
mark.
왘
Refuel at the next gas station
(컄 page 261).
The red seat belt warning lamp
blinks for a brief period after
starting the engine.
The warning lamp reminds you to fasten seat
belts.
왘
Fasten your seat belt.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Lamp in center console
Problem
The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp lights up.
Possible cause
Suggested solution
TM
A BabySmart child seat is installed on the
front passenger seat. Therefore the front
passenger airbag is switched off.
The system is malfunctioning when there is
no BabySmartTM child seat installed on the
front passenger seat.
The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
The system is malfunctioning.
lamp does not light up with a BabySmartTM
child seat properly installed on the front
passenger seat.
왘
Have the system checked as soon as
possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Make sure that there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat and
check installation of the child seat.
왘
If the light remains out, have the system checked as soon as possible by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint
to transport children on the front passenger seat until the system has been
repaired.
295
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Messages in the display
The control system shows warning and
malfunction messages in the multifunction
display.
Certain warning and malfunction messages are accompanied by an audible signal.
Address these messages accordingly and
follow the additional instructions given in
this Operator’s Manual.
Selecting the malfunction memory menu in
the control system (컄 page 130) displays
both cleared and uncleared messages.
High-priority messages appear in the multifunction display in red color.
Certain messages of high priority cannot
be cleared from the multifunction display
using the reset button J (컄 page 22).
296
Other high-priority messages and messages of less immediate priority (regular display colors) can be cleared from the
multifunction display using the reset
button J(컄 page 22) and are then stored
in the malfunction message memory
(컄 page 145).
Warning!
G
All categories of messages contain important information which should be taken note
of and, where a malfunction is indicated, addressed as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Failure to repair condition noted may cause
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty, or result in property damage or personal injury.
Warning!
G
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative.
Contact your nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
i
Turning the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 2, or pressing the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button twice
to position 2 causes all lamps as well
as the multifunction display to come
on. Ensure that they are all in working
order before starting your journey.
On the pages that follow, you will find a
compilation of all the messages that may
appear in the display. High priority messages appear on a red background.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
ABC
ACTIVE BODY CONTROL
DRIVE CAREFULLY!
ACTIVE BODY CONTROL
STOP, CAR TOO LOW!
DISPLAY MALFUNCTION
VISIT WORKSHOP!
Possible cause
Suggested solution
The capability of the ABC system is restricted. This can impair the handling.
왘
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
왘
Visit a service center as soon as possible.
The vehicle is losing oil.
왘
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so.
The vehicle is parked on an extremely
uneven surface.
왘
Press the vehicle level control button
to select level 2 (컄 page 215).
ABC is malfunctioning.
왘
Stop and press the vehicle level control button to select a higher vehicle
level (컄 page 215).
왘
Do not turn steering wheel too far to
avoid damaging the front fenders.
왘
Listen for scraping noises.
왘
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
왘
Visit a service center as soon as possible.
왘
Visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
The display for ABC or the ABC system itself is malfunctioning.
297
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
ABC
ABS
VISIT WORKSHOP!
MALFUNCTION!
VISIT WORKSHOP!
Possible cause
Suggested solution
The capability of the ABC system is restricted.
왘
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
왘
Visit a service center as soon as possible.
The ABS has detected a malfunction and
has switched off. The ESP and the BAS are
also deactivated.
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
Wheels may lock during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ABS available.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
DISPLAY MALFUNCTION
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The ABS or the ABS display is malfunctioning.
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
Wheels may lock during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
298
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause
Suggested solution
AIR FILTER
CHANGE CARTRIDGE
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The air filter is clogged.
왘
Have the air filter checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
@
AIRMATIC
STOP, CAR TOO LOW!
The vehicle is parked on an extremely
uneven surface.
왘
Press the vehicle level control button
to select the raised vehicle level
(컄 page 212).
The vehicle level control is malfunctioning.
왘
Stop and press the vehicle level control button to select a higher vehicle
level (컄 page 212).
왘
Do not turn steering wheel too far to
avoid damaging the front fenders.
왘
Listen for scraping noises.
왘
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
왘
Visit a service center as soon as possible.
왘
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
왘
Visit a service center as soon as possible.
AIRMATIC
DRIVE CAREFULLY!
The capability of the AIRMATIC system is
restricted.
299
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
@
Possible cause
Suggested solution
DISPLAY MALFUNCTION
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The display for AIRMATIC or the AIRMATIC
system itself is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
AIRMATIC
LEV. SELECT. CANCELED!
앫
You have exceeded a speed of 75 mph
(120 km/h).
왘
Press the vehicle level control button
to adjust the vehicle level
(컄 page 212).
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
or
앫
BAS
MALFUNCTION
VISIT WORKSHOP!
You have maintained a speed of between 50 mph (80 km/h) and 75 mph
(120 km/h) for more than 5 minutes.
The BAS has detected a malfunction and
switched off.
The ESP is switched off, too. The ABS may
still be operational.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
DISPLAY MALFUNCTION
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The BAS or the BAS display is malfunctioning.
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
300
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
#
BATTERY/ALTERNATOR
VISIT WORKSHOP!
Possible cause
Suggested solution
The battery was charged with a battery
charger or jump started.
왘
Have the battery checked at a service station.
The battery is no longer charging.
Possible causes:
왘
Stop immediately and check the
poly-V-belt.
앫
Alternator malfunctioning
If it is broken:
앫
Broken poly-V-belt
왘
Do not forget that the brake system requires electrical energy and may be operating with restricted capability. Considerably
greater brake pedal force is required and
the stopping distance is longer.
Do not continue to drive. Otherwise
the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine. Notify
an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
If it is intact:
왘
Drive immediately to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Adjust driving to be consistent with
reduced braking responsiveness.
301
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause
Suggested solution
2
BRAKE WEAR
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The brake pads have reached their wear
limit.
왘
Have the brake pads replaced as
soon as possible.
Except Canada:
BRAKE FLUID
VISIT WORKSHOP!
There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.
왘
Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle
and notify an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add
brake fluid! This will not solve the
problem.
;
Canada only:
3
!
Brake pad thickness must be visually
checked by a qualified technician at the
intervals specified in the Service Booklet.
302
Warning!
G
Driving with this message displayed can result in an accident. Have your brake system
checked immediately. Don’t add brake fluid
before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and
the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned.
!
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
F
Possible cause
Suggested solution
CHIP CARD
CHECK BATTERY
KEYLESS-GO*card batteries are discharged.
왘
Change the batteries (컄 page 328).
CHIP CARD
NOT RECOGNIZED!
KEYLESS-GO*card is not recognized while
the engine is running because
왘
Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so.
왘
Search for the card.
앫
the card is not in the vehicle
앫
there is strong radio-frequency interfer- Otherwise the vehicle cannot be centrally locked nor can the engine be started
ence
again after it has been stopped.
KEYLESS-GO*card is momentarily not recognized.
왘
Change the position of the card in
the vehicle.
왘
Operate the vehicle with the
SmartKey in the ignition if necessary.
CHIP CARD
DETECTED IN VEHICLE
KEYLESS-GO*card left in the vehicle was
recognized while locking the vehicle from
the outside.
왘
Take the card out of the vehicle.
CHIP CARD
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The KEYLESS-GO* system is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
303
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
F
B
Warning!
Possible cause
Suggested solution
CHIP CARD
DO NOT FORGET
This display appears (for a maximum of
60 seconds) if the driver’s door is opened
with the engine shut off and no SmartKey in
the ignition.
Message is only a reminder.
왘
Insert SmartKey in the ignition.
왘
Take the KEYLESS-GO*card with you
when leaving the vehicle.
COOLANT
CHECK LEVEL!
The coolant level is too low.
왘
Add coolant (컄 page 268).
왘
If you have to add coolant frequently,
have the cooling system checked by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
G
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
engine parts. You can be seriously burned.
!
Do not ignore the low engine coolant
level warning. Extended driving with
the message and symbol displayed
may cause serious engine damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Do not drive without a sufficient
amount of coolant in the cooling system. The engine will overheat, causing
major engine damage.
304
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Ï
Warning!
COOLANT
STOP, ENGINE OFF!
G
Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns and can occur just by opening
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Possible cause
Suggested solution
The coolant is too hot.
왘
Stop the vehicle and turn off the engine.
왘
Only start the engine again after the
message disappears. You could otherwise damage the engine.
During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248°F (120°C).
!
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature above 248°F
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious
engine damage which is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until it
cools down.
305
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Ï
COOLANT
STOP, ENGINE OFF!
Possible cause
Suggested solution
The poly-V-belt could be broken.
왘
Stop immediately and check the
poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
왘
Do not continue to drive. Otherwise
the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine. Notify
an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
If it is intact:
Ï
306
COOLANT
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The cooling fan for the coolant is malfunctioning.
왘
Do not continue to drive the vehicle
with this message displayed. Doing
so could result in serious engine
damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
왘
Observe the coolant temperature
display.
왘
Have the fan replaced as soon as
possible.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
G
DISTRONIC
Possible cause
Suggested solution
DISPLAY MALFUNCTION
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The instrument cluster display is malfunctioning.
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
EXTERNAL INTERFERENCE
REACTIVATE!
Distronic* is switched off and is temporarily unavailable.
왘
Try activating Distronic* again later.
CLEAN SENSOR!
SEE OPERATOR'S MAN.
Distronic* is switched off because the Distronic* cover in the radiator grille is dirty.
왘
Clean the Distronic* cover in the radiator grille (컄 page 285).
왘
Restart the vehicle.
VISIT WORKSHOP!
Distronic* is malfunctioning or the display
is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
J
DOOR OPEN!
You are attempting to drive with one or
more doors open.
왘
Close the doors.
P
SHIFT
TO P
You have turned off the engine with the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button and
opened the driver’s door.
왘
Place the selector lever in position P.
?
VISIT WORKSHOP!
There may be a malfunction in the:
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
앫
Fuel injection system
앫
Ignition system
앫
Exhaust system
앫
Fuel system
307
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
:
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
STOP, ENGINE OFF!
Possible cause
Suggested solution
There is no oil in the engine. There is a danger of engine damage.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt
as soon as possible.
왘
Turn off the engine.
왘
Add engine oil.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
REDUCE OIL LEVEL
You have added too much engine oil. There
is a risk of damaging the engine or the catalytic converter.
왘
Have oil siphoned. Observe all legal
requirements with respect to its disposal.
ENGINE OIL
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The engine oil has dropped to a critical level.
왘
Check the engine oil level
(컄 page 264) and add oil as required.
왘
If you must add engine oil frequently,
have the engine checked for possible
leaks.
왘
Have the oil checked.
There is water in the oil.
308
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
:
Possible cause
Suggested solution
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The measuring system is malfunctioning.
왘
Have the measuring system checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
CHECK LEVEL!
The engine oil level is too low.
왘
Check the engine oil level
(컄 page 264) and add oil as required.
When the ENGINE OIL LEVEL – CHECK LEVEL! message appears while the engine is
running and at operating temperature, the
engine oil level has dropped to approximately the minimum mark on the dipstick.
When this occurs, the warning will first
come on intermittently and then stay on if
the oil level drops further.
If no oil leaks are noted, continue to drive
to the nearest service station where the
engine oil should be topped to the “full”
mark on the dipstick with an approved oil.
!
The engine oil level warnings should
not be ignored. Extended driving with
the symbol displayed could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
309
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
ESP
MALFUNCTION!
VISIT WORKSHOP!
Possible cause
Suggested solution
The ESP has detected a malfunction and
switched off.
The ABS may still be operational.
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
DISPLAY MALFUNCTION
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The ESP or the ESP display is malfunctioning.
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
NOT AVAILABLE!
SEE OPER. MANUAL
The ESP was deactivated because the power supply has been interrupted. The ABS is
still operational.
왘
With the vehicle stationary and the
engine running, turn the steering
wheel completely to the left and then
to the right to synchronize the ESP.
If the ESP message does not go out:
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
310
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
PRE-SAFE
INACTIVE
VISIT WORKSHOP
Possible cause
Suggested solution
If BAS or ESP malfunction messages are
displayed simultaneously, PRE-SAFE has
been deactivated as a result of these malfunctions. All other occupant safety systems, such as the airbags, are still
available.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
PRE-SAFE itself has failed. All other occupant safety systems, such as the airbags,
are still available.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
A
RESERVE FUEL
The fuel level has dropped below the reserve mark.
왘
Refuel at the next gas station
(컄 page 261).
Y
I
HOOD OPEN!
You are driving with the hood open.
왘
Close the hood (컄 page 264).
REMOVE KEY!
You have forgotten to remove the
SmartKey.
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the ignition.
REPLACE KEY!
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The batteries in the SmartKey are dead.
왘
Change the batteries (컄 page 328).
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
AUTOM. LIGHT ON
REMOVE KEY!
311
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
.
312
LIGHT SENSOR
VISIT WORKSHOP!
Possible cause
Suggested solution
The lamp sensor is malfunctioning. The
headlamps switch on automatically.
왘
In the control system, set lamp operation
to manual (컄 page 149).
왘
Switch on headlamps using the exterior
lamp switch.
BRAKE LIGHT
VISIT WORKSHOP!
Brake lamp illumination is delayed or lamp
is permanently on.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
DISPLAY MALFUNCTION
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The display for the lamps or the system is
malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
TURN OFF LIGHTS!
Lamps have been turned on although the
SmartKey in the ignition is in position 0.
왘
Turn off the headlamps
TURN SIG. MIRROR, L
CHECK LIGHT!
The left turn signal in the side mirror is
malfunctioning. This message will only appear if all light emitting diodes have
stopped working.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
TURN SIG. MIRROR, R
CHECK LIGHT!
The right turn signal in the side mirror is
malfunctioning. This message will only appear if all light emitting diodes have
stopped working.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
TURN SIG., LF
CHECK LIGHT!
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
The left front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A back-up bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
.
Possible cause
Suggested solution
TURN SIG., RF
CHECK LIGHT!
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
The right front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A back-up bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
HIGH BEAM, L
CHECK LIGHT!
The left high beam lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
HIGH BEAM, R
CHECK LIGHT!
The right high beam lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
MARKER LIGHT, FL
CHECK LIGHT!
The front left side marker lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
MARKER LIGHT, FR
CHECK LIGHT!
The front right side marker lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
FR. L. PARK. LAMP
CHECK LIGHT!
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
The left parking lamps are malfunctioning.
A back-up bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
FR. R. PARK. LAMP
CHECK LIGHT!
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
The right parking lamps are malfunctioning. A back-up bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
STANDING LIGHT, L
CHECK LIGHT!
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
The left standing lamp is malfunctioning. A
back-up bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
313
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
.
314
Possible cause
Suggested solution
STANDING LIGHT, R
CHECK LIGHT!
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
The right standing signal lamp is malfunctioning. A back-up bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
FRONT FOGLIGHT, L
CHECK LIGHT!
The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
FRONT FOGLIGHT, R
CHECK LIGHT!
The right front fog lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
LOW BEAM, L
CHECK LIGHT!
The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
LOW BEAM, R
CHECK LIGHT!
The right low beam lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
3RD BRAKE LIGHT
CHECK LIGHT!
The high mounted brake lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
BRAKE LIGHT, L
CHECK LIGHT!
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
The left brake lamp is malfunctioning. A
back-up bulb is being used.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
BRAKE LIGHT, R
CHECK LIGHT!
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
The right brake lamp is malfunctioning. A
back-up bulb is being used.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
REVERSE LIGHT, L
CHECK LIGHT!
The left reverse lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
.
!
Possible cause
Suggested solution
REVERSE LIGHT, R
CHECK LIGHT!
The right reverse lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
REAR FOGLIGHT
CHECK LIGHT!
The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT, L
CHECK LIGHT!
The left license plate lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT, R
CHECK LIGHT!
The right license plate lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
TAIL LIGHT, L
CHECK LIGHT!
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
The left tail lamp is malfunctioning. A
back-up bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
TAIL LIGHT, R
CHECK LIGHT!
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
The right tail lamp is malfunctioning. A
back-up bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
TURN SIG., LR
CHECK LIGHT!
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A back-up bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
TURN SIG., RR
CHECK LIGHT!
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A back-up bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
PARK. BRAKE
RELEASE BRAKE!
You are driving with the parking brake engaged.
왘
Release the parking brake (컄 page 44).
315
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause
Suggested solution
The seat belt system is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
왘
Activate the tire inflation pressure monitor* (컄 page 276).
<
SEAT BELT SYSTEM
VISIT WORKSHOP!
H
TIRE PRES. MONITOR
The tire pressure is being checked.
PRES. DISPLAY AFTER
DRIVING A FEW MINS. REACTIVATE USING R BUTTON
TIRE PRES. MONITOR
REACTIVATE!
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
316
The tire inflation pressure monitor* is deactivated.
You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
H
TIRE PRES. MONITOR
NOT ACTIVE
TIRE PRES. MONITOR
VISIT WORKSHOP!
Possible cause
Suggested solution
The tire inflation pressure monitor* is unable to monitor the tire pressure due to
왘
Check the tire pressure at the next service station.
왘
Have the tire inflation pressure monitor*
checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
왘
Change the wheel (컄 page 339).
왘
Check and correct tire pressure as required (컄 page 273).
앫
the presence of several wheel sensors
in the vehicle.
앫
excessive wheel sensor temperatures.
앫
a nearby radio interference source.
앫
unrecognized wheel sensors mounted.
The tire inflation pressure monitor* is malfunctioning.
A wheel without proper sensor was installed.
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
317
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
H
TIRE PRES.
CAUTION, TIRE DEFECT!
TIRE PRES., RF
CAUTION, TIRE DEFECT!
One or more tires is rapidly deflating.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrubt steering and braking maneuvers.
왘
Change the wheel (컄 page 339).
왘
The tire pressure in one or more tires is
low.
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrubt steering and braking maneuvers.
왘
Change the wheel (컄 page 339).
The right front tire is rapidly deflating.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrubt steering and braking maneuvers.
왘
Change the wheel (컄 page 339).
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
왘
Check the tire pressure.
왘
Change the wheel (컄 page 339).
The right front tire pressure is low.
TIRE PRES., RF
CHECK TIRES!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
318
Suggested solution
The tire pressure in one or more tires is already below the minimum value.
TIRE PRES.
CHECK TIRES!
Warning!
Possible cause
You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
H
TIRE PRES., LF
CAUTION, TIRE DEFECT!
Suggested solution
The left front tire is rapidly deflating.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
왘
Change the wheel (컄 page 339).
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
왘
Check the tire pressure.
왘
Change the wheel (컄 page 339).
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrubt steering and braking maneuvers.
왘
Change the wheel (컄 page 339).
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
왘
Check the tire pressure.
왘
Change the wheel (컄 page 339).
The left front tire pressure is low.
TIRE PRES., LF
CHECK TIRES!
TIRE PRES., RR
CAUTION, TIRE DEFECT!
The right rear tire is rapidly deflating.
The right rear tire pressure is low.
TIRE PRES., RR
CHECK TIRES!
Warning!
Possible cause
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
319
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
H
TIRE PRES., LR
CAUTION, TIRE DEFECT!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
Display
L
320
Suggested solution
The left rear tire is rapidly deflating.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
왘
Change the wheel (컄 page 339).
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
왘
Check the tire pressure.
왘
Change the wheel (컄 page 339).
The left rear tire pressure is low.
TIRE PRES., LR
CHECK TIRES!
Warning!
Possible cause
You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Possible cause
Suggested solution
TELE AID
VISIT WORKSHOP!
One or more main functions of the Tele Aid
system are malfunctioning.
왘
Have the Tele Aid system checked by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
TELE AID BATTERY
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The emergency power battery for the Tele
Aid system is malfunctioning. If the vehicle
battery is also discharged, Tele Aid will not
be operational.
왘
Have the Tele Aid system checked by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause
Suggested solution
ì
FUNCTION
NOT AVAILABLE!
This display appears if button ì or í
on the multifunction steering wheel is
pressed and the vehicle is not equipped
with a telephone.
Ê
TRUNK OPEN!
This message will appear whenever the
trunk lid is open.
왘
Close the trunk lid.
W
WASHER FLUID
CHECK LEVEL!
The fluid level has dropped to about 1/3 of
total reservoir capacity.
왘
Add washer fluid (컄 page 271).
CRUISE CONTROL
CRUISE CONTROL
VISIT WORKSHOP!
Cruise control or Distronic* is malfunctioning.
왘
Have cruise control or Distronic*
checked by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
_
ENTRY POSITION
DO NOT DRIVE!
Seat, mirrors and steering wheel have not
yet moved to their preset driving positions.
왘
Wait until the seat, mirrors and steering wheel have moved to their driving
positions.
The message will disappear.
±
DISPLAY MALFUNCTION
VISIT WORKSHOP!
Certain electronic systems are unable to
relay information to the control system.
The following systems may have failed:
왘
Have the electronic systems
checked by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
Coolant temperature display
앫
Tachometer
앫
Cruise control display
321
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Where will I find ...?
First aid kit
The first aid kit is located in the storage
space under the front passenger seat.
Removing the first aid kit
왘
Pull handle 1 forward in the direction of
the arrow.
왘
Fold cover 2 downward.
Remove first aid kit.
Vehicle jack, vehicle tool kit, luggage
bowl, spare wheel
The spare wheel, the vehicle tools, and the
luggage bowl are stored in the compartment underneath the trunk floor.
Storing the first aid kit
왘
Place first aid kit in the storage space.
왘
Fold cover 2 upward until it engages.
i
1 Handle
2 Cover
Check expiration dates and contents
for completeness at least once a year
and replace missing/expired items.
1 Jack
2 Storage tray with vehicle tool kit
3 Luggage bowl
4 Spare wheel
왘
322
Lift trunk floor cover and engage handle in upper edge of trunk.
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
!
To prevent damage, always disengage
trunk floor handle from trunk lid and
lower trunk floor before closing the
trunk lid.
The vehicle tool kit includes:
앫
One pair of universal pliers
앫
Two open-end wrenches
앫
One hex-socket wrench
앫
One interchangeable slot/Phillips
screwdriver
앫
One towing eye bolt
앫
One wheel wrench
앫
One alignment bolt
앫
One fuse extractor
앫
One fuse chart for the main fuse box
앫
Spare fuses
Vehicle jack
To prepare the vehicle jack for use
왘
Remove the vehicle jack from the spare
wheel well under the trunk floor.
왘
Push the crank handle up.
왘
Turn the crank handle clockwise until it
engages (operational position).
Storing the vehicle jack in the trunk
왘
Retract the vehicle jack arm to the
base of the vehicle jack.
왘
Push the crank handle up.
왘
Turn the crank handle counterclockwise to the end of the stop (storage position).
323
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Warning!
G
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
firmly set parking brake and block wheels
before raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on level surface. Make sure that the jack
arm is fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
capacity jackstands before working under
the vehicle.
324
Removing the spare wheel
왘
Take out the vehicle tool kit tray 2.
왘
Loosen the luggage bowl 3. To do so,
turn the luggage bowl counterclockwise
왘
Remove the spare wheel 4.
Storing the spare wheel
왘
Place spare wheel 4 in wheel well.
왘
Secure the spare wheel. To do so, turn
the luggage bowl 3 clockwise to its
stop.
왘
Place vehicle tool kit tray 2 in luggage
bowl.
Spare wheel S 430, S 500 and S 600
(except Sport Package*)
The spare wheel rim is mounted with a full
sized tire of the same type as on the vehicle, and it is fully functional.
However, that spare wheel rim is weight
optimized and has a limited service life of
12000 miles (20000 km) use before a
standard wheel rim must replace it.
In case of flat tire, you may temporarily use
the spare wheel.
Do not operate vehicle with more than one
spare wheel mounted.
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Warning!
G
Never operate the vehicle with more than
one spare wheel mounted.
The spare wheel rim is for temporary use
only. Use for over a total of 12000 miles
(20000 km) (aggregate of all uses) may
cause wheel rim failure leading to an accident and possible injuries.
The spare wheel should only be used temporarily and replaced with a regular road wheel
as quickly as possible.
More information can be found in the
“Technical data” section (컄 page 357).
Spare wheel S 55 AMG and Sport
Package*
In case of a flat tire, you may temporarily
use the spare wheel when observing the
following restrictions:
앫
Do not exceed a vehicle speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
앫
Drive to the nearest tire repair facility
to have the flat tire repaired or replaced as appropriate.
앫
Do not operate vehicle with more than
one spare wheel mounted.
Warning!
G
The dimensions of the spare wheel are different from those of the road wheels. As a
result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a mounted spare
wheel. Adapt your driving style accordingly.
Never operate the vehicle with more than
one spare wheel mounted.
The spare wheel is for temporary use only.
When driving with spare wheel mounted, ensure proper tire pressure and do not exceed
vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km).
The spare wheel rim is for temporary use
only. Use for over a total of 12000 miles
(20000 km) (aggregate of all uses) may
cause wheel rim failure leading to an accident and possible injuries.
The spare wheel should only be used temporarily and replaced with a regular road wheel
as quickly as possible.
More information can be found in the
“Technical data” section (컄 page 357).
325
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking the vehicle
i
Unlocking the driver’s door
Unlocking your vehicle with the mechanical key will trigger the anti-theft
alarm system. To cancel the alarm, do
one of the following:
If you are unable to unlock the driver’s
door with the SmartKey, open the door
with the mechanical key as follows:
왘
1 Mechanical key locking tab
2 Mechanical key
왘
Move locking tab 1 in direction of arrow and slide the mechanical key 2 out
of the housing.
326
Unlock the door with the mechanical
key. To do so, push the mechanical key
into the lock until it stops and turn it
counterclockwise to position 1.
앫
Press button Œ or ‹ on the
SmartKey.
앫
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
앫
If KEYLESS-GO* card present,
press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button (컄 page 33).
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking the trunk
!
Locking the vehicle
If you are unable to unlock the trunk with
the SmartKey, open the trunk with the mechanical key as follows:
The trunk lid swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure that
there is sufficient overhead clearance.
A minimum height clearance of 6 ft.
(1.85 m) is required to open the trunk
lid.
i
Unlocking your vehicle with the mechanical key will trigger the anti-theft
alarm system. To cancel the alarm, do
one of the following:
앫
Insert the mechanical key into the
trunk lid lock.
Press button Œ or ‹ on the
SmartKey.
앫
Turn the mechanical key counterclockwise to position 1.
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
앫
If KEYLESS-GO* card present,
press the start/stop button
(컄 page 33).
Trunk lock
왘
왘
왘
Press button 2.
The trunk lid swings open.
If you are unable to lock the vehicle with
the SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO* card,
lock it with the mechanical key as follows:
왘
Close the passenger doors and the
trunk lid.
왘
Press the central locking switch in the
center console (컄 page 103).
왘
Check to see whether the locking knob
on the passenger door is still visible. If
necessary push it down manually.
왘
Lock the driver’s door with the mechanical key.
왘
Lock the trunk lid if necessary with the
mechanical key (컄 page 326).
327
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Changing batteries
If the batteries in the SmartKey or the
KEYLESS-GO* card are discharged, the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked.
It is recommended to have the batteries replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Warning!
G
Keep the batteries out of reach of children.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
SmartKey
i
When changing batteries, always replace both batteries.
The required replacement batteries are
available at any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
1 Mechanical key
2 Battery compartment
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent.
왘
Remove mechanical key 1.
왘
Insert the mechanical key in side opening and push gray slide.
The battery compartment is unlatched.
328
왘
Pull the battery compartment out of the
SmartKey housing in direction of arrow.
왘
Remove the batteries.
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
KEYLESS-GO* card
Fuel filler flap
In an emergency, the fuel filler flap can be
opened from the trunk. The release lever is
located on the right-hand side in the trunk.
3 Battery
4 Contact spring
왘
Using a lint-free cloth, insert new batteries under the contact spring with the
plus (+) side facing up.
왘
Return battery compartment into housing until it locks into place.
1 Battery cover
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent.
왘
Pry open cover 1 (e.g. by using a narrow blade screwdriver).
왘
Remove the batteries.
왘
Install new batteries as indicated by
the “+” and “-” markings in the
KEYLESS-GO card.
왘
Replace battery cover 1.
1 Release knob
왘
Open the trunk with the mechanical
key (컄 page 326).
왘
Remove the trim inside the trunk on the
right-hand side.
왘
Pull release lever 1 in the direction of
the arrow.
The fuel filler flap can be opened.
329
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Sliding/pop-up roof
The driving mechanism for the sliding/pop-up roof is located behind the lens
of the interior overhead light.
왘
Pry off lens 1 using a srewdriver.
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 1 or 2.
왘
Remove the crank from the operator’s
manual pouch.
You can open or close the sliding/pop-up
roof manually should an electrical malfunction occur.
왘
왘
Turn crank 2 clockwise to:
앫
close slide roof
앫
raise roof at the rear
Turn crank 2 counterclockwise to:
앫
open slide roof
앫
lower roof at the rear
The sliding/pop-up must be resynchronized after being operated manually
(컄 page 195).
2 Crank
왘
1 Lens
330
Insert crank 2 through hole.
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper
exterior lighting and signaling. It is therefore essential that all bulbs and lamp assemblies are in good working order at all
times.
Bulbs
Front lamps
Lamp
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. Have headlamps checked and
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for headlamp
adjustment.
1
Type
1 Additional turn signal lamps
LED
2 Low beam1
H7-55 W
Bi -Xenon*
D2S-35 W
3 Turn signal lamp
2357 A
4 Fog lamp
H7-55 W
5 Parking and standing lamp
W5W
6 Side marker lamp
W5W
7 High beam
H7-55 W
Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlamps*: Low beam
and high beam use the same D2S-35W lamp. Do
not replace the Bi-Xenon bulbs yourself. See your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
331
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Rear lamps
Lamp
Notes on bulb replacement
Type
Warning!
G
8 Brake lamp
LED
9 Turn signal lamp
PY 21 W
Keep bulbs out of reach of children.
10 Tail and standing
lamp, side marker
P 21/4 W
11 Backup lamp
P 21 W
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Allow the lamp to cool down before changing
a bulb.
12 License plate lamps C 5 W
13 Tail lamp, Rear fog
lamp
P 21/4 W
14 High mounted brake LED
lamp
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A
bulb can explode if you:
앫
touch or move it when hot
앫
drop the bulb
앫
scratch the bulb
Wear eye and hand protection.
Because of high voltage in Bi-Xenon lamps,
it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair
the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such work done by a
qualified technician.
332
앫
Use only 12 volt bulbs of the same type
and with the specified watt rating.
앫
Switch lights off before changing a bulb
to prevent short circuits.
앫
Always use a clean lint-free cloth when
handling bulbs.
앫
Your hands should be dry and free of oil
and grease.
앫
If the newly installed bulb does not light
up, visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
앫
Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following lamps replaced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
Additional turn signal lamps in the
exterior rear view mirrors
앫
High mounted brake lamp
앫
Bi-Xenon lamps*
앫
Front fog lamps
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing low beam bulbs
Replacing bulbs for front lamps
Bi-Xenon* headlamp
Warning!
1 Headlamp cover for fog lamp
2 Headlamp cover for high beam headlamp bulb, parking and standing lamp
3 Headlamp cover for low beam
(Bi-Xenon* or halogen) headlamp bulb
4 Bulb socket for fog lamp
5 Bulb socket for parking and standing
lamp
6 Electrical connector for high beam
headlamp bulb
7 Electrical connector for low beam
headlamp bulb
8 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp
G
Do not remove the cover for the Bi-Xenon
headlamp. Because of high voltage in xenon
lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or
repair the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such work done by a
qualified technician.
Halogen headlamp
왘
Switch off the lights.
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 263).
왘
Press the tab on cover 3 and remove
cover.
왘
Pull connector 7 off of the lamp.
왘
Release the retaining springs and take
컄컄
out the bulb.
333
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
컄컄 왘
Insert the new bulb in the socket so
that the base is in the recess on the
lower left.
왘
Attach the retaining springs.
왘
Insert connector 7 into the bulb.
왘
Press cover 3 onto the housing until
the tab engages.
334
Replacing high beam bulbs
Front turn signal lamp bulb
왘
Switch off the lights.
왘
Switch off the lights.
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 263).
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 263).
왘
Press the tab on cover 2 and remove
cover.
왘
Twist bulb socket 8 counterclockwise
and pull out.
왘
Pull connector 6 off of the bulb.
왘
왘
Apply pressure on the bulb contacts
from above until the bulb releases from
the retaining springs.
Gently push bulb into socket, turn
counterclockwise and remove.
왘
Insert new bulb in socket, push in and
twist clockwise.
왘
Remove bulb.
왘
왘
Insert the new bulb in the socket with
the marking facing upward.
Reinstall bulb socket in lamp and twist
clockwise until it engages.
왘
Press the bulb upward on the contacts
until it engages in the retaining springs.
왘
Insert connector 6 onto the bulb.
왘
Press cover 2 onto the housing until
the tab engages.
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Parking and standing lamp bulb
Side marker lamp bulb
왘
Pull bulb out of the bulb socket.
왘
Switch off the lights.
왘
Insert new bulb in socket.
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 263).
왘
왘
Press the tab on cover 2 and remove
cover.
Reinstall bulb socket, push in and twist
clockwise.
왘
To reinstall lamp, set rear end in
bumper and let front end snap into
place.
왘
Pull out the bulb socket 5 with the
bulb.
왘
Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket.
왘
Insert a new bulb in the socket.
왘
Reinstall the bulb socket.
왘
Press cover 2 onto the housing until
the tab engages.
왘
Switch off the lights.
왘
Carefully slide lamp towards rear.
왘
Remove front end first.
왘
Twist bulb socket counterclockwise
and pull out.
335
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps
Tail lamp assemblies
왘
Switch off the lights.
왘
Open trunk.
왘
Turn the catch, and move the trim to
the side.
왘
Turn bulb socket counterclockwise and
pull out.
왘
Gently twist bulb counterclockwise and
pull out of bulb holder.
왘
Insert new bulb into the holder and turn
it clockwise.
왘
1 Turn signal lamp (white socket)
2 Tail, parking, standing, and side marker
lamp (red socket)
3 Tail lamp, rear fog lamp (red socket)
4 Backup lamp (black socket)
336
왘
License plate lamp
1 Screws
Reinstall bulb socket.
왘
Switch off the lights.
The bulb socket should audibly click.
왘
Loosen both screws 1 and remove
lamp.
왘
Replace the tubular lamp and reinstall
it.
왘
Retighten the screws.
Replace trim and secure with lock.
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Replacing wiper blades
!
Removing
To avoid damage to the hood, the wiper
arms should only be folded forward
when in the vertical position.
왘
왘
You should hear it snap into place.
Turn SmartKey in starter switch
position 1.
왘
왘
Turn combination switch to wiper
setting II (컄 page 47).
왘
With wiper arm in vertical position (see
above), turn SmartKey in starter switch
to position 0.
Warning!
Fold the wiper arm forward.
Turn the wiper blade at a right angle to
wiper arm (arrow 1).
G
For safety reasons, remove SmartKey from
starter switch before replacing a wiper
blade, otherwise the motor could suddenly
turn on and cause injury.
1 Lock
2 Unlock
왘
Pull the tab in the direction of arrow 2
and remove windshield wiper.
337
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Installing
왘
Slide the wiper blade into the cutout on
the wiper arm.
왘
Slide the tab back in the opposite direction of arrow 2 until it audibly engages.
왘
Rotate wiper blade into position parallel to wiper arm.
왘
Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on
the windshield.
338
!
Never open the hood when the wiper
arm is folded forward.
Do not allow the wiper arms to contact
the windshield glass without a wiper
blade inserted.
Make certain that the wiper blades are
properly installed. Improperly installed
wiper blades may cause windshield
damage.
For your convenience, we recommend
that you have this work carried out by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Practical hints
Flat tire
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle
왘
Park the vehicle as far as possible from
moving traffic on a hard surface.
왘
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
왘
Engage the steering wheel lock in the
straight-ahead position and set the
parking brake.
왘
Move the selector lever to P.
왘
Have any passenger exit the vehicle at
a safe distance from the roadway.
Mounting the spare wheel
Warning!
Preparing the vehicle
G
왘
Take vehicle tool kit tray and vehicle
jack out of trunk .
왘
Take the spare wheel out of wheel well
(컄 page 322).
Never operate the vehicle with more than
one spare wheel mounted.
The spare wheel rim is for temporary use
only. Use for over a total of 12000 miles
(20000 km) (aggregate of all uses) may
cause wheel rim failure leading to an accident and possible injuries.
The spare wheel should only be used temporarily and replaced with a regular road wheel
as quickly as possible.
S 55 AMG and Sport Package* only:
The spare wheel is for temporary use only.
When driving with spare wheel mounted, ensure proper tire pressure and do not exceed
vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
The dimensions of the spare wheel are different from those of the road wheels. As a
result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a mounted spare
wheel. Adapt your driving style accordingly.
Lifting the vehicle
왘
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away
by blocking wheels with wheel chocks
(not included) or other sizable objects.
When changing wheel on a level surface:
왘
Place one chock in front of and one behind the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel being changed.
When changing wheel on a hill:
왘
Place chocks behind the downhill sides
of both wheels of the axle not being
컄컄
worked on.
339
Practical hints
Flat tire
컄컄
Warning!
G
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack tubes built both
sides of the vehicle. To help avoid personal
injury, use the jack only to lift the vehicle
during a wheel change. Never get beneath
the vehicle while it is supported by the jack.
Keep hands and feet away from the area under the lifted vehicle. Always firmly set parking brake and block wheels before raising
vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on level surface. Make sure that the jack
arm is fully inserted in the jack tube. Always
lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity
jackstands before working under the vehicle.
340
왘
왘
Take the two-piece wheel wrench out
of the vehicle tool kit tray. Assemble
wheel wrench.
On wheel to be changed, loosen but do
not yet remove the wheel bolts (approximately one full turn with wrench).
The tube openings are located directly behind the front wheel housings and in front
of the rear wheel housings.
1 Jack support tube cover
왘
Move cover 1 toward rear by pressing
at point indicated by arrow.
왘
Remove cover 1 carefully to avoid
damage to the locking tabs.
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘
Keeping jack in this position, turn
crank 3 clockwise until the jack base
meets the ground. Make sure the jack
is vertical (plumb line).
왘
Continue to turn the crank until the tire
is a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the
ground.
Warning!
1 Jack support tube hole
2 Jack arm
3 Crank
왘
Insert jack arm 2 fully into tube hole 1
up to the stop.
Warning!
G
Removing the wheel
G
The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle briefly for wheel changes. It is not suited
for performing maintenance work under the
vehicle.
1 Alignment bolt
왘
Unscrew upper-most wheel bolt and remove.
앫
Never start the engine when the vehicle
is raised.
왘
Replace this wheel bolt with alignment
bolt 1 supplied in the tool kit.
앫
Never lie down under the raised vehicle.
왘
Remove the remaining bolts.
Insert the jack arm fully into the jack support tube hole up to the stop. Otherwise the
vehicle may fall from the jack and cause personal injury or damage to the vehicle.
!
Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
This could result in damage to the bolt
and wheel hub threads.
왘
Remove the wheel.
341
Practical hints
Flat tire
Mounting the new wheel
왘
Clean contact surfaces of wheel and
wheel hub.
!
To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
against hub and hold it there while installing first wheel bolt.
왘
Guide the spare wheel onto the alignment bolt and push it on.
왘
Insert wheel bolts and tighten them
slightly.
왘
Unscrew the alignment bolt, install last
wheel bolt and tighten slightly.
Warning!
Warning!
G
Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or rusted.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired immediately. Do not continue to drive
under these circumstances! Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance.
Incorrect mounting bolts or improperly
tightened mounting bolts can cause the
wheel to come off. This could cause an accident. Be sure to use the correct mounting
bolts.
342
G
Use only genuine equipment
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. They are identified by the Mercedes star. Other wheel bolts
may come loose.
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could
tip over.
Lowering the vehicle
왘
Lower vehicle by turning crank counterclockwise until vehicle is resting fully on its own weight.
왘
Remove the jack.
1-5 Wheel bolts
왘
Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, following the diagonal sequence illustrated (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight.
Observe a tightening torque of
110 ft. lb. (150 Nm).
Warning!
G
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. The wheels could come
loose if they are not tightened to a torque of
컄컄
110 ft.lb. (150 Nm).
Practical hints
Flat tire
컄컄 왘
왘
Before storing the jack in the trunk, it
should be fully collapsed, with handle
folded in.
Place the wheel bolt wrench, alignment
bolt and jack back in the vehicle tool kit
in the trunk and close the covering lid.
Replacing jack support tube cover
왘
Slide tongue of cover under the upper
edge of the tube opening.
왘
Applying even pressure, press cover
until it snaps into place. Be careful not
to damage the locking tabs or clamp
the plastic retaining strap.
!
You can also screw the faulty wheel
down into the spare wheel well in the
trunk.
Do not activate the tire inflation pressure monitor until the depressurized
tire is no longer in the vehicle.
343
Practical hints
Battery
Battery
Warning!
!
G
Never loosen or detach battery terminal clamps while the engine is running
or the SmartKey is in the starter switch.
Otherwise the alternator and other
electronic components could be severely damaged.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting,
you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water and seek
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking etc.
Have the battery checked regularly by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Refer to Service Booklet for maintenance intervals or contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further
information.
G
Warning!
G
앫
you will no longer be able to turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch and
pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button (if so equipped) on the selector
lever will have no effect
앫
the selector lever will remain locked in
position P
Do not place metal objects on the battery as
this could result in a short circuit.
Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk
of acid burns in the event of an accident.
344
1 Battery cover
왘
With a disconnected battery
Warning!
The battery is located on the right side of
the trunk under the battery cover.
Pull on the outer, right-hand side of
cover 1 and remove it in the direction
of the arrow.
Practical hints
Battery
왘
Detach the positive terminal of the battery with the 10 mm open-end wrench.
Removing the battery
2 Positive terminal
3 Negative terminal
Disconnecting the battery
왘
Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘
Open the trunk lid (컄 page 95).
왘
Remove the battery cover 1.
왘
Detach negative terminal 3 of battery
with 10 mm open-end wrench from the
vehicle tool kit.
왘
Remove cover from the positive
terminal 2.
Warning!
G
Never charge a battery while still installed in
the vehicle. Gases may escape during charging and cause explosions that may result in
paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.
왘
Remove the screw securing the battery.
왘
Remove the battery support and
bracket.
Reconnecting the battery
왘
Take out the battery.
왘
Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘
Connect the positive lead and fasten its
cover 2.
왘
Connect negative lead 3.
Charging and reinstalling battery
왘
왘
Charge battery in accordance with the
instructions of the battery charger
manufacturer.
Reinstall the charged battery. Follow
the previously described steps in reverse order.
!
Never invert the terminal connections.
!
The battery, its filler caps and the vent
tube must always be securely installed
when the vehicle is in operation.
345
Practical hints
Battery
i
The following procedures must be carried out following any interruption of
battery power (e.g. due to reconnecting):
앫
Set the clock (see COMAND operator’s manual).
앫
Resynchronize the ESP
(컄 page 310).
앫
Resynchronize side windows
(컄 page 191).
앫
Resynchronize sliding/pop-up roof
(컄 page 195).
앫
Resynchronize rear seats if they
were adjusted five seconds or less
before the battery was disconnected .
346
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Large 12-volt storage batteries contain
lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
Practical hints
Jump starting
Jump starting
Warning!
G
Failure to follow these directions will cause
damage to the electronic components, and
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting
or jump starting, you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water, and seek
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and very explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking etc.
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery
can result in it exploding, causing personal
injury.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
If the battery is discharged, the engine can
be started with jumper cables and the battery of another vehicle. Observe the following:
앫
Jump starting should only be performed
when the engine and catalytic converter are cold.
앫
Do not start the engine if the battery is
frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.
앫
Only jump start from batteries with the
same voltage rating (12V). Jump starting with a more powerful battery could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system,
which will not be covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
앫
Use only jumper cables with sufficient
cross-section and insulated terminal
clamps.
앫
Always make sure that the jumper cables are not on or near pulleys, fans or
other parts that move when an engine
is started or running.
!
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts.
Do not attempt to start the engine using a battery quick charge unit.
If engine does not run after several unsuccessful starting attempts, have it
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Excessive unburned fuel generated by
repeated failed starting attempts may
damage the catalytic converter and
may present a fire risk.
Make sure the jumper cables do not
have loose or missing insulation.
Make sure the cable clamps do not
touch any other metal part while the
other end is still attached to a battery.
347
Practical hints
Jump starting
Warning!
G
Keep flames or sparks away from battery.
Do not smoke.
Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries
(컄 page 344).
Make sure that the two vehicles do not
touch.
왘
Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘
Apply parking brake.
왘
Shift gear selector lever to position P.
왘
Open the trunk lid.
왘
Remove battery cover (컄 page 344).
왘
Connect negative terminals 2 and 4 of
the batteries with the jumper cable.
Clamp cable to charged battery 4 first.
왘
Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
왘
1 Positive terminal of discharged battery
2 Negative terminal of discharged
battery
3 Positive terminal of charged battery
4 Negative terminal of charged battery
왘
Connect positive terminals 1 and 3 of
the batteries with the jumper cable.
Clamp cable to charged battery 3 first.
!
Never invert the terminal connections.
348
Start engine of the vehicle with the
charged battery and run at idle speed.
You can now turn on the electrical consumers. Do not turn on the lights under
any circumstances.
The battery is located on the right side of
the trunk under the battery cover
(컄 page 344).
왘
왘
Remove the jumper cables first from
negative terminals 2 and 4 and then
from positive terminals 1 and 3.
You can now turn on the lights.
왘
Have the battery checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
!
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Towing the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the
ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel
lift/dolly equipment. This method is preferable to other types of towing.
!
Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equipment with SmartKey in starter switch
turned to position 0.
Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
Towing with sling-type equipment over
bumpy roads will damage radiator and
supports.
To prevent damage during transport,
do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or
suspension parts.
Switch off the tow-away alarm
(컄 page 84) and the automatic central
locking (컄 page 102).
!
!
Vehicles with automatic transmission
and/or 4MATIC*:
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
If the vehicle is towed with the front
axle raised (not permissible for vehicles
with 4MATIC*), the engine must be
shut off (SmartKey in starter switch
position 0 or 1). Otherwise the ESP will
immediately be engaged and will apply
the rear wheel brakes.
When circumstances do not permit the
recommended towing methods, the vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the
ground or front wheels raised (except vehicles with 4MATIC*) only so far as necessary to have the vehicle moved to a safe
location where the recommended towing
methods can be employed.
!
Vehicles with 4MATIC*:
Do not tow with one axle raised. Doing
so could damage the transfer case,
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, the selector lever must
be in position N and the SmartKey
must be in starter switch position 2.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground or the front axle raised,
the vehicle may be towed only for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a
speed not to exceed 30 mph
(50 km/h).
All wheels must be on or off the ground.
Observe instructions for towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground.
349
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
!
To be certain to avoid a possibility of
damage to the drive train, however, we
recommend the drive shaft be disconnected at the rear axle drive flange (vehicles with 4MATIC*: disconnected at
the front and rear axle drive flanges) for
any towing beyond a short tow to a
nearby garage.
Warning!
G
If circumstances require towing the vehicle
with all wheels on the ground, always tow
with a tow bar if:
앫
the engine will not run
앫
there is a malfunction in the power supply or in the vehicle’s electrical system
as that will be necessary to adequately control the towed vehicle.
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground, make certain that the SmartKey
is in starter switch position 2.
If the SmartKey is left in starter switch
position 0 for an extended period of time, it
can no longer be turned in the switch. In this
case, the steering is locked. To unlock, remove SmartKey from starter switch and reinsert.
350
Warning!
G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
i
To signal turns while being towed with
the hazard warning flasher in use, turn
SmartKey in starter switch to
position 2 and activate the combination switch for the left or right turn signal in the usual manner – only the
selected turn signal will operate.
Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard warning flasher will operate again.
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
!
i
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, please note the following:
The selector lever will remain locked in
position P and the SmartKey will not
turn in the starter switch if the battery
is disconnected or discharged. See
notes on the battery (컄 page 344) or
on jump starting (컄 page 347).
With the automatic central locking activated and the SmartKey in starter
switch position 2, or KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button (if so equipped) in
position 2, the vehicle doors lock if the
left front wheel as well as the right rear
wheel are turning at vehicle speeds of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or
more.
Installing towing eye bolt
2 Cover on right side of rear bumper
Removing cover
Switch off the tow-away alarm
(컄 page 84).
To prevent the vehicle doors from locking, deactivate the automatic central
locking (컄 page 102).
Towing of the vehicle should only be
done using the properly installed towing eye bolt. Never attach tow cable,
tow rope or tow rod to vehicle chassis,
frame or suspension parts.
왘
Press mark on cover in direction of arrow.
왘
Lift cover off to reveal threaded hole for
towing eye bolt.
Installing towing eye bolt
1 Cover on right side of front bumper
왘
Take towing eye bolt and wheel wrench
out of trunk (컄 page 322).
왘
Screw towing eye bolt clockwise into
its stop and tighten with wheel wrench.
351
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Removing towing eye bolt
왘
Loosen towing eye bolt counterclockwise with wheel wrench.
왘
Unscrew towing eye bolt.
왘
Store towing eye bolt and wheel
wrench in trunk.
Installing cover
왘
Fit cover and snap into place.
352
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuses
Your vehicle’s electrical fuses are located
in various fuse boxes:
앫
In the dashboard on the passenger side
앫
In the rear passenger compartment under the right rear seat
앫
In the engine compartment on the driver’s side
앫
In the engine compartment on the passenger side
i
Only install fuses that have been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz and
that have the specified amperage rating.
Never attempt to repair or bridge a
blown fuse. Have the cause determined
and remedied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Fuse boxes in passenger compartment
There are two fuse boxes. One fuse box is
located in the dashboard on the front passenger side. An additional fuse box is located under the right rear seat.
Fuse box in dashboard
The following implements are located in
the vehicle tool kit in the trunk
(컄 page 322):
앫
The fuse chart. The amperages of the
fuses are also given there.
앫
Spare fuses
앫
Special fuse extractor
1 Recess in the cover
2 Cover
353
Practical hints
Fuses
!
Do not use sharp objects such as a
screw driver to open the fuse box in the
dashboard, as this could damage the
dashboard.
Fuse box in the rear passenger
compartment
Opening
왘
Open the front passenger door.
왘
Insert flat, blunt object as a lever in
recess 1 on the edge of cover 2.
왘
Loosen cover 2 from the dashboard using lever.
1 Cover
왘
Using your hands, pull cover 2 in the direction of the arrow and remove.
Opening
왘
Pull cover 1 away from fuse box
(arrow).
왘
Remove cover rearward.
Closing
왘
Press cover 2 back onto the dashboard.
Closing
왘
354
Press cover back on until it engages.
Fuse boxes in engine compartment
There are fuse boxes located in the engine
compartment on both the driver’s and
front passenger side in front of the firewall
(dividing wall between engine compartment and passenger compartment).
1 Fuse box cover, driver’s side
2 Slide
Practical hints
Fuses
Closing
왘
Replace cover 1 and press it down by
hand.
왘
Push both slides 2 to the ‹ symbol.
!
1 Fuse box cover, front passenger side
2 Slide
The cover must fit properly and the
slide must be positioned at the ‹
symbol, as moisture or dirt may impair
the functionality of the fuses.
Emergency engine shut-down
If the engine can no longer be stopped using the SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button, the engine can be
turned off by withdrawing two fuses.
For easy removal of fuses, use the fuse
extractor (supplied with vehicle tool kit) to
pull out the fuses marked on the fuse chart
as "ENGINE EMERGENCY STOP".
The fuse chart is also located in the vehicle
tool kit (컄 page 322).
Opening
왘
Push both slides 2 to the Πsymbol.
왘
Remove cover 1.
355
356
Technical data
Spare parts service
Warranty coverage
Identification labels
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Engine
Rims and tires
Electrical system
Main dimensions
Weights
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Consumer information
357
Technical data
Spare parts service
Spare parts service
The “Technical data” section provides the
necessary technical data for your vehicle.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers
maintain a stock of original spare parts required for maintenance and repair work. In
addition, strategically located parts distribution centers provide quick and reliable
parts service.
More than 300 000 different spare parts
for Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Mercedes-Benz original spare parts are
subjected to stringent quality inspections.
Each part has been specifically developed,
manufactured or selected for and adapted
to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, Mercedes-Benz original spare
parts should be installed.
358
!
The use of non-genuine parts and accessories not authorized by
Mercedes-Benz could damage the vehicle, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or
could compromise the vehicle’s durability or safety.
Technical data
Warranty coverage
Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of
the warranties printed in the Service and
Warranty Information booklet. Your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will exchange or repair any defective parts originally installed on the vehicle in accordance
with the terms of the following warranties:
앫
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
앫
Emission System Warranty
앫
Emission Performance Warranty
앫
California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control Systems
Warranty
Replacement parts and accessories are
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Spare Parts
and Accessories warranties, copies of
which are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet
Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Information booklet, have your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. It will be mailed to you.
359
Technical data
Identification labels
Identification labels
1 Certification label
(below driver’s door latch)
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
(below right rear passenger seat)
3 Engine number (engraved on engine)
4 VIN, visible (lower edge of windshield)
5 Emission control label
6 Information label, California version
Vacuum line routing for emission control system
When ordering spare parts, please specify
vehicle identification and engine numbers.
360
Technical data
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
S 430 / S 500
1 Automatic belt tensioner
2 Power steering pump
3 Air conditioning compressor
4 Crankshaft
5 Coolant pump
6 Generator (alternator)
7 Idler pulley
S 55 AMG
The S 55 AMG has two poly-V-belts (belt one
shown in purple/belt two shown in black).
1 Idler pulley
2 Automatic belt tensioner
3 Power steering pump
4 Air conditioning compressor
5 Crankshaft
6 Coolant pump
7 Generator (alternator)
8 Idler pulley
9 Automatic belt tensioner
10 Super charger
S 600
1 Automatic belt tensioner
2 Power steering pump
3 Air conditioning compressor
4 Crankshaft
5 Coolant pump
6 Generator (alternator)
7 Idler pulley
8 Idler pulley
9 Idler pulley
361
Technical data
Engine
Engine
S 430 (220.070, 220.170)1
S 500 (220.175)1
S 430 4MATIC (220.183)1
S 500 4MATIC (220.184)1
Engine
113
113
Mode of operation
4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders
8
8
Bore
3.54 in. (89.90 mm)
3.82 in. (97.00 mm)
Stroke
3.31 in. (84.00 mm)
3.31 in. (84.00 mm)
Model
cm3)
303.0 cu.in. (4966 cm3)
Total piston displacement
260.3 cu.in. (4266
Compression ratio
10:1
10:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349
275 hp/5750 rpm
(205 kW/5750 rpm)
302 hp/5500 rpm
(225 kW/5500 rpm)
Maximum torque
acc. to SAE J 1349
295 ft.lb./2700 rpm
(400 Nm/3000 rpm)
339 ft.lb./2700 rpm
(460 Nm/2700 rpm)
Maximum engine speed
6000 rpm
6000 rpm
Firing order
1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt
7 ft 10 in. (2390 mm)
7 ft 10 in. (2390 mm)
1
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and
special equipment.
362
Technical data
Engine
Model
S 55 AMG (220.174)1
S 600 (220.176)1
Engine
113
275
Mode of operation
4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders
8
12
Bore
3.82 in. (97.00 mm)
3.23 in. (82.00 mm)
Stroke
3.60 in. (92.00 mm)
3.43 in. (87.00 mm)
Total piston displacement
331.8 cu.in. (5439 cm )
336.4 cu.in. (5513 cm3)
Compression ratio
9:1
9:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349
493 hp/6 100 rpm
(368 kW/6100 rpm)
493 hp/5000 rpm
(368 kW/5000 rpm)
Maximum torque
acc. to SAE J 1349
517 ft.lb./2750-4000 rpm
(700 Nm/2750-4000 rpm)
590 ft.lb./1 800-3500 rpm
(800 Nm/1 800-3500 rpm)
Maximum engine speed
6500 rpm
5950 rpm
Firing order
1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
1-12-5-8-3-10-6-7-2-11-4-9
Poly-V-belt
Belt 1: 4 ft 3 in. (1289 mm)
Belt 2: 8 ft 1 in. (2462 mm)
7 ft 7 in. (2335 mm)
1
3
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and
special equipment.
363
Technical data
Rims and tires
Rims and tires
Use only tires and rims which have been
specifically developed for your vehicle and
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Other tires and rims can have detrimental
effects, such as:
앫
Poor handling characteristics
앫
Increased noise
앫
Increased fuel consumption
364
!
i
Moreover, tires and rims not approved
by Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit dimensional variations and different tire deformation characteristics
that could cause them to come into
contact with the vehicle body or axle
parts. Damage to the tires or the vehicle can be the result.
Further information on tires and rims is
available at any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. A tire inflation
pressure table is located on the fuel filler cap of the vehicle. The tire pressure
should be checked regularly and
should only be adjusted on cold tires.
Follow tire manufacturer’s maintenance recommendation included with
vehicle.
Technical data
Rims and tires
Same size tires
S 430, S 430 4MATIC
S 500, S 500 4MATIC
(except Sport Package*)
S 600
(except Sport Package)
S 430, S 500
S 600
(Sport Package*)
S 55 AMG
Rims (light alloy)
7½ J x17 H2
8 J x18 H21
8 J x18 H21 or 8½ J x18 EH22
Wheel offset
1.81 in. (46 mm)
1.73 in. (44 mm)
Summer tires (radial-ply tires)
-
All-season tires (radial-ply tires) 225/55 R17 97H M+S AS
Winter tires (radial-ply tires)
1
2
225/55 R17 97H M+S
245/45 R18 96Y
1.73 in. (44mm)
1
-
-
M+S1
245/45 R18 100V XL
245/45 R18 96H M+S1
or 245/45 R18 100V XL M+S1 or
245/45 R18 96H M+S1
For use with snow chains contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Must not be used with snow chains
365
Technical data
Rims and tires
S 430 4MATIC, S 500 4MATIC
(Sport Package*)
Rims (light alloy)
8 J x18 H21,2 or 8½ J x18 EH23
Wheel offset
1.73 in. (44 mm)
Summer tires (radial-ply tires)
245/45 R18 100Y XL
Winter tires (radial-ply tires)
245/45 R18 100V XL M+S2 or
245/45 R18 96H M+S2
1
For use with winter tires only
For use with snow chains contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
3
Must not be used with snow chains
2
Mixed size tires
S 430 , S 500, S 600 (Sport Package*)
Front axle: AMG light alloy rims
Wheel offset
8½ J x 18
EH21
8½ J x 18 EH21
1.73 in. (44 mm)
1.73 in. (44 mm)
Summer tires (radial-ply tires) 245/45 R18 100Y XL
Rear axle:
EH21
AMG light alloy rims
9 J x 18
Wheel offset
1.73 in. (44 mm)
Summer tires (radial-ply tires) 265/40 R18 101Y
1
Must not be used with snow chains
366
S 55 AMG
245/45 R18 100Y XL
9 J x 18 EH21
1.73 in. (44 mm)
XL1
265/40 R18 101Y XL1
Technical data
Rims and tires
Spare wheel
S 430, S 430 4MATIC
S 500, S 500 4MATIC
(except Sport Package*)
S 430, S 430 4MATIC, S 500, S 500 4MATIC
(Sport Package*)
S 600, S 55 AMG
Rims (light alloy)
7½ J x 17 H2
8 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset
2.0 in. (51 mm)
1.73 in. (44 mm)
Summer tires (radial-ply tires)
-
245/45 R18 96Y
All-season tires (radial-ply tires) 225/55 R17 97H M+S AS
-
367
Technical data
Electrical system
Electrical system
Model
S 430, S 500
S 55 AMG
S 600
Generator (alternator)
14 V/150 A
14 V/180 A
14 V/180 A
Starter motor
12 V/1.7 kW
12 V/1.8 kW
12 V/1.7 kW
Battery
12 V/95 Ah
12 V/95 Ah
12 V/95 Ah
Spark plugs
Bosch F 8 DPP332
Beru 14 FGH 8 DPUR X 2
NGK PFR 5 R-11
NGK ILFR 6 A
NGK IFR 6 Q-G
Electrode gap
0.039 in. (1.0 mm)
0.031 in. (0.8 mm)
0.028 in. (0.7 mm)
Tightening torque
15 – 22 ft.lb. (20 – 30 Nm)
15 – 22 ft.lb. (20 – 30 Nm)
15 – 22 ft.lb. (20 – 30 Nm)
368
Technical data
Main dimensions
Main dimensions
Model
S 430 (220.070)
S 430 (220.170)
S 55 AMG (220.174)
S 430 4MATIC (220.183)
S 500 (220.175)
S 500 4MATIC (220.184)
S 600 (220.176)
Overall vehicle length
198.3 in. (5038 mm)
203.1 in. (5158 mm)
203.1 in. (5158 mm)
203.1 in. (5158 mm)
Overall vehicle width
73.0 in. (1855 mm)
73.0 in. (1855 mm)
73.0 in. (1855 mm)
73.0 in. (1855 mm)
Overall vehicle height
57.2 in. (1454 mm)
57.2 in. (1454 mm)
57.2 in. (1454 mm)
57.4 in. (1457 mm)
Wheelbase
116.7 in. (2965 mm)
121.5 in. (3085 mm)
121.5 in. (3085 mm)
121.5 in. (3085 mm)
Track, front
62.0 in. (1574 mm)
62.0 in. (1574 mm)
62.1 in. (1578 mm)
62.0 in. (1574 mm)
Track, rear
62.0 in. (1574 mm)
62.0 in. (1574 mm)
62.0 in. (1574 mm)
62.0 in. (1574 mm)
369
Technical data
Weights
Weights
Max. roof load
220 lb. (100 kg)
Max. trunk load
220 lb. (100 kg)
370
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Capacities
Engine with oil filter
Vehicle components and their respective
lubricants must match. Therefore use only
brands tested and recommended by us.
Model
Capacity
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
S 430
S 500
S 55 AMG
S 600
8.5 US qt. (8.0 l)
8.5 US qt. (8.0 l)
7.9 US qt. (7.5 l)
9.5 US qt. (9.0 l)
Recommended engine oils
MB Automatic Transmission Oil1
S 600
9.1 US qt. (8.6 l)
8.1 US qt. (7.7 l)
1.7 US qt. (1.6 l)
Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90
Automatic transmission
Rear axle
Please refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet, or inquire at your
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Front axle
S 430 4MATIC 0.63 US qt. (0.6 l)
S 500 4MATIC
Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90
Transfer case
S 430 4MATIC 0.62 US qt. (0.585 l)
S 500 4MATIC
MB Automatic Transmission Oil1
Hydraulic system for ADS or ABC
4.2 US qt. (4.0 l)
MB Hydraulic Fluids
Power steering
approx. 1.1 US qt. (1.0 l)
MB Power Steering Fluid (Pentosin
CHF 11S)
Front wheel hubs
approx. 2.1 oz. (60 g) each High-temperature roller bearing
grease
1
MB part no. 001 989 21 03 10
371
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Model
Brake system
Capacity
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
0.7 US qt. (0.7 l)
MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+)
Cooling system
S 430
S 500
S 55 AMG
S 600
approx. 12.1 US qt. (11.5 l) MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
approx. 12.1 US qt. (11.5 l)
approx. 14.3 US qt. (13.5 l)
approx. 12.9 US qt. (12.2 l)
Low temperature cooling system
S 600
1.31 US qt. (1.24 l)
Fuel tank
including a reserve of
S 430, S 500, 23.2 US gal. (88.0 l)
and
2.9 US gal. (11.0 l))
S 55 AMG
Premium unleaded gasoline:
Posted Octane 91
(Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON)
S 600
Posted Octane 93
(Avg. of 98 RON/88 MON)
Air conditioning system
Windshield washer and
headlamp cleaning system:
1
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
R-134a refrigerant and special PAG
lubricant oil (never R-12)
7.1 US qt. (6.7 l)
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1
Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing. Follow suggested mixing ratios (컄 page 377).
372
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Engine oils
Engine oil additives
Brake fluid
Engine oils are specifically tested for their
suitability in our engines. Therefore, only
use engine oils recommended by
Mercedes-Benz. Information on recommended brands is available in the Factory
Approved Service Products pamphlet, or at
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.
They may be harmful to the engine operation.
Please follow FSS recommendations for
scheduled oil changes. Failure to do so
could result in engine damage not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Air conditioning refrigerant
During vehicle operation, the boiling point
of the brake fluid is continuously reduced
through the absorption of moisture from
the atmosphere. Under extremely strenuous operating conditions, this moisture
content can lead to the formation of bubbles in the system, thus reducing the system’s efficiency.
Damage or malfunctions resulting from
blending oil additives are not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
lubricating oil is used in the air conditioning system.
Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lubricating oil, as otherwise damage to the
system will occur.
Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced every two years, preferably in the
spring.
Only brake fluid approved by
Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will provide you with additional information.
373
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Premium unleaded gasoline
!
To maintain the engine’s durability and
performance, premium unleaded gasoline must be used. If premium unleaded
gasoline is not available and low octane
fuel is used, follow these precautions:
앫
Have the fuel tank only partially
filled with unleaded regular and fill
up with premium unleaded as soon
as possible.
앫
Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt
acceleration.
앫
Do not exceed an engine speed of
3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded
with a light load such as two persons and no luggage.
앫
374
Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in
mountainous terrain.
Fuel requirements
Gasoline additives
Use only premium unleaded gasoline
meeting ASTM standard D 439:
A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends only the
use of quality gasoline containing additives
that prevent the build-up of carbon deposits.
앫
The octane number (posted at the
pump) must be 91 min (93 for S 600).
It is an average of both the Research
(R) octane number and the Motor (M)
octane number: (R+M)/2). This is also
known as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be
used provided the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed
10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.
The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not
exceed 3% plus additional co-solvents.
Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is
not allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10%
ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be
used.
These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements, such as resistance to spark
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
After an extended period of using fuels
without such additives, carbon deposits
can build up especially on the intake valves
and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance problems such as:
앫
Warm-up hesitation
앫
Unstable idle
앫
Knocking/pinging
앫
Misfire
앫
Power loss
Do not blend any specific fuel additives
with fuel. This only results in unnecessary
cost and may be harmful to the engine operation.
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Damage or malfunctions resulting from
poor fuel quality or from blending specific
fuel additives are not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Coolants
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides:
앫
Corrosion protection
앫
Freeze protection
앫
Boiling protection (by increasing the
boiling point)
The cooling system was filled at the factory
with a coolant providing freeze protection
to approximately -22°F (-30°C) and corrosion protection.
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to
-22°F (-30°C), the boiling point of the coolant in the pressurized cooling system is
reached at approximately 266°F (130°C).
The coolant solution must be used
year-round to provide the necessary corrosion protection and increase boil-over protection. You should have it replaced every
15 years or 150 000 miles (250000 km),
whichever comes first.
Coolant system design and coolant used
stipulate the replacement interval. The
above replacement interval is only applicable if MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze
solution or other Mercedes-Benz approved
products of equal specification (see
Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet) are used to renew the coolant concentration or bring it back up to the proper
level.
than 55% anticorrosion/antifreeze [freeze
protection to approximately - 49°F
(-45°C)], the engine temperature will increase due to the lower heat transfer capability of the solution. Therefore, do not use
more than this amount of
anticorrosion/antifreeze.
If the coolant level is low, water and
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
should be used to bring it up to the proper
level (have cooling system checked for
signs of leakage).
The water in the cooling system must meet
minimum requirements, which are usually
satisfied by normal drinking water. If you
are not sure about the water quality, consult your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
To provide important corrosion protection,
the solution must be at least 45%
anticorrosion/antifreeze [equivalent to
freeze protection to approximately - 22°F
(-30°C)]. If you use a solution that is more
375
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts. The use of aluminum components in motor vehicle engines
necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze
coolant used in such engines be specifically formulated to protect the aluminum
parts. (Failure to use such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will result in a significantly shortened service life.)
Therefore, the following product is strongly
recommended for use in your vehicle:
Mercedes-Benz 325.0
Anticorrosion/Antifreeze Agent.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
Model
Approx. freeze protection
– 35°F (– 37°C)
– 49°F (– 45°C)
S 430
S 500
6.1 US qt. (5.75 l)
6.7 US qt. (6.3 l)
S 55 AMG
7.1 US qt. (7.75 l)
7.8 US qt. (7.4 l)
S 600
6.3 US qt. (6.0 l)
7.0 US qt. (6.6 l)
376
Before the start of the winter season (or
once a year in hot southern regions), you
should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
concentration checked. The coolant is also
regularly checked each time you bring your
vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for service.
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Windshield and headlamp washer
system
Both the windshield and headlamp washer
systems are supplied from the windshield
washer fluid reservoir.
The washer fluid reservoir has a capacity of
approximately:
앫
7.1 US qt. (6.7 l) in vehicles with headlamp cleaning system* or heated reservoir
앫
3.2 US qt. (3.0 l) in vehicles without
headlamp cleaning system
왘
Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate and water (or concentrate and commercially available
premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures).
Windshield and headlamp washer fluid
mixing ratio
For temperatures above freezing, use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S”
and water:
앫
Warning
G
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may
burn. You can be seriously burned.
1 part “S” to 100 parts water
[40 ml “S” to 1 gallon (4 liters) water].
For temperatures below freezing, use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S”
and commercially available premixed
windshield washer solvent/antifreeze:
앫
1 part “S” to 100 parts solvent
[40 ml “S” to 1 gallon (4 liters) solvent].
377
Technical data
Consumer information
Consumer information
The following text is published as required
of all manufacturers of passenger cars under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the “National
Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of
1966.”
Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Tread wear
Traction
Temperature
200
AA
A
All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
378
Tread wear
Traction
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1½) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly
from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
The traction grades - from highest to lowest - are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning
G
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Technical data
Consumer information
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a level
of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
Warning
G
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
excessive heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
379
380
Technical terms
ABS
(Antilock Brake System)
Prevents the wheels from locking up
during braking so that the vehicle can
continue to be steered.
Alignment bolt
Metal pin with thread. The centering
pin is an aid used when changing a tire
to align the wheel with the wheel hub.
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
system
This system detects if a special system
compatible child restraint seat is installed on the front passenger seat. The
system will automatically deactivate
the front passenger-side airbag when
such a seat is properly installed (indicator lamp PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF in
the center console lights up). See your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
availability.
BabySmartTM compatible child seats
Special restraint system for children.
The sensor system for the passenger
seat prevents deployment of the front
passenger-side airbag if a
BabySmartTM compatible child seat is
installed.
CAC
(Customer Assistance Center)
Mercedes-Benz customer service center, which can help you with any questions about your vehicle and provide
assistance in the event of a breakdown.
BAS
(Brake Assist System)
System for potentially reducing braking
distances in emergency braking situations. The system is activated when it
senses an emergency based on how
fast the brake is applied.
CAN system
(Controller Area Network)
Data bus network serving to control vehicle functions such as door locking or
windshield wiping.
Bi-xenon headlamps*
Headlamps which use an electric arc as
the light source and produce a more intense light than filament headlamps.
Bi-xenon headlamps produce low beam
and high beam.
Cockpit
All instruments, switches, buttons and
indicator/warning lamps in the passenger compartment needed for vehicle
operation and monitoring.
381
Technical terms
COMAND
(Cockpit Management and Data System)
Information and operating center for
vehicle sound and communications
systems, including the radio and navigation, as well as for other optional
equipment (CD changer, telephone,
etc.).
Control system
The control system is used to call up
vehicle information and to change
component settings. Information and
messages appear in the multifunction
display. The driver uses the buttons on
the multifunction steering wheel to
navigate through the system and to adjust settings.
Cruise control
Driving convenience system for automatically maintaining the vehicle speed
set by the driver.
382
Distronic*
A driving convenience cruise control
system which helps the driver maintain
a pre-selected speed:
앫
If there is no vehicle directly ahead,
the system operates in the same
way as conventional ->cruise control.
앫
If a slower moving vehicle is ahead,
Distronic will reduce your vehicle
speed to the extent permitted by reduced throttle and up to 20% braking power to maintain the preset
minimum following distance.
Engine number
The number set by the manufacturer
and stamped on the cylinder block to
uniquely identify each engine produced.
Engine oil viscosity
Measurement for the inner friction (viscosity) of the oil at different temperatures. The higher the temperature an
oil can tolerate without becoming thin,
or the lower the temperature it can tolerate without becoming viscous, the
better the viscosity.
ESP
(Electronic Stability Program)
Improves vehicle handling and directional stability.
ETD
(Emergency Tensioning Device)
Device which deploys in certain frontal
and rear collisions exceeding the system's threshold to tighten the seat
belts.
->SRS
Technical terms
FSS
(Flexible Service System)
Service indicator in the multifunction
display that informs the driver when
the next vehicle maintenance service is
due.
Gear range
Number of gears which are available to
the automatic transmission for shifting.
The automatic gear shifting process
can be adapted to specific operating
conditions using the selector lever.
GPS
(Global Positioning System)
Satellite-based system for relaying
geographic location information to and
from vehicles equipped with special receivers. Employs CD digital maps for
navigation.
Instrument cluster
The displays and indicator/warning
lamps in the driver’s field of vision, including the tachometer, speedometer,
engine temperature and fuel gauge.
KEYLESS-GO*
System for entering and operating the
vehicle without the use of a SmartKey.
Kickdown
Depressing the accelerator past the
point of resistance shifts the transmission down to the lowest possible gear.
This very quickly accelerates the vehicle and should not be used for normal
acceleration needs.
Lock button
Button on the door which indicates
whether the door is locked or unlocked. Pushing the lock button down
on an individual door from inside will
lock that door.
Memory function*
Used to store three individual seat,
steering wheel and mirror positions for
each SmartKey or, if so equipped, KEYLESS-GO* card.
Menu
The control system displays are arranged in menus. Each menu contains
a number of commands for particular
systems. In the Audio menu, for example, you will find the commands Select
radio station or Operate CD player.
Using commands, you can directly
change the settings for your vehicle.
MON
(Motor Octane Number)
The Motor Octane Number for gasoline
as determined by a standardized method. It is an indication of a gasoline's
ability to resist undesired detonation
(knocking). The average of both the
MON (Motor Octane Number) and
->RON (Research Octane Number) is
posted at the pump, also known as ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Multifunction display
Display field in the speedometer used
to present information provided by the
control system.
383
Technical terms
Multifunction steering wheel
Steering wheel with buttons for operating the control system.
Overspeed range
Engine speeds within the red marking
of the tachometer dial. Avoid this engine speed range, as it may result in serious engine damage that is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Parktronic*
System which uses visual and acoustic
signals to assist the driver during parking maneuvers.
Poly-V-belt drive
Drives engine components (alternator,
AC compressor, etc.) from the engine.
Power train
Collective term designating all components used to generate and transmit
motive power to the drive axles, including:
앫
Engine
앫
Clutch/torque converter
앫
Transmission
앫
Transfer case
앫
Drive shaft
앫
Differential
앫
Axle shafts/axles
Program mode selector switch
Used to switch the automatic transmission between standard operation S and
comfort operation C.
S 55 AMG with steering wheel gearshift
control and manual shift program: in
addition to S and C (see above), you
can use M for manual operation
384
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics
Transmission of vehicle data and current location to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center for subscribers to the Tele Aid service.
REST
(Residual engine heat utilization)
Feature that uses the engine heat
stored in the coolant to heat the vehicle interior for a short time after the engine has been turned off.
Restraint systems
Seat belts, belt tensioners, airbags and
child restraint systems. As independent systems, their protective functions complement one another.
Technical terms
RON
(Research Octane Number)
The Research Octane Number for gasoline as determined by a standardized
method. It is an indication of a gasoline's ability to resist undesired detonation (knocking). The average of both
the ->MON (Motor Octane Number)
and RON (Research Octane Number) is
posted at the pump, also known as ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Shift lock
When the vehicle is parked, this lock
prevents the transmission selector lever from being inadvertently moved out
of position P without the SmartKey
turned and the brake pedal depressed.
SRS
(Supplemental Restraint System)
Seat belts, emergency tensioning device and airbags. Though independent
systems, they are closely interfaced to
provide effective occupant protection.
Tele Aid System
(Telematic Alarm Identification on
Demand)
The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response: automatic and manual emergency, Roadside Assistance
and information. Tele Aid is initially activated by completing a subscriber
agreement and placing an acquaintance call.
The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the vehicle’s battery is
charged, properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is
available.
Telematics*
A combination of the terms “telecommunications” and “informatics.”
Tire speed rating
Part of a tire designation; indicates the
speed range for which a tire is approved.
Traction
Force exerted by the vehicle on the
road via the tires.
VIN
(Vehicle Identification Number)
The number set by the manufacturer
and stamped on the body to uniquely
identify each vehicle produced.
Voice control system*
Voice control system for car phones,
portable cell phones and audio systems (radio, CD, etc.).
Tightening torque
Force times lever arm (e.g. a lug
wrench) with which threaded fasteners
such as wheel bolts are tightened.
385
386
Index
A
ABC 213
Messages in display 297, 299
Setting vehicle level 212, 215
ABS 76, 381
Malfunction indicator lamp 291
Messages in display 298
Warning lamp 291
Accelerator position, automatic transmission 165
Accident
In case of 49
Activating
Air conditioner (cooling) 184
Air conditioning 184
Air recirculation mode 180
Anti-theft alarm system 83
Central locking (control system) 155
Charcoal filter 182
Distance warning function* 208
Distronic* 204
Easy-entry/exit feature 156
ESP 80
Exterior lamps 121
Exterior rear view mirror parking position 169
Front and rear fog lamp 121
Hazard warning flasher 124
Headlamps 46
High beams 123
Ignition 31
Ignition with KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button 33
Immobilizer 52, 82
Rear window defroster 183
Residual heat 185
Seat heater 111, 112
Seat ventilation* 110
Tow-away alarm 84
Windshield wipers 47
Activating steering wheel gearshift control
166
Downshifting 167
Upshifting 166
Adding
Coolant 269
Engine oil 266, 267
Additional turn signals 331
Adjustable air vents, rear passenger compartment 186
Adjusting 34
Air distribution 178
Air volume 179
Backrest tilt 36
Drive-dynamic seats 159
Exterior rear view mirror 39
Head restraint height 37
Head restraint tilt 37
Inside rear view mirror 38
Instrument cluster illumination 127
Lumbar support 104
Mirrors 38
Multicontour seat* 107
Power seat bench* 113
Seat cushion depth 36, 108
Seat cushion tilt 36
Seat fore and aft adjustment 36
Seat height 36
Seat in the lumbar region 108
Seat in the shoulder region 108
Seats 34
Steering column height 38
Steering column length 38
Steering wheel 37
387
Index
Air conditioning
Turning off 184
Turning on 184
Air pressure see Tire inflation pressure 273
Air recirculation mode 180
Activating 180
Deactivating 181
Air vents, rear passenger compartment
Adjustable 186
Air volume
Adjusting 179
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 295
Airbags 57
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system 69, 381
Children 58
Front 61
Passenger 61
Safety guidelines 60
Side impact 61
Window curtain 61
AIRMATIC 211
Alarm
Audible 75, 83
Canceling 83
Visual 82
388
Alarm system
Anti-theft 82
Alignment bolt 341
Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) 323, 381
Antiglare
Automatic 168
Antilock brake system (ABS) 381
Anti-theft alarm system
Arming 83
Canceling alarm 83
Disarming 83
Anti-theft systems 82
Anti-theft alarm system 82
Immobilizer 82
Tow-away alarm 84
Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning 255
Armrest
Storage compartment in front of 225,
226, 227, 228
Ashtray 232
At the gas station 261
ATF (Automatic Transmission Fluid) 268
AUDIO menu 135
Selecting radio station 136
Audio system
CD mode 137
Automatic antiglare for rear view mirror
168
Automatic central locking
Activating/deactivating (control system) 155
Automatic climate control 174
Air recirculation mode 180
Defrosting 180
Rear window defroster 183
Setting the temperature 177
Automatic headlamp mode 121
Automatic lighting control
Activating 125
Deactivating 125
Automatic locking when driving 102
Automatic transmission 160
Accelerator position 165
Activating steering wheel gearshift
control 166
Comfortable program mode 164
Deactivating steering wheel gearshift
control 167
Emergency operation (Limp Home
Mode) 165
Fluid level 268
Gear ranges 162
Index
Gear selector lever position 163
Gear shifting malfunctions 165
Kickdown 165
One-touch gearshifting 161
Program mode selector switch 164
Selector lever position 160
Starting the engine 43
Steering wheel gearshift control
(Speedshift) and manual shift program S 55 AMG 166
Transmission fluid 268
Winter program mode 166
Auxiliary cup holder 230
Inserting 230
Removing 231
Auxiliary fuse box 353
B
BabySmartTM
Airbag deactivation system 69
Compatible child seats 69, 381
Self-test 70
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system
381
Backrest supports
Lumbar region 108
Shoulder region 108
Backup lamps 332, 336
Bulbs 332
BAS 78, 381
Messages in display 300, 310
Batteries, KEYLESS-GO* card
Check lamp 92
Checking 92
Batteries, SmartKey
Changing 328, 329
Check lamp 88
Checking 88
Battery discharged
Jump starting 347
Battery, vehicle 270, 344
Charging 345
Disconnecting 345
Reconnecting 345
Reinstalling 345
Removing 345
Bi-Xenon headlamps* 381
Block heater* 279
Blocking
Rear window operation 74
Brake assist system (BAS) 381
Brake fluid 262, 373
Brake lamp bulbs 332
Brake lamp, high mounted 332
Brake pads
Message in display 302
Brakes 252
Warning lamp 293
Break-in period 250
Bulbs, replacing 331
Additional turn signals 331
Backup lamps 332
Brake lamps 332
Fog lamps 331
Front lamps 331
High beam 331
High mounted brake lamp 332
License plate lamps 332, 336
Low beam 331
Parking and standing lamps 331
Parking lamps 332, 335
Rear fog lamp 332
Rear fog lamps 336
Side marker lamps 331, 335
Standing lamps 331, 332, 335
Tail lamp assemblies 332, 336
Turn signal lamps 331, 332
389
Index
C
CAC (Customer Assistance Center) 381
Calling up
Distronic* settings 142
Range (distance to empty) 145
Service indicator 281
CAN system 381
Cargo tie-down hooks 223
Catalytic converter 259
CD changer* 137
CD mode 137
CD player
Operating 136
Center console 25
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 295
Centigrade
Setting temperature units 149
Central locking
Automatic 102
From inside 103
Switch 103
Switching on/off (control system) 155
Unlocking from inside 103
Central locking switch 103
390
Changing
Batteries (SmartKey) 328, 329
CDs 137
KEYLESS-GO* card setting 91
SmartKey setting 155
Vehicle level 213, 216
Charcoal filter 182
Activating 182
Deactivating 182
Charging
Vehicle battery 345
CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator
lamp 294
Checking
Batteries (KEYLESS-GO* card) 92
Brake fluid 262
Coolant level 268
Oil level 262, 264
Tire inflate pressure 262
Vehicle lighting 262
Vehicle lock status (KEYLESS-GO*
card) 93
Child safety 67
Airbags 58
Infant and child restraint systems 62,
67
LATCH child seat anchors 72
Cigarette lighter 233
Cleaning
Cup holder 287
Distronic* system sensor cover 285
Gear selector lever 287
Hard plastic trim items 287
Headlamps 171
Headliner 287
Instrument cluster 287
Leather upholstery 287
Light alloy wheels 286
Parktronic* system sensor 285
Plastic and rubber parts 287
Seat belts 287
Steering wheel 287
Windows 286
Windshield 48
Wiper blades 286
Index
Closing
Cup holder 230
Glove box 224
Hood 264
Side windows 189
Side windows with KEYLESS-GO* 93
Sliding/pop-up roof 192, 330
Sliding/pop-up roof with KEYLESS-GO* 93, 190, 194
Sliding/pop-up roof with SmartKey
194
Trunk 97
Windows 188
Windows with KEYLESS-GO* 190, 194
Windows with SmartKey 190
Closing from the inside
Trunk 99
Closing sliding/pop-up roof
In an emergency 330
Cockpit 20, 381
Cockpit management and data system
(COMAND*) 382
COMAND* 382
COMAND* see separate operating instructions
Combination switch 123
High beam flasher 46, 123
Turn signals 46
Windshield wipers 47
Comfortable driving
Transmission program mode 164
Consumer information 378
Control and operation of radio transmitters
258
Control system 130, 382
AUDIO menu 135
Convenience submenu 155
Display digital speedometer 135
Distronic* menu 142
Functions 131, 134
Instrument cluster submenu 149
Lighting submenu 150
Malfunction memory menu 145
Menus 133, 134, 383
Multifunction display 130
Multifunction steering wheel 131
NAVI menu 142
Selecting radio system 136
Settings menu 146
Standard display menu 135
Submenus 132, 134
TEL* menu 139
Trip computer menu 143
Vehicle submenu 154
Convenience submenu 155
Activating easy-entry/exit feature 156
Adjusting drive-dynamic seats 159
Setting key dependency 156
Setting parking position for exterior
rear view mirror 158
Coolant 268
Adding 269
Checking level 268
Messages in display 304, 305
Temperature 260
Temperature gauge 128
Warning lamp 305
Coolant level
Checking 268
Courtesy lighting 126
Cruise control 196, 382
Canceling 197
Driving downhill 197
Driving uphill 197
Fine adjustment 198
Lever 203
Setting current speed 197
391
Index
Setting to last stored speeds 198
Cruise control lever 196
Cup holder
Cleaning 287
Closing 230
In front seat armrest 229
In rear seat armrest 230
Opening 230
Customer Assistance Center (CAC) 381
D
Daytime running lamp mode 122
Setting 151
Deactivating
Air conditioner (cooling) 184
Air recirculation mode 181
Alarm 83
Anti-theft alarm system 83
Automatic climate control 183
Central locking (control system) 155
Charcoal filter 182
Cruise control 197
Defrost 180
Distance warning function* 208
Distronic* 206
Engine with the SmartKey 52
ESP 80
392
Exterior lamps 121
Hazard warning flasher 124
Headlamps 51
Immobilizer 82
Interior lighting delayed shut-off 153
Rear window defroster 183
Residual heat 185
Seat heater 111, 112
Seat ventilation* 110
Tow-away alarm 84
Deactivating steering wheel gearshift control 167
Deceleration
With Distronic* 202
Deep water see Standing water 257
Defrosting 180
Delayed shut-off
Interior lighting 153
Dialing
A number (telephone) 140
Difficulties
While driving see Problems while driving 48
Digital clock
Setting 23
Digital speedometer 135
Direction of rotation (tires) 273
Discharged battery
Jump starting 347
Disconnecting
Vehicle battery 345
Displays
Digital speedometer 135
Distronic* 201
Messages 265, 296
Service indicator 280
Showing malfunctions 145
Distance
Decreasing in Distronic* 207
Increasing in Distronic* 207
Setting in Distronic* 206
Warning function 207
Distance to empty (range)
Calling up 143
Distance warning function* 207
Activating 208
Deactivating 208
DTR* warning lamp 207
Intermittent warning sound 207
Symbol in multifunction display 142
Index
Distronic* 199, 382
Activated 203
Activating 204
Calling up settings 142, 202
Cleaning system sensor 285
Cruise control lever 203
Deactivated 203
Deactivating 206
Deceleration 202
Decreasing distance 207
Decreasing time interval 206
Displays in the speedometer dial 201
Distance warning function 207
Driving hints 208
Fine adjustment 205
Increasing distance 207
Increasing time interval 206
Intermittent signal tone 201
Menu 202
Messages in display 307
Sensor cover 285
Setting a higher speed 204
Setting a slower speed 205
Setting following distance 206
Setting the current speed 204
Setting to last stored speed ("Resume"
function) 205
Warning and indicator lamps 201
Door control panel 19, 28
Door unlock
With Tele Aid* 244
Doors
Message in display 307
Opening from inside vehicle 94
Opening from outside 87
Downhill driving
Cruise control 197
Downshifting 161, 167
Drink holder see Cup holder 229
Drinking and driving 251
Drive-dynamic seat* 109
Drive-dynamic seats
Adjusting 159
Driving
Abroad 258
General instructions 40, 251
Hydroplaning 255
In winter 256
Problems 48
Safety systems 76
Through standing water 257
With Distronic* 208
Driving abroad 258
Driving instructions 251
Driving off 253
Driving safety systems
4MATIC 81
ABS 76
BAS 78
ESP 78
Driving systems 196
ABC 213
AIRMATIC 211
Cruise control 196
Distronic* 199
Driving safety systems 76
Parktronic 218
Vehicle level control 212, 215
E
Easy-entry/exit feature 104
Activating 156
Interrupting movement 157
Electrical fuses 353
Electrical system 368
Electrically folding exterior rear view
mirrors 170
Electronic Stability Program see ESP 78,
382
393
Index
Emergency call system* 237
Emergency calls
Initiating an emergency call 240
With Tele Aid* 238
Emergency engine shut-down 355
Emergency operation (Limp Home Mode)
165
Emergency operations
Closing sliding/pop-up roof 330
Locking the vehicle 327
Opening sliding/pop-up roof 330
Remote door unlock 244
Unlocking the trunk lid 327
Unlocking the vehicle 326
Emergency tensioning device see ETD 65,
382
Emission control 259
Ending
A call (telephone) 140
Engine 362
Compartment 263
Message in display 294
Starting 43
Starting with KEYLESS-GO* 43
Starting with the Smartkey 43
Turning off with the Smartkey 52
394
Engine cleaning 284
Engine compartment 263
Fuse box in 354
Hood 263
Engine malfunction indicator lamp 294
Engine number 382
Engine oil 264
Adding 266, 267
Additives 373
Checking level 264
Consumption 264
Display messages 308
Filler neck 267
Messages in display 265, 309
Viscosity 382
Engine oil level see Oil level 262
Engine shut down in an emergency 355
Entry position
Messages in display 321
ESP 78, 382
Four wheel electronic traction system
with ESP 81
Switching off 80
Switching on 80
Warning lamp 290
ETD 382
Safety guidelines 60
ETD (Emergency tensioning device) 65
Exterior lamp switch 120
Exterior rear view mirrors
Adjusting 39
Folding electrically 170
Parking position for 158
F
Fahrenheit
Setting temperature units 149
Fastening the seat belts 40
Fine adjustment
Cruise control 198
Distronic* 205
First aid kit 322
Flat tire 339
Lowering the vehicle 342
Mounting the spare wheel 339
Preparing the vehicle 339
Flexible Service System (FSS) 280, 383
Fog lamp, rear 123, 332
Fog lamps
Replacing bulbs 331
Index
Fog lamps, front
Messages in display 314
Replacing bulbs 332
Switching on 122
Folding electrically
Exterior rear view mirrors
170
Four wheel electronic traction system
(4MATIC)
with ESP 81
4MATIC 81
Front airbags 61
Front lamps
Messages in display 313–315
Replacing bulbs 331, 333
Switching on 120
Front seat head restraints
Installing 106
Power seat 105
Removing 105
FSS (Flexible Service System) 280, 383
Fuel 261
Fuel reserve warning lamp 294
Premium unleaded gasoline 261
Fuel consumption statistics
After start 143
Since last reset 144
Fuel filler flap 261
Locking 261
Opening 329
Unlocking 261
Fuel reserve tank
Message in display 311
Fuel tank
Filler flap 261
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. 371
Functions (control system) 131, 134
Resetting 147
Fuse box 353, 354
Fuse chart 323
Fuses 353
Auxiliary fuse box in trunk 353
Fuse box in engine compartment 354
Fuse box in passenger compartment
353
Fuse boxes in the engine compartment
355
Fuse chart 323
Fuse extractor 323
Spare fuses 323
G
Garage door opener 245
Erasing in remote control 247
Integrated remote control 246
Rolling code programming 246
Gasoline see Fuel 261
Gear range 383
Automatic transmission 162
Limiting 162
Shifting into optimal 161
Gear range limit
Canceling 161
Gear selector lever
Cleaning 287
Position 163
Global
Locking 87
Unlocking 87
Global Positioning System (GPS) 383
Glove box 224
Closing 224
Opening 224
Good visibility 168
GPS 383
GPS see COMAND* 243
395
Index
H
Hand-held transmitter
Programming integrated remote control 246
Hands-free microphone 27
Hard plastic trim items
Cleaning 287
Hazard warning flasher 124
Switching off 124
Switching on 124
Head restraint folding 114
Head restraints 105
Headlamp cleaning system* 271
Headlamps
Automatic control 121
Bi-Xenon 381
Cleaning 284
Cleaning system* 171, 271
Refilling washer fluid 271
Switching off 51
Switching on 46
Headliner
Cleaning 287
Heated steering wheel* 235
Height adjustment
Head restraints 37
396
Steering wheel 37
Height adjustments
Vehicle level 212, 215
High beam
Replacing bulbs 331
High beam flasher 46, 123
High beam headlamps
Messages in display 313
Switching on 123
High mounted brake lamp 332
Hood 263
Closing 264
Message in display 311
Opening 263
Hydroplaning 255
I
Identification labels 360
Ignition 31, 33
Switching on 43
Immobilizer 82
Activating 82
Deactivating 82
Indicator lamps see Lamps, indicator and
warning
Individual seats* 114
Infant and child restraint systems 67
Installing 71
LATCH child seat anchors 72
Information
About service and warranty 10
Button for Tele Aid* 242
Infrared reflecting windshield 248
Inside rear view mirror
Adjusting 38
Antiglare 168
Installing
Infant and child restraint systems 71
Towing eye bolt 351
Wiper blades 338
Instrument cluster 22, 127, 383
Cleaning 287
Coolant temperature gauge 128
Illumination 127
Multifunction display 130
Outside temperature indicator 129
Selecting language 150
Integrated remote control
Canadian programming 247
Erasing memory 247
Hand-held transmitter 246
Operating 247
Index
Rolling code programming 246
Interior lighting 124
Activating automatic control 125
Deactivating automatic control 125
Delayed shut-off 153
Manual operation 125
Interior storage spaces 224
Cup holder 229
Glove box 224
Parcel net 232
Storage compartment in front of armrest 225, 226, 227, 228
J
Jump starting 347
K
Key dependency memory
Settings 156
Key see SmartKey 30, 52
Key, mechanical 326
Key, SmartKey
Positions in starter switch 31
KEYLESS-GO* 383
Activating ignition with 33
Closing side windows 93
Closing sliding/pop-up roof 93
Closing sliding/pop-up roof with 190,
194
Closing windows with 190, 194
Locking the vehicle 93
Loss of KEYLESS-GO card 94
Messages in display 303
Starting the engine 43
Turning off engine 53
Unlocking with 32
KEYLESS-GO* card 89
Checking the batteries 92
Checking vehicle lock status 93
Factory setting 91
Global locking 91
Global unlocking 92
Loss of 94
Messages in display 303
Reprogramming 91
Unlocking 89
Keys 86
Kickdown 165, 383
Kilometers/miles in speedometer 149
Km/h or mph in speedometer 149
L
Lamp bulbs, exterior 331
Lamps, exterior
Front 331
Light sensor 312
Messages in display 314
Rear 332
Lamps, indicator and warning
ABS 291
Airbag Off 61
Battery (SmartKey) 87
Brakes 293
CHECK ENGINE 294
Coolant 304
DTR* 201
Engine diagnostics 294
ESP 290
Fuel reserve 294
Instrument cluster 290–294
Seat belts 294
Service indicator 280
SRS 57
Language
Multifunction display 150
Setting 150
LATCH child seat anchors 72
397
Index
Layout of poly-V-belt drive 361
Leather upholstery
Cleaning 287
Lever
For cruise control 203
License plate lamps
Replacing bulbs 332, 336
Light alloy wheels
Cleaning 286
Light sensor 312
Lighter see Cigarette lighter 233
Lighting 120
Automatic headlamp mode 121
Combination switch 123
Daytime running lamp mode 122
Exterior lamp switch 120
Front fog lamps 122
High beam flasher 123
High beams 123
Instrument cluster illumination 127
Interior 124
Locator lighting 122
Low beam 120
Manual headlamp mode 121
Night security illumination 122
Parking lamps 120
398
Rear fog lamp 123
Settings (control system) 150
Limiting the gear range 162
Limp Home Mode 165
Loading 222
Cargo tie-down hooks 223
Instructions 222
Roof rack 222
Locator lighting 122
Setting 151
Lock button 383
Lock buttons 383
Door handle (KEYLESS-GO*) 53
Locking 50, 86
Fuel filler flap 261
Global (KEYLESS-GO* card) 91, 92
Global, SmartKey 87
The vehicle with KEYLESS-GO* 93
Trunk lid, separately 98
Vehicle in an emergency 327
Loss of keys 89, 94
Low beam headlamps
Messages in display 313, 314
Replacing bulbs 331
Lowering
Vehicle 342
Lumbar support adjustment 104
M
Main Dimensions 369
Maintenance 12, 280
Malfunction
Displaying 145
Malfunction memory 145
Calling up 145
Manual headlamp mode 121
Manual operations
Fuel filler flap 329
Interior lighting control 125
Locking the vehicle 327
Sliding/pop-up roof 330
Unlocking the driver’s door 326
Unlocking the trunk lid 327
Manual shift program S 55 AMG 166
Massage function 109
MAXCOOL
Maximum cooling 179
Mechanical key 326
Memory function 117, 383
Recalling positions from memory 118
Storing exterior rear view mirror parking positions 118
Storing key dependent settings 118
Index
Menus 131
AUDIO 135
Control system 383
Distronic* 142, 202
In control system 133, 134
Malfunction memory 145
NAVI 142
Settings menu 146
Standard display 135
Submenus 132
TEL* 139
Trip computer 143
Microphone
Hands-free microphone 27
Miles/kilometers in speedometer
Setting 149
Spare wheel
Mounting 339
Mirrors
Activating exterior rear view mirror
parking position 169
Adjusting 38
Automatic antiglare for rear view mirror
168
Exterior rear view mirror 39
Exterior rear view mirror parking
position 158
Inside rear view mirror 38
Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position 118
MON 261
MON (Motor Octane Number) 383
Mph or km/h in speedometer 149
Multicontour seat* 107
Multifunction display 130, 383
Selecting language 150
Standard display 134
Multifunction display messages
ABC 297, 299
ABS 298
BAS 300, 310
Brake fluid 302
Brake pads 302
Check engine 294
Coolant 305
Coolant level 304
Distronic* 307
Doors 307
Engine 294
Engine oil level 309
Entry position 321
Fuel reserve tank 311
Hood 311
Key 311
KEYLESS-GO* card 303
Lamps 314
Parking brake 315
Selector lever 307
TeleAid 320
Telephone* 321
Tires 318
Trunk 321
Washer fluid 321
Multifunction steering wheel 24, 131, 384
Buttons 131
N
Navigation system
Operating 142
See separate COMAND* operating instructions
Night security illumination 122
O
Occupant safety 56
Airbags 57
Children and airbags 58
Children in the vehicle 67
399
Index
Fastening the seat belt 40
Infant and child restraint systems 67
LATCH child seat anchors 72
Seat belts 40, 60
Oil
Adding 266, 267
Checking level 264
Consumption 264
Filler neck 267
Viscosity 382
Oil level
Checking 262
One-touch gearshifting 161
Canceling gear range limit 161
Downshifting 161
Upshifting 161
Opening
Ashtray 232
Cup holder 230
Doors from the inside 94
Fuel filler flap 261
Fuel filler flap manually 329
Glove box 224
Hood 263
Side windows 188, 189
Sliding/pop-up roof 192, 330
400
Sliding/pop-up roof in an emergency
330
Sliding/pop-up roof with SmartKey
194
Storage space in the armrest 226
Storage space in the center console
225, 226, 227
Trunk 95
Trunk from the inside 96
Windows 188
Windows with SmartKey 190
Opening from the inside
Trunk 99
Operating
CD player 136
COMAND* see separate operating instructions
Garage door opener 247
Integrated remote control 247
Navigation system 142
Radio 136
Radio transmitters 258
Safety 16
Telephone* 139
Vehicle outside the USA and Canada
13
Operating safety 16
Operator’s Manual 10
Ornamental moldings 284
Outside temperature indicator 129
Overdue service 280
Overhead control panel 27
Garage door opener 27
Reading lamp 27
Rear view mirror 27
Tele Aid button 27
Override switch see Blocking of rear window operation 74
Overspeed range 384
P
Paintwork 283
Panic alarm 75
Panic button on SmartKey 75
Parcel net in front passenger footwell 232
Parcel net in trunk 232
Parking 50, 253
Parking and standing lamps
Replacing bulbs 331
Parking assist see Parktronic 218
Parking brake 44, 50
Engaging 50
Message in display 315
Index
Releasing 44
Warning sound 45
Parking lamps
Replacing bulbs 332, 335
Switching on 120
Parking position
Exterior rear view mirrors 118, 158,
169
Parktronic 218
Parktronic* 384
Sensor 285
Passenger compartment 258
Fuse box in 353
Inside rear view mirror 38
Interior lighting 124
Parcel net in front passenger footwell
232
Passenger safety see Occupant safety 56
Passenger seat fore and aft adjustment
116
Passenger seat head restraint height 116
Passenger seat height 116
Pedals 251
Phone book*
Loading 140
Quick search 141
Phone number*
Dialing 140
Redialing 141
Plastic and rubber parts
Cleaning 287
Pliers, universal (vehicle tool kit) 323
Poly-V-belt drive 384
Positions (Memory function)
Recalling from memory 118
Positions (Memory function*)
Storing into memory 118
Power assistance 251
Power seat
Adjusting backrest tilt 36
Adjusting head restraint height 37
Adjusting head restraint tilt 37
Adjusting seat cushion depth 36
Adjusting seat cushion tilt 36
Adjusting seat height 36
Front seat head restraints 105
Seat fore and aft adjustment 36
Power seat bench* 113
Power train 384
Power washer 283
Power windows 188
Blocking of rear window operation 74
Side windows 188
Synchronizing 191
Practical hints
First aid kit 322
Fuses 353
Lamp in center console 295
Lamps in instrument cluster 290
Messages in the display 296
Towing the vehicle 349
Vehicle tool kit 322
PRE-SAFE see Preventive occupant safety
66
Preventive occupant safety (PRE-SAFE) 66
Problems
While driving 48
With vehicle 17
Product information 9
Program mode selector switch 384
Automatic transmission 164
PULSE function (Massage function) 109
Q
Quick search
Phone book* 141
R
Radio
401
Index
Selecting stations 136
Station search 136
Station selection setting 154
Radio transmitters, control and operation
258
Range (distance to empty)
Calling up 145
Rear fog lamp 332
Bulb 332
Switching on 123
Rear lamp bulbs
Replacing 336
Rear lamps see Tail lamps
Rear passenger compartment
Adjustable air vents 186
Rear seat head restraints
Folding back with switch 106
Placing upright 106
Rear seats 106
Rear seats 113
Fore and aft adjustment 114
Head restraint folding 114
Individual seats* 114
Passenger seat fore and aft adjustment
116
Passenger seat head restraint height
402
116
Passenger seat height 116
Rear seat head restraints 106
Seat height 114
Setting passenger seat position from
rear* 115
Rear view mirror 27
Rear view mirror automatic antiglare 168
Rear view mirrors see Mirrors
Rear window
Blocking operation 74
Rear window defroster 183
Activating 183
Deactivating 183
Rear window sunshade* 173
Reconnecting
Vehicle battery 345
Regular checks 262
Regular driving style 214
Reinstalling vehicle battery 345
Remote controls
Integrated 246
SmartKey 86
Remote door unlock
With Tele Aid* 244
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics 384
Removing
Vehicle battery 345
Wheel 341
Wiper blades 337
Replacing
Backup lamp bulbs 336
Brake fluid 373
Brake lamp bulbs 336
Bulbs 331
Front lamp bulbs 333
License plate lamp bulbs 336
Parking lamp bulbs 335
Rear fog lamp bulbs 336
Rear lamp bulbs 332, 336
Rear turn signal bulbs 336
Side marker lamp bulbs 335
Standing lamp bulbs 335
Wiper blades 337
Reporting
Safety defects 18
Reset knob in the instrument cluster 146
Resetting
All functions (control system) 146
All functions of a submenu 147
Fuel consumption 144
Service indicator (FSS) 281
Index
Trip odometer 128
Residual heat utilization 185, 384
Residual ventilation 185
REST (Residual engine heat utilization) 384
Restraint system see Infant and child restraint systems 67, 71
Rims and Tires 364
Roadside assistance 12
Tele Aid* 240
Rolling code programming 246
RON 261
RON (Research Octane Number) 385
Roof rack 222
Rotating wheels 277
Rubber parts
Cleaning 287
S
Safety
Occupant 56
Safety belts see Seat belts 40
Safety defects
Reporting 18
Safety systems
Driving 76
Screwdriver (vehicle tool kit) 323
Searching
Radio station 136
Seat belt force limiter 65
Seat belts 62
Cleaning 287
Fastening 40
Proper use of 42, 64
Safety guidelines 60
Warning lamp 294
Seat cushion depth
Adjusting 108
Seat for and aft adjustment 114
Seat heater
Switching off 111
Switching on 111
Seat height 114
Seat ventilation*
Switching off 110
Switching on 110
Seats 104
Adjusting 34
Adjusting lumbar support 108
Adjusting shoulder support 108
Easy entry/exit feature 104
Heater 111
Massage function 109
Multicontour seat* 107
Rear power seat bench* 113
Rear seats 113
Securing cargo
Cargo tie-down hooks 223
Selector lever
Lock 43
Message in display 307
Position 160
Self-test
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system 70
Tele Aid* 238
Service
Calling up the service indicator 281
Major service (Service B) 280
Minor service (Service A) 280
Overdue 280
Types 280
When due 280
Service (maintenance) 280
Service and warranty information 10
Service indicator 280
Calling up 281
Clearing 280, 281
Service life (tires) 273
403
Index
Service System see FSS
Setting
Convenience functions 155
Cruise control 197
Daytime running lamp mode 151
Digital clock 23
Distronic* time interval 206
Following distance in Distronic* 206
Higher speed in cruise control 198
Higher speed in Distronic* 204
Individual vehicle settings 146
Interior lighting delayed shut-off 153
Key dependent memory 156
Lamps and lighting (control system)
150
Language, multifunction display 150
Locator lighting 151
Lower speed in cruise control 198
Lower speed in Distronic* 205
Miles/kilometers in speedometer 149
Parking position for exterior rear view
mirrors 158
Slower speed in cruise control 198
Slower speed in Distronic* 205
Speed in cruise control 198
Speed in Distronic* 204
404
Speedometer display mode 149
Station selection mode 154
Suspension tuning 213
Temperature (interior) 177
Temperature indicator 149
Time 23
To last stored speed in Distronic* ("Resume" function) 205
Units
Speedometer 149
Temperature 149
Vehicle level control 212, 215
Setting current speed 197
Setting passenger seat position from rear*
115
Settings
Calling up Distronic* 142, 202
Convenience functions 155
Factory, SmartKey 87
Individual (SmartKey) 156
Lighting (control system) 150
Menus and submenus 132
Resetting all (control system) 146
Resetting in the submenu 147
Selective 87
Settings menu
Functions in 146
Individual vehicle settings 146
Submenus 147
Shift lock 385
Shifting
Gear selector lever positions 163
Into optimal gear range (automatic
transmission) 161
Shoulder support
Seat adjustment 108
Side impact airbags 61
Side marker lamps
Replacing bulbs 331, 332, 335
Side windows
Automatic opening 189
Cleaning 286
Closing 188, 189, 190
Closing with KEYLESS-GO* 93, 190,
194
Closing with SmartKey 190
Opening 188, 190
Opening fully 189
Opening with SmartKey 190
Stopping 189
Synchronizing power windows 191
Index
Simultaneous wiping and washing
Windshield wipers 48
Single wipe 47
Sliding/pop-up roof 192
Closing 192, 330
Closing with KEYLESS-GO* 93, 190,
194
Closing with SmartKey 194
Opening 192, 330
Opening with SmartKey 194
Stopping 193
Synchronizing 195
SmartKey 30
Battery check lamp 87
Changing batteries 328
Changing the batteries 328, 329
Checking the batteries 88
Factory setting 87
Global locking 87
Global locking and unlocking 87
Global unlocking 87
Locking and unlocking 86
Loss of 89
Opening and closing the sliding/pop-up roof with 194
Opening and closing windows with 190
Remote controls 86
Restoring to factory setting 88
Selective setting 87
Starting the engine 43
Turning off the engine 52
Unlocking with 30
SmartKey positions in starter switch 31
Snow chains 279
Spare fuses 323
Spare parts service 358
Speed
Setting current 197
Setting to last stored speed in Distronic* ("Resume" function) 205
Speed settings
Cruise control 198
Distronic* 204, 205
Speedometer
Displaying gear range 162
Displays 201
Settings units 149
Speedometer display mode
Selecting 149
Sporty driving style 214
SRS 64, 385
Indicator lamp 292
SRS indicator lamp 56
Standing lamps 120
Replacing bulbs 331, 332, 335
Standing water
Driving instructions 257
Starter switch 31
Positions 31
Starting difficulties 44
Starting position 31
Starting the engine 42
Station (radio)
Search 136
Station selection
Setting 154
Steering column
Height adjustment 38
Length adjustment 38
Steering wheel
Adjusting 37
Adjustment 38
Cleaning 287
Heated steering wheel* 235
Height adjustment 38
Steering wheel adjustment 38
405
Index
Steering wheel gearshift control (Speedshift) and manual shift program
S 55 AMG 166
Stolen vehicle
Tracking services 244
Stopping
Sliding/pop-up roof 193
Windows 189
Storage compartment ventilation 184
Storage compartments
Armrest 225, 226, 227, 228
Glove box 224
Storage spaces
Cup holder 230
Storage tray 225, 226, 227
Storing (Memory function*)
Positions into memory 118
Submenus
Convenience 155
For settings 132
In control system 134
Instrument cluster 149
Lighting 150
Resetting functions in Control system
147
Selecting 147
406
Settings menu 147
Vehicle 154
Sun visors 172
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) 385
Suspension tuning
For regular driving style 214
For sporty driving style 214
Setting 213
Switching off
Automatic central locking (control system) 155
Engine 52
ESP 80
Hazard warning flasher 124
Headlamps 51
Switching on
Automatic central locking (control system) 155
ESP 80
Front fog lamps 122
Front lamps 120
Hazard warning flasher 124
Headlamps 46
High beams 123
Parking lamps 120
Rear fog lamp 123
Windshield wipers 47
Symbol (Distronic*)
Distance warning function* 142
Synchronizing
Power windows 191
Sliding/pop-up roof 195
T
Tachometer 129
Overspeed range 129
Tail lamps
Cleaning 284
Replacing bulbs 332, 336
Tar stains 283
Tele Aid
Information 242
Initiating an emergency call manually
240
Roadside assistance 240
Tele Aid System 237
Tele Aid button 27
Tele Aid System 385
Tele Aid* 237
Emergency calls 238
Remote door unlock 244
Stolen vehicle tracking services 244
System self-check 238
Index
Upgrade signals 243
TeleAid
Messages in display 320
Telematics* 385
Telephone* 236
Answering a call 140
Dialing a number from the phone book
140
Ending a call 140
Hands-free microphone 27
Loading phone book* 140
Messages in display 321
Operating 139
Redialing 141
Temperature
Display mode 149
Setting interior temperature 177
Setting units in display 149
Tires 274
Tie-down hooks (Trunk) 223
Tightening torque 385
Tightening torque (Wheel bolts) 342
Time
Setting digital clock 23
Tire inflation pressure
Checking 262, 273
Tire speed rating 255, 385
Tire traction 255
Tires 272, 378
Direction of rotation 273
Driving instructions 254
Messages in display 318
Retreads 272
Service life 273
Temperature 274
Tread depth 278
Wear pattern 277
Winter 278
Tools 322
Tow-away alarm 84
Arming 84
Disarming 84
Disarming for transport 84
Towing eye bolt (vehicle tool kit) 323
Installing 351
Towing the vehicle 349
Tracking services
For stolen vehicle 244
Traction 164, 385
Transmission see Automatic transmission
268
Tread depth (tires) 278
Trip computer 143
Trip odometer
Resetting 128
Trunk
Auxiliary fuse box 353
Closing 97
Closing from the inside 99
Lock button, KEYLESS-GO* 93
Locking separately 98
Message in display 321
Opening 95
Opening from inside vehicle 96
Opening from the inside 99
Parcel net 232
Tie-down hooks 223
Trunk lid 95, 99
Trunk lock 327
Unlocking in an emergency 327
Unlocking separately 98, 102
Unlocking with SmartKey 89, 94
Trunk lid emergency release 96
Trunk lid opening/closing system* 99
Turn signal lamps
Replacing bulbs 331, 332
407
Index
Turn signals 46
Additional in mirrors 331
Cleaning lenses 284
Front bulbs 331, 334
Rear bulbs 332, 336
Turning off
Engine 52
Turning off the engine 53
U
Units
Setting speedometer units 149
Setting temperature units 149
Unlocking 30, 86
Driver’s door in an emergency 326
Fuel filler flap 261
Global 87
Global (KEYLESS-GO* card) 91
In an emergency 326
Selective settings 87
Trunk in an emergency 327
Trunk lid with SmartKey 89, 94
Trunk lid, separately 98, 102
Vehicle in an emergency 244
With KEYLESS-GO* 32
With the KEYLESS-GO* card 89
With the SmartKey 30
408
Upgrade signals
Tele Aid* 243
Uphill driving
Cruise control 197
Upshifting 161, 166
Useful features 224
Ashtrays 232
Cigarette lighter 233
Garage door opener 245
Heated steering wheel* 235
Interior storage spaces 224
Tele Aid* 237
Telephone* 236
V
Vehicle
Individual settings 146, 148
Locking in an emergency 327
Lowering 342
Proper use of 16
Service battery 344
Towing 349
Unlocking in an emergency 326
Vehicle battery 344
Vehicle care 282
Cup holder 287
Distronic* system sensor cover 285
Engine cleaning 284
Gear selector lever 287
Hard plastic trim items 287
Headlamps 284
Instrument cluster 287
Leather upholstery 287
Light alloy wheels 286
Ornamental moldings 284
Paintwork 283
Parktronic* system sensor 285
Plastic and rubber parts 287
Power washer 283
Seat belts 287
Steering wheel 287
Tail lamps 284
Tar stains 283
Turn signals 284
Vehicle washing 284
Window cleaning 286
Wiper blades 286
Vehicle level 212, 215
Changing 213, 216
Setting 213, 216
Automatic 213, 216
Manual 213, 216
Vehicle lighting
Index
Checking 262
Vehicle lock status
Checking (KEYLESS-GO*) 93
Vehicle tool kit 322, 323
Alignment bolt 323
Fuse chart 323
Fuse extractor 323
Hex-socket wrench 323
Open-end wrench 323
Screwdriver 323
Spare fuses 323
Universal pliers 323
Wheel wrench 323
Vehicle washing 284
Ventilation
Storage compartment 184
VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) 385
Voice control system* 385
Hands-free microphone 27
W
Warning lamps see Lamps, indicator and
warning
Warning sounds
Distance warning function* 207
Distronic* 201
Drivers seat belts 62
Parking brake 45
Warranty coverage 359
Washing the vehicle 282
Wear pattern (tires) 277
Weights 370
Wheel change
Tightening torque 342
Wheels
Rotating 277
Tires and wheels 272
Window curtain airbags 61
Windows see Side windows
Windshield
Refilling washer fluid 271
Replacing wiper blades 337
Washer fluid 271
Windshield washer fluid
Message in display 321
Refilling 271
Wiping with 48
Windshield wipers 47, 171
Fast wiper speed 47
Intermittent wiping 47
Replacing wiper blades 337
Single wipe 47
Switching on 47
Wiping with windshield washer fluid 48
Winter driving 278
Block heater* 279
Snow chains 279
Tires 278
Transmission program mode 166
Winter driving instructions 256
Winter tires 278
Wiper blades
Cleaning 286
Installing 338
Removing 337
Replacing 337
Wiping
And washing simultaneously 48
Interval 47
With windshield washer fluid 48
Wrench, hex-socket (vehicle tool kit) 323
Wrench, open-end (vehicle tool kit) 323
Wrench, wheel (vehicle tool kit) 323
X
Xenon headlamps
Bi-Xenon 381
409
410
Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your vehicle properly. For
expert advice and quality service, see your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If your are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com.
G
Warning
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of
incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have any question about carrying out some service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator’s Manual. Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.
Title illustration no. P00.01-2396-31
Press time 01/17/03
GSP/SIP
Printed in Germany
Download PDF